all | frequencies |
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|
manual |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 |
|
Users Manual | Users Manual | 2.24 MiB | / November 03 2010 | |||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 | External Photos | / November 03 2010 | ||||||
1 2 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 | Internal Photos | / November 03 2010 | ||||||
1 2 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 | Test Setup Photos | / November 03 2010 | ||||||
1 2 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 | Test Setup Photos | / November 03 2010 |
1 2 | Users Manual | Users Manual | 2.24 MiB | / November 03 2010 |
This device is not intended for sale in the USA. Part 15.21 statement
" Change or Modifications that are not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Part 15.105 statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. if this equipment does cause harmful interference or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Part 15 Class B Compliance This device and its accessories comply with part15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device & its accessories may not cause harmful interference.
(2) This device & its accessories must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Body-worn Operation This USB modem has been tested for typical body-worn operations with the distance of 0.79inches (2.0cm) from the users body. To comply with FCC RF exposure requirements, a minimum separation distance of 0.79inches(2.05cm) must be maintained from the user's body. Before Using the Handset 28 Part Names and Functions 33 Viewing Display 36 Illumination 36 Using Touch Panel 37 Selecting Menu Using UIM (FOMA Card) 43 Attaching/Removing Battery Pack 46 Charging 47 50 Checking Battery Level Battery level Turning Power ON/OFF Power ON/OFF 51 Changing Screen Display to English or Korean Select language 52 Making Initial Settings 52 Setting Date and Time Set Date&Time 53 Notifying the Other Party of Your Phone Number Caller ID notication Checking Your Own Phone Number Own Number 54 54 27 Part Names and Functions b Front b Front with the FOMA terminal closed b Rear
b Left side b Right side 28 Before Using the Handset
* The FOMA antenna is inside the FOMA terminal. To communicate in better condition, avoid covering the antenna part with your hands. Using earphones Connect earphones compatible with the external connector terminal (optional). If you use the incompatible earphones, connect the conversion plug adapter (optional) to the earphones. Earphone terminal
(Flat type) Flat plug for the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch Plug Example: Connecting the Flat-plug Earphone/
Microphone with Switch (optional) a Infrared Port When performing infrared communications, point this towards the other device.P328 b Inner camera Capture your own image or moving picture.P222, P227 Show your own image during a videophone call. c Illumination sensor Detect surrounding brightness with the sensor and adjust the display brightness automatically.P110 Do not cover this sensor with a hand or do not attach a sticker, etc. The brightness may not be detected. d Earpiece/Speaker The other party's voice comes out from here. Ring tones, alarm tones, and melodies sound from here. The other party's voice comes out from here during a Hands-
free call. e DisplayP33 f Z/O GoogleTM service key Display the GoogleTM service menu (P334). (If there is a function in use, it may not be displayed.) Press this for 1+ seconds to exit each function and return to the Stand-by display. g Mouthpiece During a call, transmit your voice through this. During a moving picture capture, this works as a microphone. h Navigation key Used to move the cursor, scroll through the screen, or execute the selected operation. C Execute the selected operation. Press this for 1+ seconds in Stand-by to set/cancel the IC card lock.P292 U Move the cursor up. Press this in Stand-by to display Schedule. Press this while MUSIC player, etc. is running to increase the volume. D Move the cursor down. Press this in Stand-by to display the Phonebook list screen
(P91), and press for 1+ seconds to display the Add to phonebook screen (P84). Press this while MUSIC player, etc. is running to reduce the volume. L Move the cursor left. Also, return to the previous screen. Press this in Stand-by to display the Received calls list screen
(P62), and press for 1+ seconds to display the Received mail list screen (P167). R Move the cursor right. Also, go to the next screen. Press this in Stand-by to display the Redial list screen (P60), and press for 1+ seconds to display the Sent mail list screen (P167). Before Using the Handset Continue on the next page Continued on next page 29 i M Menu key/Upper left soft key Press this in Stand-by to display the Main menu (P37). Execute the operation indicated for the upper left soft key.P32 j g Mail key/Lower left soft key Press this in Stand-by to display the Mail menu screen (P137), and press for 1+ seconds to check new messages.P150, P173 Execute the operation indicated for the lower left soft key.P32 k A Start key Make/answer a voice or videophone call.P56, P72 Press this in Stand-by to display the Phone number entry screen (P56). l Dial keys Press to enter a phone number or characters.P443 Press 0 for 1+ seconds in Stand-by to enter "+".P68 m * Public mode (Drive mode) key Enter ":"/"". Press this for 1+ seconds in Stand-by to set/cancel Public mode (Drive mode).P76 n I i-mode/i-ppli key/Upper right soft key Press this in Stand-by to display the i-mode menu screen
(P182), and press for 1+ seconds to display the i-ppli Software list screen (P275). Execute the operation indicated for the upper right soft key.P32 During character entry, use this to switch the input mode
(Hiragana/Katakana/alphabetic and numeric characters).P376 o T Camera/TV key Press this in Stand-by to display the Still image capture screen
(P222), and press for 1+ seconds to display the 1Seg watch screen (P245). During character entry, use this to switch the input mode
(pictographs/symbols/emoticons).P381 p Q Clear/i-Channel key Return to the previous state or return to the Stand-by display. Press this in Stand-by to display the Channel list screen (P203). 30 Before Using the Handset q P Power/Exit key Press this for 2+ seconds to turn the power on/o.P51 Used to end a call or terminate a function. r # Manner mode key Enter "#". Press this for 1+ seconds in Stand-by to set/cancel Manner mode.P105 s Strap hole t Illumination View the time with the FOMA terminal closed. Also, notify of incoming calls or mails, the status of the FOMA terminal, etc. by illumination patterns.P36 u External connector terminal The integrated terminal used for charging and connecting earphones. Connect the AC adapter (optional), DC adapter (optional), FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (optional), or Earphone Plug Adapter for External connector terminal (optional). v Charger terminal Terminal for charging with the desktop holder. w N Multitask key Press this for 1+ seconds to display the New task screen. P349 Display the Task list screen.P350 x Y Lock key Set/cancel the lock for the touch panel and keys.P125 y Outer camera Capture a still image or moving picture such as landscape, etc. P222, P227 Capture surrounding image during a videophone call. z Photo light/Light Light up when capturing a still image/moving picture. You can light this up when using the camera. A Back cover Remove this when inserting/removing the UIM or battery pack. P43, P46 Do not remove the sticker attached at the back side of the Back cover. If removing it, the IC card contents may not be read or written. B mark The IC card is included (cannot be removed). Hold this on the scanning device to use as Osaifu-Keitai.P291 C microSD card slot Insert a microSD card.P318 D FE Volume key Use to adjust the volume, etc. Press these during a call to adjust the receiver volume. Press E for 1+ seconds to display the Record message list screen (P79). Press these on the Playback screen of MUSIC player, etc. to adjust the playback volume. Press these on the List screen to move the cursor or scroll the screen to the next page. E G Camera/TV key Press this in Stand-by to display the Still image capture screen
(P222), and press for 1+ seconds to display the 1Seg watch screen (P245). Press this on the Still image/Moving picture capture screen to work as shutter and capture images/moving pictures. P223, P228 F 1Seg antenna Receive 1Seg broadcasting.P240
* This is not the FOMA antenna. Opening the FOMA Terminal You can use this FOMA terminal with the FOMA terminal closed, opened, and in Turn View Style mode. It is recommended to keep the FOMA terminal closed when you carry the terminal. Turn View Style
Open the FOMA terminal up to the angle shown below and rotate the display 180 degrees to the right
Fold the display forward Before Using the Handset Continue on the next page Continued on next page 31 When rotating the display Note When changing the FOMA terminal in Turn View Style mode, do not rotate the display to the left or further than 180 degrees. Also, do not hit the edge of the display on the terminal body or keys. Scratch or damage may result. When changing in Turn View Style mode, take care not to pinch your ngers. Soft Keys Available operations on the currently opened screen are displayed as Soft keys at the bottom of the screen. To execute the soft key operation, press the following corresponding keys or directly touch the soft key display. The Soft key description diers depending on the function or display status. 32 Before Using the Handset a Operation performed using M appears. b Operation performed using C appears. The mark (
for scrolling or item selection.
) also appears to indicate the available direction c Operation performed using I appears. d Operation performed using g appears. e Operation performed using T appears. Note In Turn View Style mode, some Soft keys may not appear, or descriptions may change compared to the state when the FOMA terminal is opened. Notation for Soft Key Operations This manual describes the Soft key operations as follows. M [Menu]
Corresponding key Soft key display Viewing Display The descriptions of the icons appearing at the top of the screen are as follows. Strong a b c (Blinking)
(Blinking) Weak Signal strengthP51 Self mode setP124 Out of service area or no signal receptionP51 Voice call in progressP57 Videophone call in progressP57 Reject all calls function setP128 Infrared remote controller operation in progress P330 i-mode connection in progressP183 i-mode communication/i-Channel message reception in progressP183
(Blinking) Full browser connection in progress
(Blinking) Full browser communication in progress Full browser connection in progress (no communication for a certain period of time)
(Blinking) Packet connection via PC, etc/disconnection in progress Packet communication via PC, etc. in progress Packet reception via PC, etc. in progress Packet transmission via PC, etc. in progress Packet reception/transmission via PC, etc. in progress Before Using the Handset Continue on the next page Continued on next page 33 d (White)
(Pink)
(White)
(Pink)
(White)
(Pink)
(White)
(Pink) e (White)
(White)
(White)
(Pink) i-mode mails stored at the i-mode centerP149 i-mode center mailbox full MessageR stored at the i-mode centerP173 MessageR at the i-mode center full MessageF stored at the i-mode centerP173 MessageF at the i-mode center full i-mode mails and MessageR/F stored at the i-mode center i-mode mails and MessageR/F at the i-mode center full Unread i-mode mailsP147 Unread SMSP177 Unread i-mode mails and SMS Inbox in the FOMA terminal full of unread mails and protected mails. SMS in the UIM full Inbox in the FOMA terminal full of unread mails and protected mails. SMS in the UIM full f (White)
(Pink)
(White)
(Pink) Unread MessageRP174 MessageR in the FOMA terminal full Unread MessageFP174 MessageF in the FOMA terminal full g h SSL-compatible page displayed or loadingP185 i-ppli runningP275 i- ppliDX runningP275 i-ppli Stand-by display displayedP285 i- ppliDX Stand-by display displayedP285
(Gray)
(Gray) 34 Before Using the Handset i A function (task) activatedP349 Multiple functions (tasks) activated A function (task) and background playback activated Multiple functions (tasks) and background playback activated
(Blinking) Alarm started when no tone sounds due to another function (task) activated j k Battery levelP50 Lock all setP121 l (Pink)
(White) Manner mode setP105 Original manner mode setP105 m n o p q The ring tone for voice/videophone call muted, and vibration activeP101, P102 The ring tone for voice/videophone call and vibration activeP101, P102 The ring tone for voice/videophone call muted, and vibration inactiveP101, P102 The ring tone for Mail or MessageR/F muted, and vibration activeP101, P102 The ring tone for Mail or MessageR/F and vibration activeP101, P102 The ring tone for Mail or MessageR/F muted, and vibration inactiveP101, P102 Public mode (Drive mode) setP76 Record message activeP78 Alarm setP351 r s t u v w x y z A B C D E F G H I J K L Today's schedule/To do setP353, P357 Today's schedule/To do with alarm set P353, P357 microSD card insertedP318 Outgoing voice/videophone calls restrictedP123 Incoming voice/videophone calls restrictedP123 Incoming and outgoing voice/videophone calls restrictedP123 Outgoing mails restrictedP123 Incoming mails restrictedP123 Incoming and outgoing mails restrictedP123
"Data access lock" set to "ON"P124
"Secret mode" set to "Secret mode"P127
"Secret mode" set to "Secret data only"P127 Communication mode set and USB cable connected UIM not inserted/error occurred in the UIMP43 Terminal link applied IC card lock set i-ppli auto start failedP286 i-ppli Stand-by display released due to security errorP286 Call costs exceeded the limitP363 Reserving Music&Video Channel program download P254 Music&Video Channel program download completed P254 Music&Video Channel program download failed P254 Downloading Music&Video Channel program P254 Pattern denition update completedP462 Pattern denition update recommended Pattern denition update failed i-mode mail Auto send failed The rewrite notice iconP461 The update notice iconP462 Reserving software updateP463 i-mode mail Auto send reservedP139 Missed call (with the number of calls) Unread mail (with the number of mails) Voice mail message (with the number of messages)P392 Record message (with the number of messages) Before Using the Handset Continue on the next page Continued on next page 35 Note Some characters or symbols appearing on the display may be partially deformed or abbreviated. Icons appearing on the display are based on the default settings. The display of the FOMA terminal may dier from the one in the manual depending on setting changes after purchase. The display of the FOMA terminal employs high-precision production technology, however, there may be instances where some dots may not light up while others may constantly light up. Note that this is not a failure. Note While another illumination notifying of missed call or unread mail, etc. is lighting up, the clock cannot be displayed. Illumination patterns can be changed depending on the item. P113 Illumination lights up or blinks only with the FOMA terminal closed. Illumination notifying of missed call or unread mail/message lights up or blinks for up to approximately 1 hour at approximately 10 seconds interval. Illumination Pressing F or E when or while the FOMA terminal is closed displays the clock for approximately 5 seconds. Incoming calls or mails, the status of the FOMA terminal, etc. are also notied by illumination patterns. (The following images are examples of illumination.) Clock display Incoming voice call/
videophone call Unread mail/
MessageR/F Music playback Alarm sounding Missed call Charging 36 Before Using the Handset Using Touch Panel The display of this FOMA terminal works as the touch panel. Touch the screen directly to perform various operations. When the FOMA terminal opens, both touch and key operations are available. However, depending on the functions, only either operation may be possible. This manual describes procedures mainly with key operations. While the touch panel light is turned o, touch panel operations are disabled. Turn the light on with the following operations.
- Press any key
- Open/close the FOMA terminal Cautions on using the touch panel The touch panel may not function in the following cases. Also, operations may not be performed correctly.
- Operations with a foreign object put on the panel
- Operations with the protective sheet or stickers attached Do not press the touch panel with a sharp-pointed object such as nail, pen, pin, etc. or nger strongly. Touch the panel softly and release your nger Ex.: Select an item or execute the selected operation Keep touching the touch panel and move your nger Ex.: Adjust volume This operation is described as
"touch" in this manual. This operation is described as
"slide" in this manual. Touch the panel softly and sweep upward or downward Ex: Scroll at high speed when there are too many items, etc. to be displayed on a screen (This operation may be disabled depending on the screen.) Note Touch panel operations can be notied with sound or vibration. P104 Touch operation is not available on sites which use Flash movies, and i-Channel or i-ppli screens. Selecting Menu The FOMA terminal allows you to access or set a function, and save items, etc. from the Main menu or sub menu. This FOMA terminal supports Kisekae Tool (P111). If the Menu screen design is changed by using Kisekae Tool, menu structure may change, depending on menu types, according to the frequency of use. Selecting Functions from Main Menu You can select a function using the following 3 methods.
- Navigation key
- Dial keys
- Touch panel Using steps for accessing the Main menu in Stand-by and displaying the setting screen for "Color theme" as an example, this section explains each operation method. This manual explains how to select functions using the navigation keys. Main menu Before Using the Handset Continue on the next page Continued on next page 37 b Functions and corresponding keys displayed on the Function Operation Main menu Function Operation Mail 1 i-mode 2 i-ppli 3 Phonebook 4 Data Box 5 MUSIC 6 LifeKit 7 Media 9 Settings * Own
8 1Seg 0 Osaifu-
Keitai Number Function Operation Depending on the Main menu design you use, the description of menu name may dier. Using Navigation Key
Press M in Stand-by
In the Main menu, use K to move the cursor to "Settings" and press C[Select]
Main menu appears.
On the Settings screen, use H to move the cursor to "Display" and press C[Select]
Display screen
On the Display screen, use H to move the cursor to "Color theme" and press C[Select]
Setting screen Color theme screen 38 Before Using the Handset Using Dial Keys
Press M in Stand-by
On the Main menu screen, press *
On the Settings screen, press 2
On the Display screen, press 4 corresponding to "Settings"
corresponding to "Display"
corresponding to "Color theme"
in Stand-by Using Touch Panel
Touch
On the Main menu screen, touch the icon for Alternatively, press M to display the Main menu.
"Settings"
The cursor is moved to "Settings". The cursor is moved to "Display".
Touch the icon for "Settings" again
On the Settings screen, touch "Display"
Touch "Display" again
On the Display screen, touch "Color theme"
Touch "Color theme" again The cursor is moved to "Color theme". Selecting a Function from Sub Menu When "Menu" appears on a soft key, you can access a sub menu to perform various functions. The sub menu items vary depending on the function or the FOMA terminal settings/saved items, etc. M[Menu]
Items with second hierarchy Sub menu Phone number entry screen List screen sub menu The list screen sub menu contains options such as "Delete"
that apply only to the highlighted item and ones such as
"Delete all" that apply to all items. When performing the operation that applies to only an item, move the cursor to the relevant item, and then press M[Menu]. Note You can move the cursor using H while the sub menu appears. Also, you can select an item by pressing the dial key corresponding to the menu number. For an item with the second hierarchy, move the cursor and press C[Select]/R to display the second hierarchy item. Press M[Close] to close the sub menu. Before Using the Handset Continue on the next page 39 Using Hot Keys to Access a Function You can use each function by touching 4 hot keys displayed in Stand-by. a Display the Main menu. b Display the Phone number entry screen. Touch for 1+ seconds to display the Recent call list screen. c Display the Mail menu screen (P137). Touch for 1+ seconds to check new messages (P150, P173). d Display the Phonebook list screen (P91). Touch for 1+ seconds to display the Add to phonebook screen (P84). Note Hot key operations are available only by touching the touch panel directly. 40 Before Using the Handset Using Shortcuts to Access a Function You can set shortcuts in Stand-by to access each function quickly by selecting the shortcut icons. Setting shortcutsP106
Stand-by display C Select a shortcut icon Shortcut icons Shortcuts Note You can perform operations by touching a shortcut icon twice directly. To change the setting, touch a shortcut icon for 1+ seconds. Select the icon with "" to delete the function from the shortcuts. Select "Edit shortcut" to display the Stand-by display setting screen.P106 Authentication Depending on the function or service to use, a password entry screen (P118) may appear for the authentication purpose. If the entry screen appears, use dial keys to enter the password and press C[OK]. If correctly entered, you can complete the steps or continue to the next step. The entered password appears as ""
(asterisk) marks. Password entry screen (Ex.:
Terminal security code entry screen) Note To cancel the password entry and close the entry screen, touch
. Basic Operations for Each Screen Returning to the Previous Screen/Stand-by Display If you selected undesired menu item and want to return to the previous screen, or cancel/end the operation and return to the Stand-by display, perform the following operations. Q: Return to the previous screen. (Touch Z(for 1+ seconds)/O(for 1+ seconds)/P: Return to the Stand-by display. If a conrmation to exit appears, select "Yes" to cancel the operation. Note Depending on the current operation on the FOMA terminal, pressing P/Z/O/Q may not return to the Stand-by display/previous screen. for touch panel operations.) Operations for Setting Items Each setting eld on a setting screen shows currently set item. To change settings, perform any of the following operations. Move the cursor to Select the setting the setting eld to eld to change and change and use C select an item on the list to switch the setting Move the cursor to the setting eld to change and use J to change the setting HCHC HJ HC Before Using the Handset Continue on the next page 41 Example of Sub Menu Description Items displayed on the sub menu may vary depending on the settings or saved items of the FOMA terminal.
[Sort]
Set conditions and sort les.
[Memory info.]
Handset memory : Display the status of storage space, etc. a b External memory : Display the status of storage space, etc. c in "Data Box". of the microSD card. a Item name. Press H/F/E to move the cursor to the item and press C[Select] to select. b Functional description of the item. c Item names, functional description, and operation description of items displayed when the items are selected. Note If multiple sub menus such as the Redial list screen or Redial detail screen are collectively described, some sub menus that do not actually appear may be included depending on the settings or screens. Notation for Menu Operations This manual explains operations to be performed mainly from the Stand-by display. Basically, descriptions of operations are simplied as follows. Example of Operation Description
M "Settings" "Display" "Call & Mail image"
a Key illustration to press for operation. b Function name for the main menu. Use K to move the cursor to the function name and press C[Select] to select. c Menu item names. This manual also uses the phrase
"Perform the following operation" or "select XXX". Use H to move the cursor to an item and press C[Select] to select. 42 Before Using the Handset Notations b Description of operations starting from other than the Stand-by display At the beginning of the operation, the status of the FOMA terminal or the screen to be displayed such as "Ringing" or
"List screen" is described. b Omitting C[Select] in the "Select" operation As shown in b and c of "Example of Operation Description" (P42), when selecting a target function from icons or lists, operations such as C[Select] are omitted from description. Similarly, in the cases such as password entry or xing entered characters, the operations such as C[OK] are omitted. b Omitting C in the operation to make into Inserting/Removing After operations described in "Turning Power OFF" (P51), turn over the FOMA terminal and remove the battery pack, then insert or remove the UIM.P47 Inserting When inserting the UIM, close the FOMA terminal and hold it with both hands.
With the IC side (gold) of the UIM down, while pushing the UIM surface, insert the UIM slowly until it is xed Notch The operation to select items with change to of C. is described as "Mark" omitting the operation and press C to Using UIM (FOMA Card) The UIM is an IC card that contains subscription information such as your phone number. You can use communication functions such as calling, mail, and i-mode, etc. by inserting the UIM into the FOMA terminal. You can insert the UIM into other FOMA terminals to use for various purposes. For details on how to handle the UIM, see the UIM instruction manual. Note Do not use excessive force when inserting the UIM to avoid damaging it. Before Using the Handset Continue on the next page 43 UIM Security Function The FOMA terminal incorporates the UIM security function
(UIM operational restriction function) to protect your data and les. When you download data or les from sites or acquire data attached to mail with the UIM inserted into the FOMA terminal, the UIM operational restriction function is automatically set to these data or les. Data or les with the UIM operational restriction function set are accessible only when the same UIM used when downloading data or les is inserted. The following data/les are restricted:
- File attached to i-mode mail
- MessageR/F with le (melodies/images) attached
- Screen memo
- Images inserted in Deco-mail or signature
- i-motion
- i-ppli (including i-ppli Stand-by display)
- Image (including animation and Flash movie)
- Chaku-Uta/Chaku-Uta Full song
- Melody
- Kisekae Tool
- Mail template with motion-restricted data
- Music&Video Channel program
* "Chaku-Uta" is a registered trademark of Sony Music Entertainment Inc. Removing When removing the UIM, close the FOMA terminal and hold it with both hands.
While sliding the UIM, pull it out slowly Note Do not misplace the removed UIM. Security Codes You can set 2 security codes to the UIM: "PIN1 code" and
"PIN2 code".P119 44 Before Using the Handset Hereafter, the UIM that was inserted when you downloaded or obtained data or les is referred to as "your UIM" and any other UIM as "another UIM". Your UIM Another UIM Replacing the UIM If the UIM used for obtaining data or mails is not inserted, you cannot browse or play. back UIM restricted data. If the UIM used for obtaining data or mails is inserted, you can browse or play back UIM restricted data. Note When you set data/le restricted with this function to the Stand-by display, etc., the setting will return to the default if another UIM is inserted or if no UIM is inserted. When you re-insert your UIM, the setting will revert to the original state you set. Pre-installed i-ppli programs are not restricted. However, if you delete i-ppli and download it, the newly-downloaded i-ppli will be restricted. The following data/les are not restricted with this function:
- Data/les obtained via infrared communication, a microSD card, or data communication
- Images captured/edited using this FOMA terminal Even if a UIM dierent from the one used when data/les were obtained is inserted, the data/les restricted with this function can be deleted. Settings that are saved on the UIM are as follows:
- Phone number display
- PIN1 and PIN2 codes
- SMS Validity Period If the UIM is inserted into another i-Channel-compatible terminal, the ticker will not appear. If you press Q in Stand-by and display the channel list, the latest information is downloaded and the ticker appears.
- SMS Center settings
- Select language UIM Types Note that the specications of the "UIM (blue)" dier from those of the "UIM (green/white)" as follows:
Function Number of phone number digits to be saved to the UIM Phonebook WORLD WING Service Numbers UIM
(blue) UIM
(green/white) Reference Up to 20 digits Up to 26 digits P87 Not available Not available Available Available P408 P399 Before Using the Handset Continue on the next page Continued on next page 45 WORLD WING WORLD WING is DOCOMO's FOMA international roaming service that allows you to use the same mobile phone number registered in Japan to make and receive calls even overseas using the UIM (green/white) and supported terminals. If you subscribed to the FOMA service after September 1, 2005, a separate subscription is not required. However, if you declared that you did not require this service at the FOMA service subscription or canceled this service, a separate subscription is required. If you initially subscribed to the FOMA service before August 31, 2005 and have not subscribed to "WORLD WING", a separate subscription is required. This service is not available for some billing plans. If your UIM (green/white) is lost or stolen overseas, contact DOCOMO immediately and temporarily suspend your subscription. For contact information, see General Inquiries at the back of this manual. Call and communication charges after the FOMA terminal was lost or stolen are still charged to you. Attaching/Removing Battery Pack Turn o the FOMA terminal and hold it in your hand with the terminal closed. Attaching
While pushing the Back cover in the direction of a, slide it in the direction of b and hold it up in the direction of c With " A " side up, align the metal contacts of the battery pack and the FOMA terminal in the direction of a, then insert the battery pack in the direction of b When attaching the battery pack, push it underneath the tab and push it down. Tabs 46 Before Using the Handset
With approx. 3mm space kept to the Back cover, align it to the ditch of the FOMA terminal, and while pushing it in the direction of a, slide it in the direction of b and insert it until it clicks Approx. 3mm Back cover
Hold the battery pack with a nger by the recess of the FOMA terminal, and while pushing the battery pack in the direction of a, hold it up in the direction of b and remove in the direction of c Recess Note Attaching the battery pack forcibly with the UIM not properly inserted may damage the UIM. Attaching the battery pack forcibly may damage the FOMA terminal. Removing
While pushing the Back cover in the direction of a, slide it in the direction of b and hold it up in the direction of c and remove Charging Use the specied AC adapter (optional) or DC adapter
(optional) to charge the FOMA terminal. Use the exclusive battery pack L05 for the FOMA terminal. Battery pack life The battery pack is a consumable. The available usage time decreases every time the battery pack is recharged. When the usable time after each recharging shortens by approximately half compared to a new battery pack, it is recommended that the battery pack be replaced with a new one as soon as possible. The battery pack may swell as the battery life is near its end depending on the battery pack condition, but it is not a malfunction. If you use i-ppli or videophone, etc., or watch 1Seg for long periods of time while the battery pack is being charged, the battery life may be shortened. For environmental protection, be sure to bring the exhausted battery pack to NTT DOCOMO, the sales agent, or recycle shop. Before Using the Handset Continue on the next page Continued on next page 47 Charging For details, see the instruction manuals for the FOMA AC Adapter 01/02 (optional), FOMA AC Adapter 01 for Global use
(optional), and FOMA DC Adapter 01/02 (optional). The FOMA AC Adapter 01 can be used only for 100V AC. The FOMA AC Adapter 02 and the FOMA AC Adapter 01 for Global use support the voltage from 100V to 240V AC. The adapter plug shape is for 100V AC (for domestic use). To use an AC adapter that supports from 100V to 240V AC overseas, the compatible conversion plug adapter is required. Do not charge the battery pack with a transformer designed for overseas trips. To charge the battery pack with the AC or DC adapter, make sure that the battery pack is inserted into the FOMA terminal. Plug or unplug the connector slowly and securely avoiding excessive force. If you start charging the fully drained battery pack, the FOMA terminal may not be turned on for a while. If you make a call or packet communication while charging, the inside of the FOMA terminal may become hot and charging may stop. In this case, end the functions in use and wait until the FOMA terminal becomes cool down, and then try charging again. Do not charge the battery pack for a long time (several days) with the FOMA terminal power on. If the FOMA terminal is left with the power on for long periods of time during charging, you may not be able to use the FOMA terminal for long duration as expected and the low battery alarm may sound, because the FOMA terminal receives the power from the battery pack after charging is completed. In this case, recharge the battery pack properly. Before recharging the battery pack, disconnect the AC adapter or DC adapter from the FOMA terminal and reconnect it. Approximate battery pack usage time The usage time may vary depending on the operating environment and the battery pack deterioration. 48 Before Using the Handset Continuous stand-by time FOMA/
3G GSM Moving: Approx. 280 hours Stationary: Approx. 320 hours Moving: Approx. 210 hours Stationary: Approx. 220 hours 3G/GSM setting:
3G 3G/GSM setting:
AUTO 3G/GSM setting:
AUTO Continuous call time FOMA/3G GSM Voice call: Approx. 220 minutes Videophone call: Approx. 80 minutes Voice call: Approx. 180 minutes Approx. 140 minutes 1Seg watching time Continuous call time is approximate duration for calling with normal radio wave reception level. Continuous stand-by time is approximate usage time when moving with normal radio wave reception level. Depending on the battery level, set functions, operating environment such as ambient temperature, or radio wave reception level (poor or weak radio wave reception level), stand-by time may be reduced by half. During i-mode communication, the call (communication)/
stand-by time becomes shorter. Even if you do not make calls or i-mode communications, the call (communication)/stand-by time shortens when you compose i-mode mail, start i-ppli or i-ppli Stand-by display, perform data communications or Multiaccess, use the camera, play back moving picture or music, or watch 1Seg, etc. Depending on network conditions at your location, usage time may become shorter than the described values. Continuous stand-by time in a stationary is the average usage time in stationary state with normal radio wave reception level with the FOMA terminal closed. Continuous stand-by time in a moving state is the average usage time in a state combining "stand still", "in motion", and
"out of service area" in an area with normal radio wave reception level with the FOMA terminal closed. 1Seg watching time is approximate time when watching with normal radio wave reception level and using the Flat-plug Stereo Earphone Set P01 (optional). The call/communication or stand-by time may be reduced to about half, or 1Seg watching time may shorten depending on the battery level, set functions, operating environment such as ambient temperature, or radio wave reception level (poor or weak radio wave reception level). Estimated battery pack charging time FOMA AC Adapter 01/02 FOMA DC Adapter 01/02 The estimated charging time is the duration of time to charge a fully drained battery pack with the FOMA terminal turned o. The charging time becomes longer with the FOMA terminal turned on. Approx. 180 minutes Approx. 180 minutes Charging with AC Adapter and Desktop Holder Insert the AC adapter connecter, with the inscribed arrow side up, straight into the desktop holder. Insert the power plug of the AC adapter into an outlet. Align charger terminals of the desktop holder and FOMA terminal (a), then insert in the direction of the allow b. The illumination lights up and charging starts. When charging completes, the illumination turns o. (If unread mails or missed calls exist, the illumination lights up according to "Lighting LED"
settings.) After charging completes, grasp the head of the FOMA terminal and lift it out while holding the desktop holder with ngers. Illumination Power plug Release buttons Connector 100V AC outlet Desktop holder Charger terminal Inscription Charging only with AC Adapter Open the external connector terminal cover (a) and ip it over (b). Then, insert the AC adapter connector, with the inscribed arrow side up, straight into the FOMA terminal external connector. Insert the power plug of the AC adapter into an outlet. The illumination lights up and charging starts. When charging completes, the illumination turns o. (If unread mails or missed calls exist, the illumination lights up according to "Lighting LED"
settings.) After charging completes, pull the AC adapter connector straight out while pressing the release buttons. Illumination Connector Inscription Release buttons External connector terminal cover Make sure to insert/pull out the AC adapter connector straight with the correct side up. Forcibly trying to remove the adapter may cause damage. b DC adapter (optional) The DC adapter supplies power to the FOMA terminal from a cigarette lighter socket (12V/24V) of a car with the battery pack inserted in the FOMA terminal. For details, see the FOMA DC Adapter 01/02 instruction manual. Before Using the Handset Continue on the next page Continued on next page 49 Note When the power is turned on, you can set the FOMA terminal to sound the charge start tone or charge complete tone. The setting of "Popup tone" is applied.P101 You can set the FOMA terminal to charge with the Display backlight on.P110 While charging, the battery level icon changes in the order of in an animation display. After charging completes,
<DC adapter>
A fuse (2A) is a consumable item. Purchase a replacement fuse from a car parts shop. lights up. Battery level Checking Battery Level An icon indicating the battery level (appears at the top of the screen).
: The battery is full.
: The battery is getting low.
: The battery is almost running out. Charge the battery.
: The battery is almost running out. The FOMA terminal will automatically turn o in a moment. Charge the battery. Note When an icon indicating battery level is functions (including the bar code reader) and infrared communication functions are unavailable. When the color of the icon indicating battery level is other and you activate 1Seg/MUSIC player, the notication than indicating the low battery level appears (may not appear when the battery level is
, camera or
). 50 Before Using the Handset Checking Battery Level with Sound and Display The battery level can be checked with display and sound.
M "Settings" "Others" "Battery level"
A conrmation appears and a tone sounds according to the battery level. The battery level screen disappears in approximately 3 seconds. Three beeps : The battery is full. Two beeps One beep
: The battery is getting low.
: The battery is almost running out. Charge the battery. Note When "Dial sound" is set to activated, you will not hear the beep.
(Silent) or "Manner mode" is When the battery is running out A message, "Low battery. Charge or change battery" appears and the battery alert tone sounds. (Depending on the settings, the tone may not sound.) blinks. After a little while, the FOMA terminal turns o automatically. at the top the screen Power ON/OFF Turning Power ON/OFF Turning Power ON
When the FOMA terminal is turned o, P(for 2+ seconds) After the wake-up screen appears, the Stand-
by display appears. Stand-by display Note If the UIM is not inserted, the message, "Insert UIM" appears. When replacing the UIM, enter 4- to 8-digit Terminal security code after turning the power on. When entered the correct Terminal security code, the Stand-by display appears. If failed to enter the code 5 times in a row, the power is turned o. (You can turn the power on again.) When "PIN1 code request" is set to "ON"
The PIN1 code entry screen appears. When the PIN1 (P119) code is entered, the Wake-up screen and then the Stand-by display appear. You can make emergency calls (to 110, 119, or 118) even while the PIN1 entry screen appears.P120 When "Lock all" is activated The Terminal security code entry is required. When "" appears at the top of the screen The FOMA terminal is out of service area or in a poor signal area. Move to a location where the icon indicating the signal strength appears. The signal strength is indicated in 4 levels as follows:
Strong Viewing the Welcome mail By default, " Welcome Mail Press C repeatedly to display the mail. Alternatively, perform operations in "Displaying Received Mail" (P154) to display the mail.
" "Welcome
" is saved. Weak
Turning Power OFF
When the FOMA terminal is turned on, P(for 2+ seconds) in Stand-by The exit screen appears and the power is turned o. Before Using the Handset Continue on the next page 51 Select language Changing Screen Display to English or Korean You can switch the display language on the FOMA terminal to Japanese, English, or Korean.
M "(Settings)" "Select language"
"(Japanese)"/"English"/"(Korean)"
Note When the language is switched to English or Korean, "Select language" is displayed as "". The setting of this function is stored on the FOMA terminal and UIM in use. If another UIM is inserted, the setting on the inserted UIM takes priority. If the UIM with Korean language set is inserted into the Korean-incompatible FOMA terminal, the display language is set to Japanese or English. Making Initial Settings After the FOMA terminal is turned on, make initial settings of "Set Date&Time", "Change security code", "KeyPad Sound
(Keypad tone)", and "Calibration".
Turn the power on "Yes"
Set the date&time (P53)
Set the Terminal Security code (P120)
Set the keypad tone (Select "ON" or "OFF") If "OFF" is selected, the keypad tone volume is set to
(Silent).P101
Adjust the touch panel (P115) When initial settings complete, the software update conrmation may appear. Perform operations according to on-screen instructions. Note While All lock, etc. is activated, the initial settings function is not activated. To cancel the initial settings, press Q/P. When the power is turned on next time, the rest of the settings resumes. 52 Before Using the Handset
[Set date&time]*
Set date and time manually. You can set the date between 1980/01/01 and 2099/12/31.
* Available when "Auto time adjust" is set to "OFF".
I[Done]
Note
<Auto time adjust>
Time or time dierences can be adjusted when the power is turned on. If time is not adjusted for a while after the power is turned on, turn the power on again. Time may not be adjusted depending on the signal strength, etc. When using the FOMA terminal overseas, the time or time zone may not be adjusted depending on the network service to use. Also, the time may not be properly displayed. Set the time of the location where you stay with the World time.P364 An error of a few seconds may occur. Set Date&Time Setting Date and Time You can set the FOMA terminal to update the time automatically. Also, you can set the local time zone, daylight saving, and date&time.
M "Settings" "Date&Time" "Set Date&Time"
Date&Time settings screen
Perform the following operations
[Auto time adjust]
Set whether to adjust the time on the FOMA terminal based on the time information from the network. ON : Adjust the date and time automatically. OFF : Does not adjust the date and time automatically.
[Local time zone]*
Set the time zone for the date and time. Press M[<Prev.] or I[Next>] to switch the list by page.
[Daylight saving]*
Set the daylight saving time. Before Using the Handset Continue on the next page 53 Own Number Checking Your Own Phone Number You can check your phone number (own number) saved on the UIM.
M "Own Number"
b To display the saved detail information Pressing C[Detail] and entering the Terminal security code on the Own number screen displays the Own number detail screen. You can also save information other than the own number.P361 If a phone number other than your own number, mail address, or URL is saved, you can make a call, create i-mode mail, or access a site by moving the cursor and pressing C. Own number screen Caller ID notication Notifying the Other Party of Your Phone Number You can set the FOMA terminal to show/hide your caller ID on the network in advance. Your caller ID (phone number) is important information. Please take care when sending your caller ID. Caller ID notication cannot be set when "" appears.
M "Settings" "NW Services" "Caller ID notication" Perform the following operations
[Activate/Deactivate]
Set to show/hide the caller ID.
[Check setting]
Check the current setting status. Note Your caller ID is displayed only when the other party's phone allows the display of caller ID. You can set the Caller ID notication for each call.P66 54 Before Using the Handset Voice/Videophone Calls Making Calls/Videophone Calls Videophone Calls 56 Making a Call/Videophone Call 56 Making a Call Using Redial/Received Calls 60 Making a Call Using Recent Calls Recent calls 64 64 Using Chaku-moji Chaku-moji Setting Caller ID to Send/Not to Send for Each Call 184/186 66 67 Sending Touch-tone Signals Pause Making International Calls WORLD CALL 67 Setting Prex to Be Added to a Phone Number Prex dial Making a Call Specifying a Sub Address Sub address setting Setting an Alarm until Connection is Reestablished Reconnect alarm 71 Reducing Surrounding Noise to Make Voice Clear Noise reduction Receiving Calls/Videophone Calls Receiving a Call/Videophone Call 72 Setting How to Answer Incoming Voice Calls Answer mode Ending/Holding Call by Closing the FOMA Terminal Close setting 70 71 72 74 74 74 Adjusting Earpiece Volume Receiver volume When You Can/Could not Answer a Voice/Videophone Call Putting a Call on Hold when You Cannot Answer Immediately Holding Setting Answer Holding Tone On hold tone Setting Holding ToneHolding tone Using Public Mode Checking Missed Calls Missed call Recording Voice Messages when You Cannot Answer the Call Record message Recording a Message when You Cannot Answer Incoming Call Quick Record Message Playing/Deleting Record Message Play/Delete record message Videophone Settings Setting Image to Send 80 Changing Videophone Settings Videophone set 80 Setting Answer Method of Videophone Call during i-mode V-phone while packet 75 75 75 76 77 77 79 79 81 55 Videophone Calls The videophone call can be used with a mobile phone that supports DOCOMO's videophone call. DOCOMO's videophone call complies with "ISO 3GPP*1 standardized 3G-324M*2". DOCOMO's videophone calls cannot connect with mobile phones that support a dierent videophone call system.
*1 3GPP (3rd Generation Partnership Project) The regional standards organization for developing common technical specications for the third generation mobile communication systems (IMT-2000).
*2 3-324M The international standard of 3rd Generation Mobile Videophone. There are 2 dierent videophone call communication rates, 64K
(64kbps) and 32K (32kbps), this FOMA terminal cannot use videophone call at 32K. This FOMA terminal does not support remote monitoring. The battery pack life may shorten if you make a videophone call for a long time while charging. The power may turn o during a videophone call, if you make the call with the charging adapter connected when the battery level is low. Videophone Call Screen Components a Main window The other party's image appears by default. b Sub window c Call duration Your image appears by default. Displayed in the format of minutes:
seconds. d Settings icons
Zoom adjustmentP59 Display Hands-free ON/OFF stateP57 Picture mode (Camera image/Substitute image)P59
Making a Call/Videophone Call
Enter a phone number Up to 80 digits can be entered and displayed. Enter a number from "0" to "99" to view the Phonebook entry of the corresponding memory number.P97 Start from the area code even for a local call. I[Save]: Add a new or extra phone number to the Phonebook.P89 Phone number entry screen 56 Voice/Videophone Calls
To make a voice call A or C[Call]
To make a videophone call g[V. phone]
A ringing tone sounds from the earpiece, and the
"Calling..." dialing screen is displayed until the other party answers the call. C[Spk ON/Spk OFF]:
Switch Hands-free ON and OFF. Pressing a dial key, *, or # during a call allows you to send touch-
tone signals. Voice call screen Videophone call screen b During a video call The following icons show the state of the settings on the Voice call screen.
Display Hands-free ON/OFF State Mute/UnmuteP59 Receiver volumeP74 b During a videophone call I[Image/Camera]: Switch the image to send between the substitute image and the camera image.
To terminate the call, P Note If you hear the voice guidance for the Caller ID request, make the call again sending your caller ID. You cannot switch between a voice/videophone call during a call using this FOMA terminal. Closing the FOMA terminal during a call terminates the call when "Close setting" is set to "End the call", and holds the call when set to "On Hold". However, if the Flat-plug Earphone/
Microphone with Switch (optional) is connected, closing the FOMA terminal does not terminate the call or place the call on hold. The low battery alert sounds from the earpiece if the battery becomes low during a call. You can continue the call; however, the call will be terminated momentarily and the power is automatically turned o. This FOMA terminal does not support Hands-free devices via a USB connection (such as In-Car Hands-Free Kit 01).
<Videophone>
A call cannot be connected if you make a videophone call to a mobile phone that does not support videophone calls, or if the other party's mobile phone is out of service area or turned o. If you make a videophone call to a phone that does not support videophone calls when you have set "Auto redial as voice"
to "ON", the call will be disconnected before the connection is established, and the FOMA terminal automatically redials the number as a voice call. However, if the other party uses an ISDN 64K connection, or ISDN videophone that does not support the 3G-324M standard (as of June, 2009), or you dialed a wrong number, the above action may not be taken. Note that communication charges may apply. If you make a videophone call to an emergency number such as
"110", "119", or "118", a voice call will be made automatically. Incoming i-mode mail or MessageR/F during a videophone call is stored at the i-mode center. SMS can be received even during a videophone call. Digital call charge applies for sending the substitute image. Voice/Videophone Calls Continue on the next page Continued on next page 57 Correcting an entered phone number To delete an entered digit, use J to move the cursor to a digit to delete, and press Q. Screen display during dialing The other party's name is displayed if the other party's phone number is saved in the Phonebook. If a videophone call could not be made The following messages appear if a videophone call could not be made (depending on the other party's mobile phone model or subscribed network services, the displayed messages may not describe the actual situation). Message Check number, then redial Busy Out of service area/power o Set Caller ID to ON Your call is being forwarded Redial using voice call Upper limit has been exceeded. Connection failed Description The phone number is not valid. The other party is on a call (this message may appear when the other party's mobile phone is performing packet communication depending on the mobile phone). The other party is in packet communication. The other party's mobile phone is either out of service area or turned o. The caller ID was not sent (when the call is made to the number for visualnet, etc.). The call is being forwarded. The Call forwarding service is activated, and the forwarding destination does not support videophone calls. Your usage fees have exceeded the limit of your plan (Type limit or Family Wide limit). Message Please make your call from i-mode Failed to connect Description The videophone call was not dialed from the ocial i-mode site information provider (when the call is made to V-live). Set "Caller ID notication" to "Notify" and redial. This message may appear for other reasons, as well. Phone Number Entry Screen Sub Menu
Phone number entry screen (P56) M[Menu]
Perform the following operations
[Add to phonebook]
Add an entry to the Phonebook.P88
[Video phone call]
Make a videophone call.
[Caller ID]
Set whether to notify your caller ID when you make a call.P66
[Int. call]
After selecting the country code to make a call, "009130010"
(WORLD CALL) and the country code are inserted at the beginning of the phone number.P67
[Select prex]
Add prex number at the beginning of the entered phone number. This can be added only once.P68
[Multi number]
If you subscribe to Multi Number, select the number to use when making a call.P401 58 Voice/Videophone Calls
[Chaku-moji]
Send Chaku-moji.P65 Voice Call Screen Sub Menu
Voice call screen (P57) M[Menu]
Perform the following operations
[New call]*1 Place the active call on hold, and dial another party.
[End active call]
Terminate the call.
[Hold]
Place the active call on hold. To cancel, press A or C[Active].
[Mute/Unmute]
Enable/Disable to mute your voice on the other party's mobile phone.
[Send my info]
Create i-mode mail with your number (Own number) entered in the message text.P138
[Search phonebook]*2 Search for a Phonebook entry.P92
*1 Not available if you do not subscribe to Call waiting service.
*2 Not available when the Phonebook is accessed. To use this function, terminate applicable functions from the Task list screen.P350 Videophone Call Screen Sub Menu
Videophone call screen (P57) M[Menu]
Perform the following operations
[End call]
Terminate the call.
[Hold]
Place the active call on hold. To cancel, press A or C[Active]. If you press I[Image] to cancel the hold, the substitute image is sent to the other party.
[Substitute image/Camera image]
Switch the image to send between the substitute image and the camera image.
[Camera settings]
Congure the camera for videophone calls. Use J to select an icon, and use H to select an item. After setting, press M[Close]. Zoom Brightness
: Zoom the camera image (1/2).
: Adjust the brightness (High/Medium/Low) of the camera image. Night mode : Set this when using the camera in a dark place, etc.
[Videophone set]
Set the display and lighting for videophone calls. After setting, press Q to return to the Videophone call screen. Display setting Other - Me : Display the other party's image on the main window and your image on the sub window. Me - Other : Display your image on the main window and the other party's image on the sub window. Other only : Display only the other party's image. Me only
: Display only your image. Light Always ON Terminal setting : Use "Backlight" settings.P110
: Always light up during a call. Voice/Videophone Calls Continue on the next page Continued on next page 59
[Screen size]
Set the display size of the main window.
[Visual preference]
Set quality of the image sent to the other party. Prefer img qual Normal
: The image with maximized image quality is sent. This option is eective when there is little motion.
: Set standard quality and motion for the sent image. Prefer motion spd : Set priority to motion for the sent image. This option is eective when there is a lot of motions.
[Switch camera]
Switch the camera to send the image to the other party between the Inner camera and the Outer camera.
[Search phonebook]*
Search for a Phonebook entry.P92
[Own number]
Display your phone number (Own number).
* Not available when the Phonebook is accessed. To use this function, terminate applicable functions from the Task list screen.P350 60 Voice/Videophone Calls Making a Call Using Redial/
Received Calls Redial and the Received call logs can be used to make calls. Also, the Recent calls (both sent and received) can be used to make calls. Redial calls Calling the Same Party Again Redial maintains a list of the last 30 voice or videophone calls. The phone number and the calling date and time are recorded in the call logs. If more than 30 calls are made, the log is deleted from the oldest. If you call the same phone number repeatedly, only the latest one is recorded.
Stand-by display R a Name saved in the Phonebook If the caller's name is not saved in the Phonebook, the phone number is displayed. b Outgoing phone call type Make a voice call Make a videophone call c Call date and time d Dialing an international call Make a call overseas from Japan Make a call from overseas during international roaming Make an international call from overseas during international roaming Redial list screen
Move the cursor to the number to redial C[Detail]
a Outgoing phone call type b The name saved in the Phonebook If the number is not saved in the Phonebook, "Unregistered" is displayed. c The other party's phone number d "Caller ID" setting when dialing Appear when you make a call with the caller ID (P58) set to "Notify". e Multi Number used for dialing*
Display the Multi Number used to dial by the registered name in
"Number setting" (P401).
* Appear when you subscribe to the Multi Number service. f Call date and time g Call duration h Outgoing international call Redial detail screen Make a call overseas from Japan Make a call from overseas during international roaming Make an international call from overseas during international roaming
To make a voice call A or C[Call]
To make a videophone call g[V. phone]
Note You can make a voice call by selecting an entry on the Redial list screen and pressing A, and make a videophone call by pressing g[V. phone]. If the same phone number is saved repeatedly in the Phonebook, the name found rst in the Reading search is displayed. A call dialed with "184" or "186" is recorded as a separate Redial entry. Press I[Mail] on the Redial list screen/Redial detail screen to create i-mode mail to the phone number on the selected Redial entry. Redial List Screen/Redial Detail Screen Sub Menu
Redial list screen (P60)/Redial detail screen
(P61) M[Menu] Perform the following operations
[Call function]
Voice call Videophone call Customize call
[Mail]
Compose mail
: Make a voice call.
: Make a videophone call.
: Change the redial phone number and make a call.
: Create i-mode mail addressed to the redial phone number.P138 If the mail address is saved in the Phonebook, the saved mail address is used as a recipient. Compose SMS : Create SMS addressed to the redial phone number.
[Add to phonebook]
Add the redial phone number to the Phonebook.P88
[Change list]*
Switch logs to display. Recent mails Recent calls Received mail Received calls : Display the Received call list screen.P62 Sent mail
: Display the Recent mail list screen.P166
: Display the Recent call list screen.P64
: Display the Received mail list screen.P166
: Display the Sent mail list screen.P166 Voice/Videophone Calls Continue on the next page Continued on next page 61
[Delete]
Delete the selected redial log. Multiple redial logs can be deleted on the list screen. Delete one*
Selected*
: Delete the selected redial log.
: Select and delete multiple logs. Mark logs to delete I[Delete]
Press M[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all. Delete all*
* Not displayed on the detail screen.
: Delete all redial logs. Received calls Making a Call Using Received Calls The Received call logs maintains a list of the last 30 incoming calls and videophone calls. Phone numbers and received dates/times are stored in a call log. If more than 30 calls are received, the most recent 30 calls are retained.
Stand-by display L Received calls list screen 62 Voice/Videophone Calls a The party's name saved in the Phonebook If the caller's name is not saved, the phone number is displayed. If the caller did not send the caller ID, the reason for no caller ID is displayed. b Incoming phone call type
Answered/Missed voice call (including rejected calls) Answered/Missed videophone call (including rejected calls) c Received date and time d Incoming international call Incoming international call from overseas Incoming call during international roaming overseas Incoming international call during international roaming overseas e Received Chaku-moji
Move the cursor to a log entry C[Detail]
a Incoming phone call type b The name saved in the Phonebook If the phone number is not in the Phonebook, "Unregistered"
is displayed, and if the caller ID was not received, "User unset" is displayed. c The other party's phone number d Multi Number received*
Display the received Multi Number as the registered name in "Number setting" (P401).
* Appear when you subscribe to the Multi Number service. e Received date and time f Call duration/Ring time (Missed call) g Received message with Chaku-moji h Incoming international call Received calls detail screen Incoming international call from overseas Incoming call during international roaming overseas Incoming international call during international roaming overseas
To make a voice call A or C[Call]
To make a videophone call g[V. phone]
Note You can make a voice call by selecting an entry on the Received calls list screen and pressing A, and make a videophone call by pressing g[V. phone]. The reason for no caller ID is displayed in the log entry of the call without caller ID.P129 If the same phone number is saved repeatedly in the Phonebook, the name found rst in the Reading search is displayed. A call log for the number that used dial-in service may be displayed dierently from the actual number. Press I[Mail] on the Received calls list/detail screen to create i-mode mail to the phone number in the selected received call log entry. Received Calls List Screen/Received Calls Detail Screen Sub Menu
Received calls list screen (P62)/Received call detail screen (P62) M[Menu]
Perform the following operations
[Call function]
Voice call Videophone call Customize call
[Mail]
Compose mail
: Make a voice call.
: Make a videophone call.
: Change the phone number in Received calls and make a call.
: Create i-mode mail addressed to the phone number in Received calls.P138 If the mail address is saved in Phonebook, the saved mail address is used as a recipient. Compose SMS : Crease SMS addressed to the phone number in Received calls.
[Add to phonebook]
Add the phone number in Received calls to the Phonebook.P88
[Change list]*
Switch logs to display. Recent mails Recent calls Received mail Redial Sent mail
: Display the Recent mail list screen.P166
: Display the Recent call list screen.P64
: Display the Received mail list screen.P166
: Display the Redial list screen.P60
: Display the Sent mail list screen.P166 Voice/Videophone Calls Continue on the next page Continued on next page 63 Chaku-moji Using Chaku-moji Send a message at the same time when making a voice or videophone call to tell the other party the point to talk. Up to 10 full-pitch/half-pitch characters, pictographs and symbols can be sent. Charges apply on the sender side, and not apply on the receiver side. For details about Chaku-moji or its compatible model, visit the DOCOMO's web site or see "Mobile Phone User's Guide [Network Services]". Chaku-moji While All lock is activated or Phonebook function is locked with Data access lock, Chaku-moji is not displayed even if it is received. After canceling the lock, the message is displayed on the Received call detail screen.
[Delete]
Delete the selected received call log. Multiple redial logs can be deleted on the list screen. Delete one*
Selected*
: Delete the selected received call log.
: Select and delete multiple logs. Mark logs to delete I[Delete]
Press M[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all. Delete all*
* Not displayed on the detail screen.
: Delete all received call logs. Recent calls Making a Call Using Recent Calls Up to 60 incoming and outgoing calls can be recorded in
"Recent". If more than 60 calls are recorded, the most recent 60 calls are retained.
Stand-by display Use J to display "Recent"
For further operations and the descriptions of screen components, refer to Redial calls (P60) and Received calls (P62) sections. Note The Recent call list screen/detail screen sub menu operations are the same as the Redial and Received call list screen/detail screen.P61, P63 64 Voice/Videophone Calls Editing and Setting Message Saving Message Up to 10 messages can be saved.
"Chaku-moji" "Create message"
M "Settings" "NW Services"
Move the cursor to the number to save or edit I[Edit] Enter or edit a message To delete the saved Chaku-moji, move the cursor to Chaku-moji to delete M[Menu] "Delete"/"Delete all" "Yes". Setting whether to Display Received Chaku-moji
M "Settings" "NW Services"
"Chaku-moji" "Message display set"
Select an item Display all messages : Display Chaku-moji from all senders. Only number in PB
: Display Chaku-moji only from senders Calls with caller ID Hide all messages saved in the Phonebook.
: Display Chaku-moji only from senders with caller ID.
: Do not display Chaku-moji. Dialing with Message
Enter a phone number M[Menu]
"Chaku-moji" Perform the following operations You can send Chaku-moji to the party saved on the Phonebook by entering a memory number with Quick dial (P97) M[Menu] "Chaku-moji".
[Create message]
Enter a message.
[Select message]
Select from saved messages.
[Sent message]
Select from sent messages. Up to latest 10 messages are saved.
A or C[Call]
b To make a videophone call Press g[V. phone]. Voice/Videophone Calls Continue on the next page Continued on next page 65 Note When the recipient received Chaku-moji, "Transmission completed" appears and transmission charge applies. Under the following conditions on the receiver side,
"Transmission failed" appears and transmission charge does not apply.
- Chaku-moji incompatible terminal
- Chaku-moji restricting to be sent in Message display setting
- Staying overseas*
- While Public mode (Drive mode) is set*
- When the answer time of Record message is set to 0 sec*
- Out of service area or the power is turned o*
* The sent result does not appear. Depending on the signal conditions, the sent result may not appear even when Chaku-moji arrived at the other party's terminal. In this case, transmission charges apply. Chaku-moji cannot be sent/received for overseas usage. 184/186 Setting Caller ID to Send/
Not to Send for Each Call There are 2 ways to show/hide the caller ID for each call:
adding "184"/"186", and using the sub menu on the Phone number entry screen. 66 Voice/Videophone Calls Adding 184/186 to Send/Not to Send Caller ID
Enter "184" (Do not notify)/"186" (Notify)
Enter the phone number To make a voice call A To make a videophone call g[V. phone]
Using Sub Menu to Send/Not to Send Caller ID Example: To use the Phone number entry screen sub menu
Enter the phone number M[Menu]
"Caller ID" "Not notify"/"Notify"/"Cancel"
To make a voice call A or C[Call]
To make a videophone call g[V. phone]
Note You can set to show/hide the caller ID to the network in advance.P54 Pause Sending Touch-tone Signals Enter "P" and a number after the phone number and make a voice call to send the number after "P" as touch tone signal
(DTMF). You can use this for services such as online ticket reservation or bank balance inquiry. The signal may not be received depending on the device on the receiving side.
Enter the phone number Press * 3 times and enter "P" Enter the number to send A After the call is connected, the number after "P" is displayed and press A to send the displayed number. WORLD CALL Making International Calls WORLD CALL is an international call service available on DOCOMO mobile phones. If you subscribe to FOMA service, also subscribe "WORLD CALL" together. (However a customer who subscribe to the service without "WORLD CALL" is the exception.) This service is available in approximately 240 countries and regions around the world. Charges for "WORLD CALL" are added to the monthly FOMA service call charges. No initial fee nor xed monthly charges apply. This service is not available with some billing plans. Even if the caller ID notication is set, the caller ID may not be notied or phone number is not displayed correctly, depending on the telecommunication carrier. In this case, you cannot make a call from the Received calls screen. For details on WORLD CALL, contact "General Inquiries" at the back of this manual. When using international carriers other than DOCOMO, please contact the carrier directly. You can make an "International videophone call" to parties who use a videophone call-compatible terminal of an international carrier that supports FOMA's videophone call by pressing M[Menu] "Video phone call" after the following dialing procedures. For information on the countries where connection can be made and telecommunication carriers, visit the DOCOMO International Services website. The other party's image displayed on the FOMA terminal may blur, or the call may not be connected depending on the other party's terminal. Making an International Call by Entering the Phone Number Enter a phone number in the following order.
Enter "010 - Country code - Area code (City code) - Other party's phone number"
If the Area code (City code) starts with "0", remove "0". (In a few countries/regions such as Italy, "0" must not be removed). Alternatively, enter 009130 - 010 - Country code - Area code
(City code) - Other party's phone number.
A b To make an international videophone call Press g[V. phone]. Voice/Videophone Calls Continue on the next page 67 Making an International Call Using "+"
Entering "+" at the beginning of a phone number replaces "+"
with an international access code automatically. The WORLD CALL (009130010) is set to be added automatically by default.P69
Press 0(for 1+ seconds) to enter "+"
Enter "Country code - Area code (City code)
- Phone Number"
You can also press * twice to input "+". If the Area code (City code) starts with "0", remove "0". (In a few countries/regions such as Italy, "0" must not be removed).
A Dial
: Make an international call after converting "+" into an international access code. Original number : Make an international call to the number entered on the terminal. Cancel
: Cancel dialing. Note This option is available only inside the FOMA network service area. If the phone number starts with "+81", "+" will not be converted into an international access code. Making an International Call Adding International Access Code You can select an international access code from the sub menu and add it to the entered phone number.
Enter "Country code - Area code (City code) -
Other party's phone number"
If the Area code (City code) starts with "0", remove "0". (In a few countries/regions such as Italy, "0" must not be removed.)
M[Menu] "Select prex" Select an international access code The selected international access code is inserted at the beginning of the entered phone number. Dialed call conrmation screen b To make an international videophone call Press g[V. phone].
Select a dialing method 68 Voice/Videophone Calls
A b To make an international videophone call Press g[V. phone]. Note By default, WORLD CALL (009130010) is registered to
"Prex 1".P70 Making an International Call Easily The International dial settings can be changed. Even if the caller ID notication is set, the caller ID may not be notied or phone number is not displayed correctly, depending on the telecommunication carrier. In this case, you cannot make a call using the Received calls. Setting to Add the International Access Code Automatically <Auto assist>
You can set whether to add an international access code automatically instead of "+" when you make a call by entering
"+" at the beginning of the phone number.
[IDD prex code]
Enter IDD prex code of International call used for Auto assist. Setting to Add Assist of Country Code Automatically
<Auto international dial>
Set whether to automatically replace leading "0", if entered, of a phone number with "+ Country code" during international roaming. Also, you can specify the Country code to be added automatically.
M "Settings" "International dial"
"Auto Int'l dial" Perform the following operations
M "Settings" "International dial"
"Auto assist" "Auto"/"OFF"
Auto : Convert "+" automatically to the number specied in IDD prex. OFF
: "+" is not converted. Setting International Access Codes <IDD prex>
When "Auto assist" is set to "Auto", specify the international access code to be added automatically. Save 1 country code required when you make an international call.
M "Settings" "International dial" "IDD prex" Perform the following operations
[IDD prex name]
Enter IDD prex name of International call used for Auto assist. Auto international dial screen
[Auto Int'l dial]
Set whether to add a Country code automatically.
[Country code]
Set a Country code to add. Voice/Videophone Calls Continue on the next page Continued on next page 69 Note Country code is not added automatically in the following cases.
- When entered "+" at the beginning of the phone number
- When selecting a phone number from a message body or site, etc. and dialing
- When dialing from i-ppli Registering a Country Code <Country code list>
Up to 50 Country codes required to make an international call can be saved.
M "Settings" "International dial"
"Country code list"
Country code list screen
Select unregistered item Perform the following operations
[Country name]
Save a name of the Country code. Up to 7 full-pitch or 14 half-pitch characters can be entered.
[Country code]
Save up to 5 digits. 70 Voice/Videophone Calls
I[Done]
The newly saved Country code is displayed rst, and the already saved codes are displayed after the second entry. Editing Country code Select the Country code to edit on the Country code list screen
"Edit" I[Done]. Deleting Country code Select the Country code to delete on the Country code list screen "Delete" "Yes". Note You can also edit the pre-installed Country codes. When "Auto Int'l dial" is set in "Auto Int'l dial" (P69), you cannot delete the Country code specied in "Country code". Prex dial Setting Prex to Be Added to a Phone Number Up to 3 numbers (prexes) to be added to the beginning of the phone number such as an international access code,
"184", or "186" can be saved.
"Prex dial"
M "Settings" "Call/VT/Dialing"
Select a Prex entry eld Enter the number C[Set]
Up to 10 digits can be entered as a prex. Note Do not include pauses, etc. to the prex. If they are present, the call cannot be connected with prex. Sub address setting Making a Call Specifying a Sub Address You can set whether digits after ":" is identied as a sub address when entering a phone number with ":". A sub address is used to access a specic device connected to an ISDN line or to select contents on "V-live".
M "Settings" "Call/VT/Dialing"
Move the cursor to "Sub address setting"
C[ON/OFF]
ON : Identify the address after ":" as a sub address. OFF : The address after ":" is not identied as a sub address. Note
":" is not identied as a delimiter of a sub address if:
- ":" is entered at the beginning of the phone number.
- A specic number such as "184" or "186" is entered at the beginning of the phone number and ":" is entered right after it. Reconnect alarm Setting an Alarm until Connection is Reestablished You can set an alarm that keeps sounding until a voice or videophone call is reconnected when the call was disconnected due to weak signals.
M "Settings" "Call/VT/Dialing" "Call feature" "Reconnect alarm" Select an Alarm Alarm OFF : Mute an alarm. Low alarm : Set to low alarm. High alarm : Set to high alarm. Note Available duration for reconnection varies depending on the status of usage and signal. If the signal suddenly worsens, the call may be disconnected without the alarm sounding. The call charge applies during the reconnection attempt. While the call is disconnected, the other party hears nothing. Voice/Videophone Calls Continue on the next page 71 Noise reduction Reducing Surrounding Noise to Make Voice Clear Noise reduction suppresses background noises. The other party can hear your voice clearer even in a noisy place.
M "Settings" "Call/VT/Dialing" "Call feature" Move the cursor to "Noise reduction"
C[ON/OFF]
ON : Activate Noise reduction. OFF : Deactivate Noise reduction. Receiving a Call/Videophone Call
An incoming call arrives The ring tone sounds. P: Place the call on hold.P75 b During a videophone call C[Image]: Answer the call using the substitute image. Voice call incoming call screen Videophone call incoming call screen 72 Voice/Videophone Calls
A Answer the call. C[Spk ON/Spk OFF]: Switch Hands-free ON and OFF. Press a dial key, *, or # during a call to send touch-tone signals. b During a videophone call I[Image/Camera]: Switch the image to send between the alternate image and the camera image.
To terminate the call, P When the caller sent the caller ID If the caller is registered in the Phonebook, the phone number and registered name are displayed. When the caller did not send the caller ID The reason for no caller ID is displayed instead of a phone number.P129 Note The incoming call actions such as a ring tone or vibration vary depending on the settings or the saved information in the Phonebook.P84, P100, P102 When "Manner mode" is activated, the ring tone does not sound. However, if "Original manner" is activated, incoming call is notied according to the settings.P105 Closing the FOMA terminal during a call terminates the call when "Close setting" is set to "End the call", and holds the call when it is set to "On hold". However, if the Flat-plug Earphone/
Microphone with Switch (optional) is connected, closing the FOMA terminal does not terminate the call or place the call on hold. If you subscribe to the Voice mail, Call waiting or Call forwarding service, and set "Arrival call act" to "Answer" and "Set in-call arrival act" to "Activate", in-call arrival tone sounds when a call arrives during another call. If the tone sounds during a call, the network services are available.P400 However, the tone does not sound while a call is placed on response hold, or a message is being recorded (P78) because calls cannot arrive under these situations. When the Public mode (Drive mode) is activated, an incoming call is not indicated (the ring tone does not sound, either). Also, even if a call arrives when the display is turned o, the display backlight will not be turned on. If you subscribe to Multi Number, the name registered in
"Number setting" (P401) appears according to the number received. You can enable "Set mute ring(sec.)" to delay the incoming call actions for a call made from the other party not saved in the Phonebook or without the caller ID.P130 Use the following functions to reject incoming calls from a caller not saved in the Phonebook or from a specic caller.
- Reject unknownP130
- Reject on ListP127 You cannot switch between a voice/videophone call during a call using this FOMA terminal. The low battery alert sounds from the earpiece if the battery becomes low during a call. You can continue the call; however, the call will be terminated momentarily and the power is automatically turned o. This FOMA terminal does not support Hands-free devices via a USB connection (such as In-Car Hands-Free Kit 01). When "Answer mode" is set to "Open ip", you can answer a call by opening the FOMA terminal. If set to "Any key answer", you can answer a call by pressing a dial key, *, or #.P74
<Videophone call>
When the Voice mail service is activated with a videophone call, an SMS noties you of a new record message. Even if the Call forwarding service is activated, an incoming videophone call is not forwarded if the forwarding destination is not a videophone device supporting 3G-324M. Check the capabilities of the forwarding destination device before setting Call forwarding. Incoming i-mode mail or MessageR/F during a videophone call is stored at the i-mode center. SMS can be received even during a videophone call. You cannot receive videophone calls of the communication speed of 32K (32kbps). Incoming Call Screen Sub Menu
M[Menu] on the Incoming call screen (P72) Perform the following operations
[Voice mail]*1 Connect the incoming call to the Voice mail service center.
[Call rejection]
Reject an incoming call and hang up.
[Call forwarding]*2 Forward an incoming call to the specied number.
[Silent]
Stop the ring tone or vibration. Press A to answer the call.
*1 Not available if you do not subscribe to the Voice mail service.
*2 Not available if you do not subscribe to the Call forwarding service or you have not specied a forwarding number. Voice/Videophone Calls Continue on the next page 73 Close setting Ending/Holding Call by Closing the FOMA Terminal
M "Settings" "Call/VT/Dialing" "Call feature" "Close setting" Select a condition when the terminal is closed End the call On hold Mute
: Terminate the call.
: Place the active call on hold.
: Continue the call. The other party cannot hear your voice. Receiver volume Adjusting Earpiece Volume The receiver volume can be adjusted in 7 levels from 1 to 7.
Voice/Videophone call screen (P57) F/E F: Increase the volume. E: Decrease the volume. Note The adjusted receiver volume will be retained even after the call.
"Receiver volume" in "Volume" (P102) is also changed. Answer mode Setting How to Answer Incoming Voice Calls You can set to answer an incoming call by opening the FOMA terminal (Open ip) or pressing a dial key (Any key answer) other than A or C[Answer].
M "Settings" "Call/VT/Dialing"
"Incoming call" "Answer mode" Perform the following operations
[Open ip]
Answer a call by opening the FOMA terminal.
[Any key answer]
Answer a call by pressing a dial key, *, or # in addition to A or C[Answer].
[Send key only]
Answer a call by pressing A or C[Answer]. 74 Voice/Videophone Calls Holding Putting a Call on Hold when You Cannot Answer Immediately Incoming call screen (P72) P The tone set in "On hold tone" (P75) is played. The image set in "Response hold image" (P80) appears for videophone calls.
On hold tone Setting Answer Holding Tone You can select one of the 3 answer holding tones (guidance) to play to the caller when you place the incoming call on hold.
M "Settings" "Call/VT/Dialing"
"Incoming call" "On hold tone"
"Hold tone 1"/"Hold tone 2"/"Hold tone 3"
I[Play]: Play back the hold tone. Voice call response hold screen Videophone call response hold screen
When you can resume the call, A You can also cancel the hold on a videophone call by pressing C[Answer]. If you press I[Image] to cancel the hold, the alternate image will be sent to the other party. b To terminate a voice call/videophone call Press P. Note The other party is charged during a hold. If you subscribe to the Voice mail service/Call forwarding service, you can connect the incoming call to the Voice mail service center/forward the incoming call to the specied phone number.P392, P396 Holding tone Setting Holding Tone You can select one of the 3 holding tones to play to the caller when you place the call on hold.
M "Settings" "Call/VT/Dialing"
"Call feature" "Holding tone"
"Hold tone 1"/"Hold tone 2"/"Hold tone 3"
I[Play]: Play the hold tone. Voice/Videophone Calls Continue on the next page 75 appears on the Stand-by display, and the call is When activating Public mode (Drive mode) When a call arrives to your FOMA terminal, the ring tone does not sound. recorded in the Received call log. The voice guidance indicating that you are driving or you are at a location where you cannot use mobile phones is played to the caller, and the call is disconnected. Deactivating Public mode (Drive mode) Press *(for 1+ seconds) in Stand-by. appears at the top of the screen when Public mode (Drive Note mode) is activated. Even when Public mode (Drive mode) is activated, you can make calls as usual. If Manner mode is activated concurrently, Public mode (Drive mode) settings take precedence. Tones other than from operations (ring tones or alarms, etc.) do not sound when Public mode (Drive mode) is activated. If mail arrives when Public mode (Drive mode) is activated, incoming mail actions such as sounding the ring tone, or vibrating the FOMA terminal will not take place. Using Public Mode Public mode is an automatic response service to assist in observing manners in public locations. Public mode includes the following 2 types.
- Drive mode
- Power O Voice mail service (*1), Call forwarding service (*1), and Caller ID request service (*2) take priority over Public mode.
*1 For voice calls with the ring time set to other than "0 Sec." the service is activated after the guidance for Public mode.
*2 If the other party sends the caller ID, Public mode is activated. Public mode is not activated for calls you reject using Nuisance call blocking service. Public mode (Drive mode) Using Public Mode (Drive Mode) The voice guidance is played to the caller indicating that you cannot answer the call as you are driving or at a place where you cannot talk (such as on a train, bus, or in a movie theater), and the call is disconnected. You can set or cancel Public mode (Drive mode) only in Stand-by
(even when "" is displayed). This option is not available during data communication.
*(for 1+ seconds) When a call arrives, the voice guidance is played in Japanese saying that "The person you are calling is currently driving or in the area where mobile phones should not be used. Please call again later". 76 Voice/Videophone Calls Public mode (Power OFF) Using Public Mode (Power OFF) When a call arrives while the power is turned o, the voice guidance is played to the caller indicating that you are at a place where mobile phones must be turned o (such as in hospitals, in aircraft, or near priority seats on a train) and cannot answer the call, and the call is disconnected.
Enter ":25251" A Public mode (Power OFF) is activated (there is no change for the Stand-by display). After Public mode (Power OFF) is activated, when a call arrives while the power is turned o, the voice guidance is played in Japanese saying that "The person you are calling is currently in the area where mobile phone use is prohibited and cannot answer the call. Please call again later". When activating Public mode (Power OFF) Public mode (Power OFF) is activated until it is deactivated by dialing
":25250". Turning the power on does not deactivate the mode. Public mode (Power OFF) voice guidance is played even when you are out of service area or in a place with weak signals. The voice guidance indicating that you are at a location where you must turn the terminal o is played to the caller, and the call is disconnected. Deactivating Public mode (Power OFF) Enter ":25250" and press A. Checking the status of Public mode (Power OFF) Enter ":25259" and press A. Missed call Checking Missed Calls If you could not answer a call, the Missed call notication screen appears on the Stand-by display. The Received calls list screen can be accessed from the icon to check the caller.
An incoming call terminates The Missed call icon appears on the Stand-by display. The number of the icon indicates number of missed calls. Missed call icon
(The number indicates the number of calls)
C Use K to select The Received calls list screen (P62) appears. Note After displaying the Received calls list screen, You can also select clear the icon. and press Q for 1+ seconds to disappears. Record message Recording Voice Messages when You Cannot Answer the Call When Record message is activated and if you cannot answer a voice call, the voice guidance is played and the caller's message is recorded. Up to 5 messages and approximately 15 seconds per message can be recorded. Record message does not start when a videophone call arrives. The FOMA terminal answers the call in the normal way. Voice/Videophone Calls Continue on the next page 77 Setting Record Message
M "Media" "Record message"
"Record msg. setting" Perform the following operations
[Activate record msg.]
When activate Record message, set to "ON".
[To answer]*
Enter the time after a call arrives and before Record message starts between 0 and 120 seconds.
[Answer message]*
Select an answer message. I[Play]: Check the answer message.
* Available when "Activate record msg." is set to "ON".
I[Done]
appears at the top of the screen when the Record message Note is activated.
<To answer>
If the set response time is longer than the ring time set for the Voice mail/Call forwarding services, a network service takes precedence. If the response time is set shorter than the time set in "Set mute ring(sec.)" (P130), Record message starts without ringing. 78 Voice/Videophone Calls When Record Message is Activated When a voice call arrives, the caller's voice is recorded. The set time has elapsed A call arriving Playing a response message Recorded Recording a message A new Record message icon appears
(The number indicates the number of calls) Stand-by display appears To talk with the caller while the response message is played or a message is being recorded Press A or C[Active]. To play a recorded message In Stand-by, press C use K to select or press E for 1+ seconds to display the Record message list screen
(P79). Press C[Play] to play a recorded message. will disappear after the recorded message is deleted. Note
"Record message" is disabled when "" is displayed, the power is turned o or Public mode (Drive mode) is activated. If a call arrives when the response message is being played or when a message is being recorded in Record message, the call is rejected. Quick Record Message Recording a Message when You Cannot Answer Incoming Call Even when Record message is disabled, you can record the caller's message with easy operation. Incoming call screen (P72) E(for 1+seconds) Caller's voice will be recorded after streaming a guidance.
Note If 5 messages are already recorded, Record message will not start and the caller's message cannot be recorded. Play/Delete record message Playing/Deleting Record Message
M "Media" "Record message"
"Record msg. list"
I[Delete]: Delete the selected recorded message. b To delete all recorded messages On the Record message list screen, press M[Menu] "Delete all". Record msg. list screen
Move the cursor to the recorded message C[Play]
The recorded message is played. C[Stop]: Stop playing the message. Q: Return to the Record message list screen. Use H/F/E to adjust the volume. Voice/Videophone Calls Continue on the next page 79 Setting Image to Send Substitute image Setting Substitute Image
M "Settings" "Call/VT/Dialing"
"Videophone" "Substitute image" "Default"/
"Select image"
When "Select image" is selected, select from the images saved in "My picture" of "Data Box".P296 Response hold image Setting Response Hold Image
M "Settings" "Call/VT/Dialing"
"Videophone" "Response hold image"
"Default"/"Select image"
When "Select image" is selected, select from the images saved in "My picture" of "Data Box".P296 80 Voice/Videophone Calls Holding image Setting Holding Image
M "Settings" "Call/VT/Dialing"
"Videophone" "Holding image" "Default"/
"Select image"
When "Select image" is selected, select from the images saved in "My picture" of "Data Box".P296 Videophone set Changing Videophone Settings
M "Settings" "Call/VT/Dialing"
"Videophone" "Videophone set" Perform the following operations
[Display setting]
Set images to be displayed on the main window and sub window for videophone calls. Other - Me : The other party's image is displayed on the main window, and your image on the sub window. Me - Other : Your image is displayed on the main window, and the other party's image on the sub window.
: Display only your image. Other only : Display only the other party's image. Me only
[Send camera image]
Set whether to send your image to the other party. When "OFF" is set, the other party receives the substitute image.
[Screen size]
Set the display size of the main window.
[Visual preference]
Set quality of the image sent to the other party. Prefer img qual Normal
: Send image with maximized image quality. This option is eective when there is little motion.
: Set standard quality and motion for the sent image. Prefer motion spd : Set priority to motion for the sent image. This option is eective when there is a lot of motions.
[Light]
Set light setting for the screen during a call. Always ON
: Always light up on during a call. Terminal setting : Use "Backlight" settings.P110
[Auto redial as voice]
Set whether to automatically redial with voice call if the mobile phone of the other party does not support videophone call.
[Hand-free switch]
Set whether to use Hands-free during a videophone call.
[V-phone while packet]
Set the answer method when a videophone call arrives during i-mode connection.P81 V-phone while packet Setting Answer Method of Videophone Call during i-mode When a videophone call arrives while connecting to i-mode or sending/receiving mails, the setting of this function is applied.
M "Settings" "Call/VT/Dialing"
"Videophone" "Videophone set"
"V-phone while packet" Select an item V-phone priority
: The videophone incoming call screen appears. When answering the call, i-mode communication is disconnected. Packet download priority : Reject an incoming videophone call. V-phone answerphone
: Connect to the Voice mail service Call forwarding automatically.
: Connect to the Call forwarding service automatically. Note If you do not subscribe to the Voice mail or Call forwarding service, "Packet download priority" setting is applied even if
"V-phone answerphone" or "Call forwarding" is set. Voice/Videophone Calls Continue on the next page 81 Phonebook Phonebook Available for the FOMA Terminal 84 Adding Entries to the FOMA Terminal Phonebook 84 Adding Entries to UIM (FOMA Card) Phonebook 87 Adding Phonebook Entries from Redial/Received Calls etc. 88 Changing a Group Name 89 Making a Call from Phonebook Search phonebook 91 Editing Phonebook Entries 96 Deleting Phonebook Entries 96 Checking Phonebook Storage Status No. of phonebook 97 Setting Phonebook 97 Making a Call with a Few Key Operation Quick dial 97 Displaying Call/Mail History 98 83 Phonebook Available for the FOMA Terminal The FOMA terminal contains 2 types of Phonebooks: The Phonebook saved on the FOMA terminal and the UIM Phonebook saved on the UIM. The following items can be saved/set for each Phonebook. Item Number of entries Entry details Name
(Reading) Phone number Mail Address Group Image Other settings FOMA terminal Phonebook UIM Phonebook Up to 1,000 entries* Up to 50 entries 1 entry 1 entry 5 entries 3 entries 31 groups 1 entry Secret code, Ring tone, Mail tone, etc. 1 entry 1 entry 11 groups None None
* Depending on the saved details, 1,000 entries may not be saved. Note If you insert your UIM into another FOMA terminal, you can use your Phonebook data on the UIM. 84 Phonebook Adding Entries to the FOMA Terminal Phonebook Note that the service counter such as the docomo Shop may not be able to copy Phonebook data from your existing FOMA terminal to the new one, depending on the specications.
Stand-by display D(for 1+ seconds) Add to phonebook screen
(FOMA terminal)
Perform the following operations
(Save to)]
(Memory No.)]
Select the save location. This section explains the case where
"Phone" is selected as the save location. When "UIM" is selected as the save location, the Add to UIM Phonebook screen appears.P87
The smallest un-assigned number is allocated automatically. You can also change it to your favorite number from 000 to 999 manually.
Enter up to 16 full-pitch or 32 half-pitch characters. Enter with Kanji, Hiragana, pictographs, symbols, alphanumeric characters, or Katakana, etc. Name]
Reading]
Enter or edit as required. Enter up to 32 half-pitch characters. Enter with Katakana, alphanumeric characters, or symbols.
Phone number]
Enter up to 26 digits. Enter a phone number Select an icon On the Phone number entry screen, you can press M[Menu] to select "Int. call", "Select prex", or "Cancel". Press I[Cancel] to cancel the entry. Mail address]
Enter up to 50 half-pitch characters. Enter with alphanumeric characters or symbols. Enter a mail address Select an icon
Secret code]*1 Set the secret code. Enter the Terminal security code Select an icon for the phone number/mail address Enter the secret code On the Secret code screen, press C[Release] to cancel the setting.
(Select a group)]
Select one from "No group" or "1 (Group 1)" to "30
(Group 30)". Groups can be used for the Group search (P92), etc.
Set an image or i-motion to be displayed when making/receiving calls or when checking a Phonebook entry. My picture
: Select an image saved in "My picture" of "Data Image]*3 i-motion Take picture
: Select a moving picture/i-motion saved in
"i-motion" of "Data Box".P307
: Activate the camera, and set the captured still Box".P296 image.P222 Terminal setting*2 : Use "Call & Mail image" settings.P109 Ringtone]*3
Select a ring tone for incoming voice/videophone call from the caller saved in the Phonebook. Music
: Select a Chaku-Uta Full song saved in "Music"
Melody i-motion of "Data Box".P270 Go to Step 3 in "Setting a Chaku-Uta Full Song as a Ring Tone" (P266).
: Select a melody saved in "Melody" of "Data Box". P314
: Select a moving picture/i-motion saved in
"i-motion" of "Data Box".P307 URL]
Image". Ringtone". Mail image]*3 Mail ringtone]*3 Terminal setting*2 : Use "Select ring tone" settings.P100
Select an image or i-motion to be displayed when a mail arrives. Available items are the same as for "
Select a ring tone for incoming mail from the sender saved in the Phonebook. Available items are the same as for "
Enter up to 256 half-pitch characters.
Enter up to 7 half-pitch characters.
Enter up to 100 full-pitch or 200 half-pitch characters. Enter with Kanji, Hiragana, pictographs, symbols, alphanumeric characters, or Katakana, etc.
Enter up to 50 full-pitch or 100 half-pitch characters. Enter with Kanji, Hiragana, pictographs, symbols, alphanumeric characters, or Katakana, etc. Company name]
Home address]
Zip code]
Phonebook Continue on the next page Continued on next page 85 Job title]
Co. address]
Co. zip code]
Enter up to 50 full-pitch or 100 half-pitch characters. Enter with Kanji, Hiragana, pictographs, symbols, alphanumeric characters, or Katakana, etc.
Enter up to 7 half-pitch characters.
Enter up to 100 full-pitch or 200 half-pitch characters. Enter with Kanji, Hiragana, pictographs, symbols, alphanumeric characters, or Katakana, etc.
Enter up to 100 full-pitch or 200 half-pitch characters. Enter with Kanji, Hiragana, pictographs, symbols, alphanumeric characters, or Katakana, etc.
Birthday]
Enter birthday.
Set the substitute image for a videophone call. Data box
: Select an image saved in "My picture" of Substitute image]
Memo]
"Data Box".P296 Secret]
Terminal setting : Use "Substitute image" settings.P80
This option appears when "Secret mode" (P127) is set to "Secret mode". Select "ON" if you save the Phonebook entry to be created as secret data.
Select a Live Character used in Live Character Park.P86
*1 For details about the Secret code, see "Mobile Phone User's
(Select Live Character)]
Guide [i-mode] FOMA version". 86 Phonebook
*2 If you change any one of "
Image", "
Ringtone", "
Mail image", or "
Mail ringtone" of the Phonebook while a moving picture/i-motion with video/sound is set for "Select ring tone"
(P100) and "Call & Mail image" (P109), the default sound or image is set to "Image" or "Ringtone" that is not changed.
*3 If you set a moving picture/i-motion with video/sound either for the image or ring tone, the same moving picture/i-motion is set for the other item automatically.
I[Done]
Changing Live Character of the entry saved on the Phonebook To select a character type displayed in Live Character Park, set in "Setting Live Character Park Theme"P338 Only touch operation is available.
* The screenshot is an example when the character type is set to
"Animal". a Selected Live Character b Character type Change a character type to set. c Live Character list d Scroll bar Slide to scroll the Live Character list display. e Change color to the one displayed on the Live Character list Restore the changed color of Live Character. f Change color Change the color of the clothes (or hair) of the selected Live Character in random order each time this item is touched. Note
<Secret code>
If the mail address is saved to the Phonebook in the format of
"Phone number + secret code@docomo.ne.jp", you may not send mail or reply to that contact. Change the mail address format to "Phone number@docomo.ne.jp" rst, then register the Secret code.
<Secret>
When "Secret mode" (P127) is set to "Secret data only", the Phonebook entry is saved as secret data. The secret entry is displayed only when "Secret mode" is set to
"Secret mode" or "Secret data only". Secret entries cannot be saved to the UIM Phonebook. The names saved in the secret entries are displayed in the Redial log, history, or mail list/detail screen only when "Secret mode" is set to "Secret mode" or "Secret data only". The phone numbers and mail addresses are displayed when "Secret mode"
is set to "OFF". When "Secret mode" is set to "OFF" and you receive a call or mail from the secret contact, the name or image saved to the Phonebook is not displayed and the set ring tone does not sound. Adding Entries to UIM
(FOMA Card) Phonebook
Add to phonebook screen (P84)
(Save to) eld "UIM"
Perform the following operations Add to phonebook screen (UIM) Name]
(Save to)]
Select the save location. When "Phone" is selected as the save location, the FOMA terminal Phonebook entry screen appears.P87
Enter up to 10 full-pitch or 21 half-pitch characters. Enter with Kanji, Hiragana, pictographs, symbols, alphanumeric characters, or Katakana, etc.
Reading]
Enter or edit as required. Enter up to 12 full-pitch or 25 half-pitch characters. Enter with full-pitch Katakana, half-pitch alphanumeric characters, or half-pitch symbols. Phonebook Continue on the next page Continued on next page 87 Phone number]
For a green/white UIM, up to 26 digits can be entered. For a blue UIM, up to 20 digits can be entered. On the Phone number entry screen, you can press M[Menu] to select "Int. call", "Select prex", or "Cancel". To cancel the entry, press I[Cancel]. Mail address]
Enter up to 50 half-pitch characters. Enter with alphanumeric characters or symbols.
(Select a group)]
Select one from "No group" or "1 (Group 1)" to "10
(Group 10)". Groups can be used for the Group search (P92).
I[Done]
88 Phonebook Adding Phonebook Entries from Redial/Received Calls etc. You can save entries to the Phonebook from the list or detail screen of the call history, mail, or message that contains a phone number or mail address records. You can also save a currently entered/displayed phone number, etc. on the Phone number entry screen or site, etc.
Display the screen containing items to save b To save phone numbers from the Redial list screen
(P60)/Redial detail screen (P61)/Received calls list screen (P62)/Received calls detail screen (P62) Press M[Menu] "Add to phonebook". To save phone numbers from the Redial list screen/
Received calls list screen, select the target number rst. If the phone number is already saved in the Phonebook, "Add to phonebook" is not available. b To save phone numbers from the Phone number entry screen Press I[Save]. b To save a sender or recipient mail address On the Mail detail screen, press M[Menu] "Save"
"Address". If there are several mail addresses, select the one to save rst. b To save addresses/phone numbers included in the body text in a mail Move the cursor to the address/phone number to save to the Phonebook M[Menu] "Save" "No./addr. in body". Changing a Group Name You can group the entries on the FOMA terminal Phonebook and the UIM Phonebook. Up to 31 groups can be saved on the FOMA terminal Phonebook, and up to 11 groups can be saved on the UIM Phonebook (including "No group").
"No group" cannot be edited. Only a name can be edited on the UIM Phonebook.
M "Phonebook" "Group settings"
g[Phone/UIM]: Switch between the FOMA terminal and the UIM group setting list screens. J: View the settings of the selected group. Group setting list screen b To save addresses/phone numbers displayed on a site/Screen memo Move the cursor to the address/phone number to save to the Phonebook M[Menu] "Add to Phonebook"
"Yes".
Perform the following operations
[New registration]
Add a new entry to the Phonebook. Go to Step 3. The Add to phonebook screen appears with the new entry entered.
[Add registration]
Save additional items to the saved entry. Press T[Srch by] on the Phonebook entry screen to change the Phonebook search mode.P92 Select a Phonebook entry to which the item is to be added The Add to phonebook screen appears with the item added. If you add an item to the UIM Phonebook, the Add to phonebook screen appears with the items overwritten when the above step is performed.
Modify/save the Phonebook entry I[Done]
For saving procedure, refer to Step 2 in "Adding Entries to the FOMA Terminal Phonebook" (P84). When saving additional data to an entry, the conrmation whether to overwrite appears. Select "Yes" to overwrite. Note The data can also be saved to the Phonebook from the Scanned data screen with the bar code reader or Live Character Park screen.P235, P337 If you attempt to save characters longer than the maximum number of characters allowed, a warning screen notifying of the problem appears, then, the truncated string will be displayed on the Add to phonebook screen. Phonebook Continue on the next page Continued on next page 89
Move the cursor to the target group C[Set]
Perform the following operations Group settings screen
(Group name)]
Enter up to 10 full-pitch or 21 half-pitch characters. Enter with Kanji, Hiragana, pictographs, symbols, or Katakana, etc.
Set the ring tone for a call. Music
: Select a Chaku-Uta Full song saved in "Music"
Ringtone]*2 Melody i-motion of "Data Box".P270 Go to Step 3 in "Setting a Chaku-Uta Full Song as a Ring Tone" (P266).
: Select a melody saved in "Melody" of "Data Box". P314
: Select a moving picture/i-motion saved in
"i-motion" of "Data Box".P307 Terminal setting*1 : Use "Select ring tone" settings.P100
Set the ring tone for incoming mail. Available items are the same as for "
Mail ringtone]
Ringtone". Image]*2
Add an image to a group. The image is displayed when making/
receiving calls or checking Phonebook data. My picture
: Select an image saved in "My picture" of "Data Box".P296 i-motion Take picture
: Select a moving picture/i-motion saved in
"i-motion" of "Data Box".P307
: Activate the camera and set the captured image. P222 Mail image]
Terminal setting*1 : Use "Call & Mail image" settings.P109
Select an image or i-motion to be displayed when a mail arrives. Available items are the same as for "
Set whether to accept/reject calls for groups. Enter the Terminal security code "Not set"/"Reject call"/
"Accept call"
*1 If you change any one of "
Accept/Reject]
Ringtone", "
Image", "
Image". Mail image", or "
Mail ringtone" of the Phonebook while a moving picture/i-motion with video/sound is set for "Select ring tone"
(P100) and "Call & Mail image" (P109), the default sound or image is set to "Image" or "Ringtone" that is not changed.
*2 If you set a moving picture/i-motion with video/sound either for the image or ring tone, the same moving picture/i-motion is set for the other item automatically.
I[Done]
Note
<Accept/Reject>
The setting in "Accept/Reject call" (P95) in the Phonebook takes priority. 90 Phonebook Group Setting List Screen Sub Menu
Group setting list screen (P89) M[Menu]
Perform the following operations
[Set]
Change the selected group settings.P90
[Move]
Change the display position of the selected group. Select the new display position C[OK]
[Reset]
Reset the selected group settings. The group name is restored to default.
[Reset all]
Reset all group settings and group order. Search phonebook Making a Call from Phonebook To search Phonebook entries set as secret, set "Secret mode" to
"Secret mode" beforehand.P127 Making a Call from Phonebook You can make a call by invoking the Phonebook.
Stand-by display D The entries searched by the default search mode appear on the Phonebook entry list screen.P97 Phonebook list screen (Ex.: When searching all entries)
Move the cursor to a party to call A b To make a videophone call Press g[V. Phone]. Phonebook Continue on the next page 91 Operations on Phonebook Detail Screen When selecting a party on the Phonebook list screen, the Phonebook detail screen is displayed. Select a phone number and press C[Call] to make a call. You can make a call after selecting a phone number and use T[Disp.] to display the phone number. b When multiple phone numbers are saved Use H to select a phone number and press C[Call]. Press A to display the saved phone numbers on the Phone number selection screen in a list. Alternatively, use H to select a phone number and press C[Call] to make a call. Note If "Secret mode" is set to "Secret data only" (P127), only secret Phonebook entries (P86) can be searched/displayed. Searching Phonebook You can use various ways to search Phonebook entries.
M "Phonebook" "Search phonebook"
I[Default]: Set the highlighted option as the search mode for the Phonebook list screen displayed when you press D, etc. in Stand-by. The default search mode is indicated. Search phonebook screen
Perform the following operations
[Show all data]
Display all Phonebook entries divided into reading lines (- lines, A-Z) and " (others)" (for readings other than the Japanese Kana syllables). Use J to switch the reading line. Press the keys 1 to 0 (- lines) to switch the display to
"Reading search" mode. Operations are same as "Reading search".
[Group?]
Search and display Phonebook entries by group (Group list screen). Use J or g[UIM/Phone] to switch between the FOMA terminal Phonebook and the UIM Phonebook. Use H C[Select] to select a group and display Phonebook entries saved in the group.
[Reading?]
Enter part of "Reading" and search all Phonebook entries. Enter up to 32 half-pitch characters for reading. All Phonebook entries are displayed when a reading is not entered. You can also search readings using other than the leading character. Press I[Chara] to switch the input mode.
[Memory No?]
Display Phonebook entries on the FOMA terminal by every 50 entries from memory no. "0" in order. Use J to switch the memory number. The UIM Phonebook cannot be displayed. Phonebook entries can also be displayed by entering memory numbers with dial keys.
[Phone number?]
Enter part of the saved phone number and search all Phonebook entries. Enter up to 26 digits. All Phonebook entries are displayed when a phone number is not entered. You can search phone numbers using other than the leading digit. 92 Phonebook
[Domain?]
Display Phonebook entries that contain mail addresses by domain. Use J to switch the domain. Register a domain to search beforehand.P97 Note During background playback, moving pictures/i-motion saved on the Phonebook are not played. Operations on the Phonebook list screen Select the Phonebook entry in which a phone number and a mail address are saved and press A to make a call, and press I[Mail] to create mail. If multiple phone numbers or mail addresses are saved, the Phone number or mail address selection screen appears. Operations on the Phonebook detail screen When selecting a saved phone number, mail address, etc., you can perform the following operations. C[Call]
C[Mail]
: Make a voice call to the selected phone number.
: Create an i-mode mail addressed to the selected mail address.P138 C[Connect] : Connect to the site of the selected URL. C[Play]
C[Disp.]
: Play the selected ring tone.
: Display the selected videophone substitute image. Viewing Phonebook Entries
Stand-by display D a Save locations on the Phonebook If saved on the FOMA terminal Phonebook, the icon assigned to
"Phone number1" appears. If saved on the UIM Phonebook, appears.
Select a Phonebook entry When an image is set to the phonebook entry, the set image is displayed. Icons displayed for each item are same as those for the Add to phonebook screen. P84 Phonebook list screen Phonebook detail screen Phonebook Continue on the next page 93 Phonebook List Screen Sub Menu
Phonebook list screen (P93) M[Menu]
Perform the following operations
[Copy]
Copy or back up the selected entry. to the UIM*1 to the phone*2 to microSD Multiple choice Backup
: Copy the selected Phonebook entry to the UIM.
: Copy the selected Phonebook entry to the
: Copy the selected Phonebook entry to a FOMA terminal. microSD card.
: Select multiple entries from the FOMA terminal or UIM and copy to other locations (FOMA terminal/UIM/microSD). Select a copy source Mark entries to copy I[Copy] Select a copy destination
: Back up all Phonebook data saved on the FOMA terminal to a microSD card. Images saved in the Phonebook cannot be copied. Connect to center : Save Phonebook entries on the FOMA terminal to the Data Storage Center.P131
[Search by]
Search the Phonebook in another search mode.P92
[Send Ir data]
Send a Phonebook entry to an external device via infrared communication.P328 Focused data : Send the selected Phonebook entry. all in phone
: Send all data saved on the FOMA terminal Phonebook. all in UIM
: Send all data saved on the UIM Phonebook.
[Mail/URL]
Create mail or access URL. Compose mail Attach to mail
: Create an i-mode mail addressed to the mail address or phone number of the selected Phonebook entry.P138
: Create an i-mode mail with the selected Phonebook entry attached.P138 Compose SMS : Create an SMS message addressed to the phone number saved in the selected Phonebook entry. P176 Connect to URL : Connect to the site of the URL saved in the selected Phonebook entry.
[Call function]
Select the calling method. If multiple phone numbers are saved, after selecting the calling method, select the number to call on the Phone number selection screen. Video phone call Customize call Int. call(Japan)
: Make a videophone call.
: Change the saved phone number and make a call.
: Add the country code for Japan "+81"
automatically at the beginning of the phone number when you make a call from overseas to a phone number in Japan saved in the Phonebook. If the beginning of the phone number is "0", it is automatically deleted.
[Add new]
Create a new Phonebook entry.P84
[Edit]
Edit the selected Phonebook entry.P96 94 Phonebook
[Delete]
Delete saved data from the Phonebook.P96
[Create domain list]*3 Create the domain to be searched by domain search.P97
*1 Appear for the FOMA terminal Phonebook.
*2 Appear for the UIM Phonebook.
*3 Appear only for the domain search. Phonebook Detail Screen Sub Menu
Phonebook detail screen (P93) M[Menu]
Perform the following operations
[Mail/URL]
Create mail or access URL. Compose mail Attach to mail
: Create an i-mode mail addressed to the mail address or phone number saved in the displayed Phonebook entry.P138
: Create an i-mode mail with the displayed Phonebook entry attached.P138 Compose SMS : Create an SMS message addressed to the phone number in the displayed Phonebook entry.P176 Connect to URL : Access the site of the URL saved in the displayed Phonebook entry.
[Call function]
Select the calling method. Video phone call Customize call Int. call(Japan)
: Make a videophone call.
: Change the saved phone number and make a call.
: Add the country code for Japan "+81"
automatically at the beginning of the phone number when you make a call from overseas to a phone number in Japan saved in the Phonebook. If the beginning of the phone number is "0", it is automatically deleted.
[Edit]
Edit the displayed Phonebook entry.P96
[Copy]
Copy the displayed Phonebook entry. Copy item entry displayed. to the UIM*1 to the phone*2 to microSD
: Select and copy items from the saved Phonebook
: Copy the displayed Phonebook entry to the UIM.
: Copy the displayed Phonebook entry to the FOMA
: Copy the displayed Phonebook entry to a microSD terminal. card.
[Send Ir data]
Send the displayed Phonebook entry via infrared communication. P328
[Accept/Reject call]
Set to accept or reject calls per phone number saved on the FOMA terminal Phonebook. You can select this only when you move the cursor to a phone number beforehand. A phone number saved in "Reject on list" (P128) cannot be set to
"Accept call". Enter the Terminal security code "Not set"/"Reject call"/
"Accept call"
[Delete]
Delete the displayed Phonebook entry.
*1 Appear for the FOMA terminal Phonebook.
*2 Appear for the UIM phonebook. Phonebook Continue on the next page 95 Editing Phonebook Entries
Phonebook detail screen (P93) M[Menu]
"Edit" Edit each item Use the same steps in "Adding Entries to the FOMA Terminal Phonebook" (P84) or "Adding Entries to UIM (FOMA Card) Phonebook" (P87) to edit items. b To change the memory number and save the entry If you change the memory number and save the entry, the original entry remains with the original memory number and the edited entry is saved with a new memory number. number (000-999).
(Memory No.) enter any un-assigned memory
After editing, I[Done] "Yes"
96 Phonebook Deleting Phonebook Entries Example: To delete an entry from the Phonebook entry list screen
Move the cursor to an entry to delete on the Phonebook list screen (P93) M[Menu]
Perform the following operations
[Delete]
One Selected all in phone all in UIM
: Delete the selected Phonebook entry.
: Select multiple entries from the FOMA terminal or UIM.
"Phone"/"UIM" Mark entries to delete I[Delete] "Yes"
: Delete all Phonebook entries saved on the FOMA terminal. The Terminal security code is required to delete.
: Delete all Phonebook entries saved on the UIM. The Terminal security code is required to delete.
"Yes"
The selected/displayed Phonebook entry is deleted. b To delete a Phonebook entry from the Phonebook detail screen You can delete only one Phonebook entry at a time from the Phonebook detail screen. On the Phonebook detail screen, press M[Menu] "Delete" "Yes". No. of phonebook Checking Phonebook Storage Status You can check the memory status on the FOMA terminal/UIM Phonebook.
M "Phonebook" "No. of phonebook"
"Secret entry" is displayed when "Secret mode" is set to
"Secret mode" or "Secret data only". Setting Phonebook You can set Phonebook entries or images to be invoked from the Stand-by display.
M "Phonebook" "Phonebook settings"
Perform the following operations
[Default mode]
Set the search mode for the Phonebook list screen displayed when you press D in Stand-by.
[Create domain list]
Create a domain to be searched by the domain search. Move the cursor to unregistered item C[Add] Enter a domain name
[Accept/Reject list]
Phone numbers saved on the Accept/reject call list in "Accept/reject call" are displayed. Enter the Terminal security code "Accept list"/"Reject list"
Press M[Menu] to perform "Add", "Delete", or "Delete all" operation. Editing the entered domain name Move the cursor to the domain to edit on the domain list C[Edit] edit the domain name.
"@docomo.ne.jp" on the domain list cannot be edited. Deleting the entered domain name Move the cursor to the domain to delete on the domain list g[Delete] "Yes". Quick dial Making a Call with a Few Key Operation In Stand-by, enter a 1- to 2-digit number with the dial keys to quickly make a call to the phone number corresponding to the memory number of "0" to "99" on the FOMA terminal Phonebook.
Enter a 1- to 2-digit number Use J to display Quick dial numbers in turn. The content of the entry of the memory no. corresponding to the entered number appears.
A b To make a videophone call Press g[V. phone]. Phonebook Continue on the next page Continued on next page 97 Note If "Quick dial" is set to "OFF", this function does not work. P109 If you use a 3-digit memory number with the rst or second digit started with "0" such as "001" or "011", "0" is not necessary to be entered. This function does not work for the UIM Phonebook. Displaying Call/Mail History
M "Phonebook" "Call/Mail history"
Select a log to display Received calls : Display received logs for voice/videophone calls.P62 P60 Redial
: Display redial logs for voice/videophone calls. Received mails : Display received mail logs.P166 Sent mails
: Display sent mail logs.P166 Note Received calls can also be displayed by pressing L in Stand-
by. Redial can also be displayed by pressing R in Stand-by. 98 Phonebook Sound/Screen/Light Settings Displaying Image Set to Phonebook on Incoming Call Screen Show ph. book img 110 Setting Display Backlight Backlight 110 Displaying in Power Save Mode Power saver mode 111 Setting a Color Theme for Display Color theme 111 Using Kisekae Tool Kisekae Tool 111 Changing Display of Main Menu Menu settings 112 Setting Incoming Illumination Patterns Lighting LED 113 Setting Clock Display Date&Time format 115 Adjusting Touch Panel Calibration 115 Sound Settings Changing Ring Tone Select ring tone 100 Setting Volume of Ring Tone, Alarm, etc. Volume 101 Informing You of Incoming Calls and Alarms by Vibration Vibrator 102 Changing Ringing Tone Melody Call setting 102 Setting Eect Tone Select eect tone 103 Informing You of Touch Panel Operation by Sound or Vibration Touch settings 104 Sounding Alarm when a Line is Likely to be Disconnected Quality alarm 104 Setting Ring Time for Incoming Mail Mail ring duration 104 Sounding Ring Tone only from Earphones Headset usage setting 105 Muting Ring Tone from the FOMA Terminal Manner mode 105 Changing Manner Mode Settings Manner mode set 105 Screen/Light Settings Changing Stand-by Display Stand-by display 106 Setting Image for Incoming Calls Call & Mail image 109 Setting Dialing Screen Display Quick dial 109 Setting Wake-up Display Wake-up display 110 99 Select ring tone Changing Ring Tone You can change the ring tone for voice/videophone calls, mail, etc. In addition to the pre-installed ring tones and melodies, i-motion, melodies and Chaku-Uta songs, Chaku-Uta Full songs downloaded from i-mode sites or the Internet web sites can be set as ring tones.
M "Settings" "Sounds&Vibration"
"Select ring tone" Perform the following operations
[Voice call]
Select the ring tone for a voice call. Music
: Select from Chaku-Uta Full songs saved in "Music" of
"Data Box".P270 Go to Step 3 in "Setting a Chaku-Uta Full Song as a Ring Tone" (P266). i-motion : Select from moving pictures/i-motion saved in "i-motion"
of "Data Box".P307 Melody : Select from melodies saved in "Melody" of "Data Box". P314
[Video call]
Select the ring tone for a videophone call. Available items are the same as for "Voice call".
[Mail]
Select the ring tone for i-mode mail. Available items are the same as for "Voice call".
[MessageR]
Select the ring tone for MessageR. Available items are the same as for "Voice call". 100 Sound/Screen/Light Settings
[MessageF]
Select the ring tone for MessageF. Available items are the same as for "Voice call".
[SMS]
Select the ring tone for a SMS. Available items are the same as for "Voice call". When Stand-by i-ppli is set, the Receive results screen for SMS does not appear, and the ring tone and vibrator for SMS do not work.
I[Done]
Note The following le formats can be set for a ring tone (however, some les such as restricted les or les that contain only video or sound may not be set). SMF, MFi, and MP4 (Mobile MP4) When moving pictures/i-motion is set for ring tones (Chaku-
motion), "Call & Mail image" (P109) is also changed to the same. If you set a moving picture/i-motion with video for "Mail",
"MessageR", "MessageF", or "SMS", the same moving picture/
i-motion is set for all these items. You cannot set each item individually. If music, melody or moving pictures/i-motion with video are set as a ring tone, the incoming screen will be reset to default screen when you change the ring tone to moving pictures/
i-motion without video. Image only moving pictures/i-motion cannot be set as ring tones. Pre-installed Ring Tone List Alarm 01-04 Ring 20-25 Alarm 05 Power on 01-02 i-motion ATOM Melody Message 09-10 Ring 01-19 Message 01-08 Power o 01-02 Volume Setting Volume of Ring Tone, Alarm, etc.
M "Settings" "Sounds&Vibration"
Perform the following operations
"Volume"
J: Adjust the volume of the selected item. When the volume level is set to the lowest,
(Silent) is displayed and the tone does not sound. Every time the volume is adjusted, the tone for the item sounds at the new volume (except "Receiver volume"). For "Incoming call", the ring tone/eect tone set in "Voice call"
sounds; for "Mail/Message/SMS", the tone set in "Mail" sounds;
for "Power ON/OFF", the tone set in "Power ON" sounds.
* The default ring tone sounds for "Alarm/Schedule".
[Incoming call]*
Adjust the ring tone volume for incoming voice/videophone calls.
[Mail/Message/SMS]*
Adjust the ring tone volume for Mail or MessageR/F.
[Alarm/Schedule]*
Adjust the alarm tone volume for Alarm/Schedule.
[Keypad tone]
Adjust the volume of keypad tone except dial tone.
[Flip tone]
Adjust the volume when the FOMA terminal is opened/closed.
[Dial sound]
Adjust the dial sound volume. Sound/Screen/Light Settings Continue on the next page Continued on next page 101
[Pop-up]
Set whether to vibrate the FOMA terminal when the Popup screen appears.
[Power ON/OFF]
Set the vibration pattern when the FOMA terminal is turned on/o.
I[Done]
Melody Call setting Changing Ringing Tone This service enables you to play a melody to the other party when a voice call arrives. Melody Call is not played for videophone calls. Melody Call is a fee-based service that requires subscription. For details about Melody Call, see "Mobile Phone User's Guide
[Network Services]".
M "Settings" "Call/VT/Dialing"
"Incoming call" "Melody Call setting" "Yes"
The FOMA terminal connects to the Melody Call setting site. Packet communication charges do not apply for the setting site. However, the charges apply for connecting to other sites.
[Power ON/OFF]
Adjust the sound volume when the FOMA terminal is turned on/o.
[Popup tone]
Adjust the sound volume when the popup window is displayed.
[Receiver volume]
Adjust the receiver volume. The sound cannot be muted.
* When the volume level is set to the highest, (Step up) is displayed to increase the sound progressively.
I[Done]
Note Adjusting the receiver volume during a callP74 Vibrator Informing You of Incoming Calls and Alarms by Vibration You can set the FOMA terminal to vibrate when a call or mail arrives or at a schedule alarm time.
M "Settings" "Sounds&Vibration"
"Vibrator" Perform the following operations
[Incoming call]
Set the vibration pattern for an incoming voice/videophone call.
[Mail/Message/SMS]
Set the vibration pattern when mail/MessageR/F is received.
[Alarm/Schedule]
Set the vibration pattern for the Alarm/Schedule alert. 102 Sound/Screen/Light Settings Select eect tone Setting Eect Tone You can set the eect tone when a key is pressed or operation is performed.
M "Settings" "Sounds&Vibration"
"Select eect tone"
Eect tone selection screen
Perform the following operations
[Keypad tone]*
Select an eect tone when a key is pressed except Dial sound.
[Flip tone]*
Select an eect tone when the FOMA terminal is opened/closed.
[Dial sound]*
Select an eect tone when a dial key, *, or # is pressed in the Stand-by display or the Phone number entry screen (P56). If set to
"Japanese", "English", or "Korean", the numbers entered with dial keys will be read out.
[Power ON]
Select an eect tone when the terminal is turned on. Music
: Select from Chaku-Uta Full songs saved in "Music" of
"Data Box".P270 Go to Step 3 in "Setting a Chaku-Uta Full Song as a Ring Tone" (P266). Melody : Select from melodies saved in "Melody" of "Data Box". P314
[Power OFF]
Select an eect tone when the terminal is turned o. Available items are the same as for "Power ON".
[Low battery alert]
Set whether to sound an alarm when the battery level becomes low.
* On the selection screen of the setting item, press T[Play] to check the sound each time an eect tone is selected. To mute the sound, press T[Mute]. If "Silent" is set for "Volume", an eect tone cannot be checked.
I[Done]
Sound/Screen/Light Settings Continue on the next page 103 Touch settings Informing You of Touch Panel Operation by Sound or Vibration
M "Settings" "Sounds&Vibration"
"Touch settings" Perform the following operations
[Touch type]
Select an action when the touch panel is touched. OFF
: Does not perform actions. Sound
: Sound the tone selected for "Touch sound". Vibration
: Vibrate at the pattern selected for "Touch vibration". Sound + Vib. : Perform actions with the sound selected for "Touch sound" and vibration selected for "Touch vibration".
[Touch sound]
Select an eect tone when the touch panel is touched.
[Touch vibration]
Select a vibration pattern when the touch panel is touched.
[Touch sound level]
Adjust the sound level.
[Touch vib. level]
Adjust the vibration level when the touch panel is touched.
I[Done]
Quality alarm Sounding Alarm when a Line is Likely to be Disconnected The FOMA terminal noties you of a call almost disconnected due to poor signal quality with an alarm tone. If the signal rapidly deteriorates, the call may be disconnected without sounding an alarm tone.
M "Settings" "Call/VT/Dialing" "Call feature" "Quality alarm" "Alarm OFF"/"Low alarm"/"High alarm"
Mail ring duration Setting Ring Time for Incoming Mail You can set how many times or how long the ring tone sounds when mail arrives.
M "Settings" "Sounds&Vibration"
"Mail ring duration" Perform the following operations
[Mail ring]
Select an eect tone sounded when the terminal is turned on. OFF 1 cycle
: Set to mute a ring tone.
: Set to sound a ring tone once for up to approximately 30 seconds according to the set ring tone length such as music or melodies. Select time : Set a ring tone duration. D C Enter a ring tone duration 104 Sound/Screen/Light Settings
I[Done]
Headset usage setting Sounding Ring Tone only from Earphones You can set the ring tone or alarm tone to sound only from the earphones when the earphone/microphone (optional), etc. is connected.
"Headset usage setting"
M "Settings" "Sounds&Vibration"
C[Select] "Headset only"/"Headset+speaker"
I[Done]
Note While Manner mode is activated, ring tone, etc. sounds only from the earphones. Manner mode Muting Ring Tone from the FOMA Terminal Turn o the tones that sound from the FOMA terminal so as not to disturb others.
# (for 1+ seconds) Canceling Manner mode In Stand-by, press # (for 1+ seconds). appears at the top of the screen when manner mode is Note 2 types of Manner mode are equipped: "General manner" and
"Original manner".P105 activated. A playback conrmation screen appears when you attempt to play a melody, moving picture/i-motion while Manner mode is activated. Even when Manner mode is activated, the camera shutter tone sounds. The vibration pattern while "General manner" is active follows
"Vibrator". If "Vibrator" is set to "OFF", "Incoming call" is notied with the vibration "Pattern 1", "Mail/Message/SMS" is notied with "Message 1", and "Alarm/Schedule" is notied with "Alarm 1". Manner mode set Changing Manner Mode Settings Select the Manner mode action from "General manner" or
"Original manner". Original manner enables you to change the each setting of Manner mode. Example: To change the settings of Original manner
M "Settings" "Sounds&Vibration"
"Manner mode set" Move the cursor to
"Original manner" I[Edit]
b To select the Manner mode type Move the cursor to "General manner"/"Original manner"
press C[Select]. The Manner mode setting is ended. Sound/Screen/Light Settings Continue on the next page Continued on next page 105
Perform the following operations J: Select the vibration pattern or volume of the selected item. When the volume level is the lowest, displayed and the sound is muted.
(Silent) is
[Vibration]
Use C[ON/OFF] to set. ON : As same as "General manner", the vibration pattern follows
"Vibrator", and incoming voice, videophone calls, mails, or messages are notied with vibration. If "Vibrator" is set to
"OFF", "Incoming call" is notied with the vibration "Pattern 1", "Mail/Message/SMS" is notied with "Message 1", and
"Alarm/Schedule" is notied with "Alarm 1". OFF : The FOMA terminal does not vibrate.
[Incoming call vol.]*
Adjust the ring tone volume for incoming voice/videophone calls.
[Mail/SMS vol.]*
Adjust the ring tone volume for Mail/MessageR/F/SMS.
[Alarm/Schedule vol.]*
Adjust the alarm tone volume for Alarm/Schedule.
[Eect/Popup tone]
Adjust the eect tone or volume when the popup is displayed.
[Low battery alert]
Set whether to sound an alarm when the battery level becomes low.
* When the volume level is set to the highest, (Step up) is displayed to increase the sound progressively. Stand-by display Changing Stand-by Display You can set the items (wallpaper, clock, calendar, schedule, shortcut, etc.) to be shown on the Stand-by display.
M "Settings" "Display"
"Stand-by display"
Stand-by display setting screen
Perform the following operations M[Preview]: The selected preview screen is displayed. Press Q to return to the Stand-by display setting screen.
I[Done]
106 Sound/Screen/Light Settings
[Wallpaper]
TOUCH : Select an image to change when the Stand-by display is touched. Press I[Backgnd] to set a slideshow in background. P107
: Select an image saved in "My picture" of "Data Box". P296 A slideshow created from My picture cannot be selected with this operation. Make the Stand-by display setting from the Slideshow list screen (P305). Image i-motion : Select a moving picture/i-motion saved in "i-motion" of i-ppli
: Select a Stand-by i-ppli saved on the FOMA terminal.
"Data Box".P307 P285
[Display items]
Set the display such as clock, calendar, shortcut, etc. in the Stand-
by display. If "TOUCH" is selected for "Wallpaper", this item is unavailable. Do not show : Items such as clock, calendar, etc. are not displayed. Analog clock : Select an item from Analog clock. Digital clock : Select an item from Digital clock. Calendar
: Select to display only "Calendar" or "Calendar +
Shortcut
: Display shortcuts. Schedule". Select a registration eld C[Add] Select a function I[Done]
Up to 8 functions can be saved as a shortcut. Press M[Menu] to delete saved function or reset to default settings.
[Battery icon]
Select a battery icon.
[Antenna icon]
Select an antenna icon.
I[Done]
Note After changing to the option other than "Kisekae settings" for
"Battery icon" and "Antenna icon, these icons return to "Kisekae settings" by setting all in "Kisekae Tool" (P111). Setting Slideshow of Touch Image If "TOUCH" is selected for "Wallpaper", up to other 10 images can be displayed as slideshow in background of the touch image. If "Splash clock" or "Game" is selected for the touch image, a slideshow cannot be set.
Stand-by display setting screen (P106)
"Wallpaper" "TOUCH" I[Backgnd]
Perform the following operations
[Slideshow image]
Select a background image. Move the cursor to a list number C[Add] Move the cursor to a folder C[Open] Select an image Repeat the operation to add an image I[Done]
M[Delete]: Delete the selected image. C[Change]: Change the selected image.
[Slideshow speed]
Select a slideshow speed.
[Random slideshow]
Set whether to display slideshow images in random order. Sound/Screen/Light Settings Continue on the next page Continued on next page 107 If the background image and the text color of the clock are overlapped, the clock becomes invisible. Change the background setting or touch image. Under the setting of "Splash clock", the clock moves to the position you touch. Under the setting of "Game", you can play game on the Stand-
by display such as concentration or hidden catch, etc.
<When setting "Analog clock" or "Digital clock">
If the time zone is set to other than GMT+9 in "Auto time adjust" (P53) or "Local time zone" (P53), the clock is automatically changed to "Dual clock". After this option is set, press C in Stand-by move the cursor to the clock display C to display the following screen.
- "Dual clock"
The Date&Time settings screen (P53) appears when the Home clock (the upper clock) is selected, and the Stand-by display setting screen appears when the Sub clock (the lower clock) is selected.
- Other clocks The Alarm list screen (P351) is displayed. (If the date is selected, the Calendar screen of the schedule (P354) is displayed.)
<When setting "Calendar">
After this option is set, press C in Stand-by move the cursor to the calendar display C to display the Calendar screen of the schedule (P354). After "Calendar + Schedule" is set, press C in Stand-by move the cursor to the schedule C to display the Schedule list screen (P355).
I[Done]
Setting "Dual clock"
Selecting "Dual clock" in "Digital clock" displays the dates and times of 2 countries or areas, and cities. Select the country or area, and city of the clock displayed at the bottom of the dual clock. Use K to move to the target area C[Zoom in] Use K to move to the target city C[Set]
Press I[Search] to display the city name list. You can also enter the city name with dial keys and search for a target city. Press M[Menu] to search for a city or set Daylight Saving to ON/OFF. Note Some data may not be displayed in the Stand-by display. The moving picture/i-motion or Flash movie set as the Stand-
by display starts when the FOMA terminal is opened and the moving picture/i-motion stops when the terminal is closed. Also, press P to play or stop it. Web To function is not available from a moving picture/i-motion set as the Stand-by display. When displaying the Stand-by display, a Flash movie such as a clock, or GIF animation stops after played for a certain period of time.
<When setting "TOUCH">
Under the setting of "4 season", "SAKURA", "SummerBeach",
"MOMIJI", and "Yuki" are automatically switched depending on the month. Under the setting of "4 season", "SAKURA", "SummerBeach",
"MOMIJI", or "Yuki", part of touch image disappears and the clock appears when the display is touched once. The entire touch image and the clock disappear and only the background image appears when the display is touched once again. 108 Sound/Screen/Light Settings Call & Mail image Setting Image for Incoming Calls Set an image displayed on the screen for incoming calls, etc. image"
M "Settings" "Display" "Call & Mail
Perform the following operations M[Preview]: The preview screen of the selected image is displayed, and press Q to stop the preview.
[Incoming voice call]
Set an image displayed on the screen when a voice call arrives. Image
: Select an image saved in "My picture" of "Data Box". i-motion : Select a moving picture/i-motion saved in "i-motion" of P296
"Data Box".P307
[Incoming video call]
Set an image displayed on the incoming videophone call screen. Available items are the same as for "Incoming voice call".
[Mail sending]
Select an image displayed when sending a mail from "My picture" of
"Data Box".P296
[Mail receiving]
Select an image displayed when receiving a mail and MessageR/F from "My picture" of "Data Box".P296
[Mail complete]
Set an image displayed on the completion of receiving a mail and MessageR/F. Available items are the same as for "Incoming voice call".
[Check new messages]
Select an image displayed on the completion of checking new message from "My picture" of "Data Box".P296
I[Done]
Note A sound only moving picture/i-motion cannot be set to the incoming call screen. If a moving picture/i-motion with sound is set to the incoming call screen, the "Select ring tone" (P100) is also changed to the same. If a moving picture/i-motion with sound is set as an incoming image, the ring tone settings are automatically reset to the default when you change it to a still image or moving picture/
i-motion without sound. Quick dial Setting Dialing Screen Display Set whether to search and display the Phonebook entry corresponding to the memory number when entered between a 1-digit and 2-digit number in Stand-by.
M "Settings" "Display" Move the cursor to "Quick dial" C[ON/OFF]
Sound/Screen/Light Settings Continue on the next page 109 Note The image display priority for an incoming call is as follows:
a Image set to a Phonebook entry b Image set to a Group in the Phonebook c Image set for the Call & Mail image Backlight Setting Display Backlight You can set the Display backlight.
M "Settings" "Display" "Backlight"
Perform the following operations
[Display duration]
Set the backlight duration of the display from between 10 seconds and 10 minutes, or Always ON. When the set time elapsed after the last operation, the screen becomes dark. When approximately more 5 seconds elapsed, the backlight turns o completely. (While i-Channel ticker is displayed, the backlight does not turn o completely until at least 1 minute elapsed after the last operation.)
[Display brightness]
Set the backlight level of the display. If "Auto brightness" is set, the illumination sensor detects surrounding brightness and adjusts the display brightness automatically. Wake-up display Setting Wake-up Display Set an image displayed on the screen when the FOMA terminal is started up.
M "Settings" "Display" "Wake-up display"
M[Preview]: The preview screen of the selected image is displayed, and press to stop Q the preview.
C[Select] Select an image To select from other folders, press Q and then select an image.
I[Done]
Note Flash movies cannot be set as a wake-up screen. Show ph. book img Displaying Image Set to Phonebook on Incoming Call Screen Display the image set to the Phonebook entry when a call arrives from the number saved in the Phonebook with caller ID shown.
M "Settings" "Call/VT/Dialing"
"Incoming call" Move the cursor to "Show ph. book img" C[ON/OFF]
110 Sound/Screen/Light Settings
[AC connected]
Set the lighting when the AC charger is connected. Display setting : Use the settings in "Display duration" and "Display Always ON
: Light is always on. brightness".
I[Done]
Note During the voice call, the backlight turns o after approximately 5 seconds, regardless of the "Display duration" setting. Power saver mode Displaying in Power Save Mode You can set the backlight brightness of the display to the lowest power saving level.
M "Settings" "Others"
"Power saver mode" "ON"/"OFF"
Color theme Setting a Color Theme for Display You can select a color theme.
M "Settings" "Display" "Color theme"
Select a color M[Preview]: The preview screen is displayed. Kisekae Tool Using Kisekae Tool If you use "Kisekae Tool", items such as ring tone, Stand-by display, icon menu can be changed at a time. Downloading Kisekae ToolP195 Available items vary depending on Kisekae Tool.
- Stand-by display
- Custom menu
- Incoming voice call image
- Incoming vt call image
- Mail sending image
- Mail receiving image
- Mail complete image
- Check new message (Image)
- Antenna icon
- Battery icon
- Color theme
- Voice call
- Video call
- Mail/Message/SMS
- MessageR
- MessageF
- SMS
- Alarm If the Menu screen design is changed by using Kisekae Tool, menu structure may change, depending on menu types, according to the frequency of use. In addition, numbers assigned to menu items
(item numbers) may not be applied. Pre-installed Kisekae Tool can display menu items in Japanese, English, and Korean (except for "L03B-direct"). Downloaded Kisekae Tool may not display menu items in English and Korean.
M "Data Box" "Kisekae Tool"
Sound/Screen/Light Settings Continue on the next page Continued on next page 111
"i-mode"/"Preinstalled"
i-mode
: Select from Kisekae Tool downloaded from the site. Preinstalled : Select from preinstalled Kisekae Tool. Select "Search by i-mode" and connect to the i-mode site to search Kisekae Tool. Kisekae Tool list screen
Select Kisekae Tool I[Set all] "Yes"
C[View]: View the contents of the selected Kisekae Tool by item. Resetting the settings Press M[Menu] on the Kisekae Tool list screen "Reset screen display / sound setting" enter the Terminal security code. Kisekae Tool List Screen Sub Menu
Kisekae Tool list screen (P112) Move the cursor to Kisekae Tool M[Menu]
The Kisekae Tool list screen sub menu is the same as for "Still Image File List Screen Sub Menu" (P298) except for "Set all"
and "Reset screen display / sound setting". However, "Send via", "Set as", and "Store in center" are not displayed. 112 Sound/Screen/Light Settings Menu settings Changing Display of Main Menu You can switch between the following 2 types of the Main menu. Custom menu: Menu items can be changed. Basic menu: Menu items cannot be changed, but icons or background images can be changed. Changing Menu Items of Custom Menu You can change the menu items of the Custom menu depending on Kisekae Tool. You can call up the function with a few steps by changing menu items to frequently used ones. Menu items cannot be changed from the default Custom menu.
M Move the cursor to the function to change M[Menu] "Assign function"
Select a function "Yes"
Resetting the Custom Menu to the default M M[Menu] "Reset function assignment" "Yes"
Deleting the Menu operation log Depending on Kisekae Tool, Custom menu items are automatically sorted according to the menu operation log. Perform the following operations to delete menu operation log. M M[Menu] "Reset menu operation log" "Yes"
Changing Icons or Background Images of Basic Menu
M T[Basic]
Move the cursor to an icon to change M[Menu] "Icon settings" Select a new icon To select other folders, press Q and then select an icon. b To change the background image Press M[Menu] "Set background" select an image. Note JPEG or GIF images in 130130 dots or smaller can be used as an icon. The image size larger than this size is automatically reduced. The image of the rst frame is displayed for an image in animation GIF format. Setting Preferentially Displayed Menu You can set Menu displayed when pressing M in Stand-by.
M M[Menu] "Menu priority"
"Custom menu"/"Basic menu" "Yes"
Switching Menu While displaying Menu, press T[Basic/Custom]. Lighting LED Setting Incoming Illumination Patterns You can set the incoming or alarm illumination to ON/OFF, or set illumination patterns for each item.
M "Settings" "Display" "Lighting LED"
Perform the following operations M[Preview]: Check the illumination set to the selected item.
[Lighting LED]
Set whether to light/blink the illumination light.
[Incoming voice call]*
Set an illumination pattern for an incoming voice call.
[Incoming video call]*
Set an illumination pattern for an incoming video call.
[New mail]*
Set an illumination pattern for incoming mail/MessageR/F. Sound/Screen/Light Settings Continue on the next page Continued on next page 113
I[Done]
Note The illuminations for "Missed call" and "Unread message"
light/blink for up to 1 hour at 10 seconds interval, and other illuminations light/blink for up to 30 seconds.
[New Voice mail]*
Set an illumination pattern to indicate that a new message is recorded at the Voice mail center. This option is valid only when "Tone/Vibration message notication"
is set to "Yes".P393
[New Record message]*
Set an illumination pattern to indicate that a new message is recorded.
[Alarm]*
Set an illumination pattern at Alarm time.
[IC card(Felica)]*
Set whether to light or blink an illumination when using the IC card.
[Missed call]*
Set whether to light or blink an illumination when you missed a call.
[Unread message]*
Set whether to light or blink an illumination when unread mails, SMS, or messages exist.
[Low battery]*
Set whether to light or blink an illumination when the battery level becomes low.
* Available when "Lighting LED" is set to "ON"
114 Sound/Screen/Light Settings Date&Time format Setting Clock Display You can set the display format for date and time.
M "Settings" "Date&Time" "Date&Time format" Perform the following operations
[Date format]
Set the display format for the date.
[Time format]
Set the display format for the time.
I[Done]
Note YYYY=year, MM=month, and DD=day in the display. Calibration Adjusting Touch Panel You can set the display format for date and time.
M "Settings" "Others" "Calibration"
Touch the center of "+" at the upper left, upper
"Yes" Check the calibration with the same right, lower left, lower right, and middle operation as Step 2 "OK"
If "No" is selected, go to Step 4 without checking the calibration.
"Yes"
Sound/Screen/Light Settings Continue on the next page 115 Security Settings Rejecting a Call from Specied Number Reject on list 127 Rejecting All Incoming Calls Reject all calls 128 Setting Actions when Calls Arrive from Anonymous Callers Anonymous caller 129 Muting Ring Tone for a Caller Unset in Phonebook Set mute ring(sec.) 130 Rejecting a Call from a Caller Unset in Phonebook Reject unknown 130 Using Data Security Service Data Security Service 131 Resetting Various Functions Reset Settings 132 Deleting Saved Data All at Once Clear memory 132 Other Security Settings Other Security Settings 133 Security Code Security Codes Used on the FOMA Terminal 118 Changing Terminal Security Code Change security code 120 Setting PIN Codes PIN code 120 Unblocking a Blocked PIN 121 Restricting Operations and Functions on Mobile Phone Various Lock Functions 121 Restricting Others from Using Lock all 121 Restricting Making/Receiving Calls 123 Restricting Display of Phonebook and Schedule etc. Data access lock 124 Restricting Display of Live Character Park Live Character Park lock 125 Preventing the Touch Panel/Key Misoperations Touch lock 125 Restricting Outgoing/Incoming Calls and Messages Automatically Setting Touch Lock Auto touch lock 126 Setting Display for Redial and Received Calls Display Call/Mail logs 126 Displaying Information Set as Secret Secret mode 127 117 Security Codes Used on the FOMA Terminal Some functions of the FOMA terminal require a password. In addition to the Terminal security code, the Network security code, the i-mode password, etc. are oered. These passwords help you utilize your FOMA terminal. The entered passwords such as the Terminal security code, Network security code, and i-mode password are displayed as "". Cautions on security codes Avoid setting a password using your birthday, part of your phone number, your address or room number, "1111" or "1234", which can be easily guessed by others. Be sure to write down the set passwords and store them in a separate location. Do not reveal your passwords to others. DOCOMO is not responsible for damage caused by misuse of your security codes by others. If you forget your passwords, you need to bring your ID (driver's license, etc.), the FOMA terminal and UIM to the docomo Shop. For details, contact "General Inquiries" at the back of this manual. 118 Security Settings Terminal Security Code The Terminal security code is set to "0000" by default; you can change the code yourself.P120 If the Terminal security code entry screen appears, enter the 4- to 8- digit code and press C[OK]. Terminal security code entry screen Network Security Code The Network security code is a 4-digit number to be used for conrming subscriber's identity at an acceptance of order at the docomo Shop, docomo Information Center, or "
(user support)" and accessing network services. You can set any number at subscription, and can change the number yourself. If you have "docomo ID/Password" for "My docomo" which is a total support site for a PC, you can change the Network security code from a PC. From i-mode, you can change the Network security code by accessing " (user support)" then "() (subscriptions &
procedures)". For "My docomo" and " (user support)", see the backside of the back of this manual. i-mode Password The 4-digit "i-mode password" is required to register/remove contents in My Menu, or subscribe to/cancel message service, fee-based i-mode services. (Some other information service providers may set individual passwords.) The i-mode password is set to "0000" by default; you can change it yourself. From i-mode, you can change the password by accessing "iMenu" "English" "Options"
"Change i-mode Password". PIN1/PIN2 Codes You can set PIN1 and PIN2 codes to the UIM. These codes are set to "0000" by default. You can change them yourself.P120 The PIN1 code is a 4- to 8- digit number (code) required to identify the user every time the UIM is inserted into the FOMA terminal or the terminal power is turned on in order to prevent unauthorized use. The PIN1 code entry is required to make or receive calls, and operate the terminal. The PIN2 code is a 4- to 8- digit number used to reset accumulated call charges, etc. If the PIN1/PIN2 code entry screen appears, enter the 4- to 8- digit PIN1/PIN2 code and press C[OK]. Use the PIN1 and PIN2 codes you set previously if you purchase a new FOMA terminal and use the current UIM. PIN1 code entry screen (Ex.: For PIN1 code) PUK Code (PIN Unblock Code) The PUK code is an 8-digit number used to unblock the PIN1 or PIN2 code.P121 You cannot change it yourself. If you fail to enter the correct PUK code 10 times in a row, the UIM is locked. Enter PIN1 code OK Set new PIN1/PIN2 code Failed 3 times in a row Enter PUK code (PIN Unblock Code) Enter PIN2 code Failed 10 times in a row Contact the docomo Shop Security Settings Continue on the next page 119 Making emergency calls (110, 119, or 118) when the PIN1 entry screen is open You can make emergency calls (110, 119, or 118) even when the PIN1 code entry screen appears right after the FOMA terminal is turned on. I[ER. call] Select an emergency number C[OK]
Change PIN1/PIN2 code Changing PIN1/PIN2 Code Set "PIN1 code request" to "ON" before changing the PIN1 code.
M "Settings" "Lock/Security" "PIN code" Enter the Terminal security code
"Change PIN1 code"/"Change PIN2 code"
Enter the current PIN1/PIN2 code The new PIN1/PIN2 code entry screen appears. The new PIN1/PIN2 code re-entry screen appears.
Enter the new PIN1/PIN2 code (4 to 8 digits)
Re-enter the PIN1/PIN2 code entered in Step 3 Change security code Changing Terminal Security Code You can change the Terminal security code. The Change security code screen appears.
"Change security code"
M "Settings" "Lock/Security"
Enter the current Terminal security code
Enter a new Terminal security code
Re-enter the Terminal security code entered in Step 3 PIN code Setting PIN Codes PIN1 code request Requiring the PIN1 Code when the Terminal is Turned On Set to display the PIN1 code entry screen when the FOMA terminal is turned on, and reject the use of the FOMA terminal unless entering the PIN1 code.
M "Settings" "Lock/Security"
"PIN code" Enter the Terminal security code
"PIN1 code request" "ON"/"OFF"
Enter PIN1 code 120 Security Settings Unblocking a Blocked PIN If you enter an incorrect PIN1/PIN2 code 3 times in a row and the PIN lock screen appears, enter the PUK code to release the lock. You need to set a new PIN1/PIN2 code after unblocking the PIN code. The new PIN1/PIN2 code entry screen appears.
PIN lock screen Enter the PUK code (8 digits)
Enter the new PIN1/PIN2 (4 to 8 digits)
Re-enter the PIN1/PIN2 code entered in Step 2 The re-entry screen for conrmation appears. Various Lock Functions Lock function Lock all Omakase Lock Call/Mail lock Self mode Description Reference You can lock the FOMA terminal to prevent unauthorized use. If you lost the FOMA terminal, you can lock the terminal by remote control. To prevent unauthorized use of the FOMA terminal, you can disable outgoing calls, address entries with dial keys, incoming calls or display of mail messages. You can disable all network functions, such as making/receiving calls, using i-mode, or sending/receiving mails. P121 P122 P123 P124 Lock function Data access lock Live Character Park lock Auto touch lock Display Call/
Mail logs Secret mode Description Reference You can specify certain functions to lock. P124 You can hide Live Character Park. You can set the FOMA terminal to automatically lock the touch operations and Keypad to avoid being used in Turn View Style mode and leave the FOMA terminal for a certain seconds without any operations. You can hide redialed call, received call, sent mail, received mail logs. You can hide secret Phonebook entries or schedule events. P125 P126 P126 P127 Lock all Restricting Others from Using You can lock the FOMA terminal to prevent anyone from using it. When Lock all is activated, any operations other than turning power ON/OFF, making emergency calls, answering incoming voice/
videophone calls, and canceling Lock all are disabled.
M "Settings" "Lock/Security" "Lock"
"Lock all" Enter the Terminal security code
"Yes"/"No"
Security Settings Continue on the next page Continued on next page 121 Setting/canceling Omakase Lock 0120524360 Available 24 hours a day
(In Japanese only)
* Setting/canceling the lock is available from the My docomo site using a PC.
* For details about Omakase Lock, see "Mobile Phone User's Guide
[i-mode] FOMA version". When Omakase Lock is set, "Omakase Lock activated" appears. During Omakase Lock, operations except answering voice/
videophone calls or turning power ON/OFF are unavailable and each function (including the IC card functions) cannot be used. Receiving voice/videophone calls is available. However, only phone number appears and the name or image saved in the Phonebook does not appear. The received mails during Omakase Lock are stored in the i-mode center. Turning power ON/OFF is available. However, turning power OFF does not cancel the lock. The UIM or microSD card cannot be locked. Note Even if mail or MessageR/F arrives while Lock all is activated, the Receive results screen or icon is not displayed. While Lock all is activated, the i-Channel ticker does not appear. Calling emergency numbers (110, 119, or 118) during Lock all Emergency numbers (110, 119, or 118) can be called during Lock all. I[Emergency] Select an emergency number C[OK]
Canceling Lock all Touch "Unlock"/Press any key Enter the Terminal security code If you fail to enter the correct Terminal security code 5 times in a row, the terminal automatically turns power o. Omakase Lock Using Omakase Lock You can lock your personal information such as Phonebook entries and the IC card functions of Osaifu-Keitai by contacting DOCOMO when you lost the FOMA terminal and other cases. Your important privacy and Osaifu-Keitai will be protected. If Omakase Lock cannot be set at the subscription and communication becomes available within a year, the lock is automatically activated. However if you cancel or halt the contract, change your phone number, or issue a new UIM due to loss (only when locked the terminal by specifying numbers), the lock will not be automatically activated even within a year. The FOMA terminal can be unlocked upon your request.
* If you are the docomo Premier Club member, no charges apply to use this service as many times as you want. If you are not the docomo Premier Club member, charges apply (however, if you subscribe to this service upon or during suspension of the FOMA terminal, no charges apply.) Also, if you subscribe to Keitai Anshin Pack (Mobile Phone Security Package), you can use this service within the Keitai Anshin Pack at rate fee. 122 Security Settings Note Even when other functions are activated, relevant functions are ended and the lock is activated. Even while other lock function is set, Omakase Lock can be used. However, if Omakase Lock is set during Public mode
(Drive mode), voice/videophone calls also cannot be received. When the FOMA terminal is out of service area, turned OFF, or used overseas, the lock cannot be activated nor deactivated. Also, depending on the usage status of the FOMA terminal, the lock may not be activated. If you subscribe to Dual Network Service and the mova service is in use, the lock cannot be activated. Even when the subscriber is dierent from the user of the FOMA terminal, the lock is activated upon the request from the subscriber. Omakase Lock can be canceled only if the UIM phone number that is the same as the one used when Omakase Lock is activated is inserted in the FOMA terminal. If the lock cannot be canceled, contact "General Inquiries" at the back of this manual. Restricting Making/Receiving Calls Call/Mail lock Disabling Outgoing or Incoming Communications You can disable making calls, entering an address with dial keys, answering calls, or displaying mails.
M "Settings" "Lock/Security" "Lock"
"Call/Mail lock" Enter the Terminal security code Perform the following operations
[Call/Mail lock set]
Set whether to activate the Call/Mail lock.
[Dialing call]*
Disable the following operations. Making calls by entering numbers with dial keys Making calls via the received call logs Making calls to redial phone numbers (making a call to a number saved in the Phonebook or an emergency number such as "110",
"119", or "118" is available) Saving, editing, or deleting a Phonebook entry (including exchanging data via infrared communication, or copying/moving to the microSD card)
[Send mail]*
Disable the following operations. Entering a mail address with dial keys. Sending mail to an address in the redial or received mail logs
(sending mails to an address saved in the Phonebook is available). Performing data communications connecting to a PC, etc. Saving, editing, or deleting a Phonebook entry (including exchanging data via infrared communication, or copying/moving to the microSD card).
[Incoming call]*
Disable incoming calls. While this function is activated, a missed call icon does not appear and the received call log cannot be viewed.
[Rcv. mail display]*
Disable viewing sent/received mails and MessageR/F. While this function is activated, an icon indicating incoming mail does not appear, and mails and received mail log in the FOMA terminal cannot be viewed.
* Can be set when "Call/Mail lock set" is set to "ON".
I[Done]
Security Settings Continue on the next page 123 Self mode Stopping All Incoming/Outgoing Transmissions You can disable all network functions, such as making/
receiving calls, using i-mode, or sending/receiving mails. Infrared data communication is also unavailable.
M "Settings" "Call/VT/Dialing" "Self mode" "Yes"/"No"
Note Self mode is deactivated if you call an emergency number
("110", "119", or "118"). While Self mode is activated, callers will hear a message indicating that the FOMA terminal is turned o or out of service area. The Voice mail service and the Call forwarding service still work in Self mode. All mails and MessageR/F received while in Self mode are stored at the i-mode center and SMS is stored at the SMS center. To receive them, deactivate Self mode and check new messages/SMS. If a call arrives while Self mode is activated, a missed call icon does not appear on the Stand-by display after the Self mode is deactivated. Data access lock Restricting Display of Phonebook and Schedule etc. You can lock specied functions to reject the use unless the Terminal security code is entered, or restrict the use of the FOMA terminal.
M "Settings" "Lock/Security" "Lock"
"Data access lock" Enter the Terminal security code Perform the following operations
[Data access lock]
Set whether to activate the Data access lock.
[Phonebook]*
Set to disable the Phonebook until the Terminal security code is entered. In the Redial list or logs, the phone number or mail address of the caller/sender will be displayed instead of the name saved in the Phonebook. Receiving Phonebook entries using infrared communication becomes unavailable.
[Data Box]*
Set to disable the les in Data Box until the Terminal security code is entered. Receiving data such as images or melodies to be saved in Data Box using infrared communication becomes unavailable.
[Record message]*
Set to disable the Record message until the Terminal security code is entered. If the Record message is set to "ON" and locked, appear in the Stand-by display even when a message is recorded. does not 124 Security Settings
[Schedule]*
Set to disable the Schedule function until the Terminal security code is entered. An alarm set for a Schedule event does not sound. Receiving schedule events using infrared communication becomes unavailable.
[i-mode]*
Set to disable the i-mode function until the Terminal security code is entered. i-mode connections from other than the i-mode menu screen, such as "Web To" become unavailable. i-Channel ticker is not displayed. Pattern denition for the scanning function becomes unavailable. Receiving bookmarks using infrared communication becomes unavailable. Communication from i-ppli is available. i-ppli update is available from i-ppli menu.
[i-ppli]*
Set to disable the i-ppli until the Terminal security code is entered. Receiving i-ppli data using infrared communication becomes unavailable. If i-ppli is set as the Stand-by display, it will disappear from the Stand-by display.
* Can be set when "Data access lock" is set to "ON".
I[Done]
Note You can access the functions by entering the Terminal security code when:
- You access a function from the Main menu or Custom menu.
- You press a key assigned to access the function in Stand-by.
- You access a function from the New task screen (P349) or Task list screen (P350). Live Character Park lock Restricting Display of Live Character Park You can restrict the display of Live Character Park unless the Terminal security code is entered. Only available to display the Live Character Park screen from the Stand-by display. If performed from the Live Character Park screen, the screen returns straight to the Live Character Park screen.
M "Settings" "Lock/Security" "Lock"
"Live Character Park lock" Enter the Terminal security code Perform this operation to switch ON and OFF. Touch lock Preventing the Touch Panel/Key Misoperations Disable the use by locking touch panel and keys at the time of the FOMA terminal in Turn View Style mode. Setting Touch Lock
While the FOMA terminal is in Turn View Style Releasing Touch Lock
While the FOMA terminal is in Turn View Style
(for mode Touch Y(for 1+ seconds)/
1+ seconds) You can also release the Touch lock by opening the FOMA terminal. mode Y Security Settings Continue on the next page Continued on next page 125 Display Call/Mail logs Setting Display for Redial and Received Calls You can disable the display of redial, received call, sent mail, and received mail logs.
M "Settings" "Lock/Security"
"Display Call/Mail logs" Enter the Terminal security code
Move the cursor to an item to set C[ON/OFF]
The items set to "OFF" cannot be displayed. Redial logs Rcv. call logs : Set whether to display the received call logs. Sent mail logs : Set whether to display the sent mail logs. Rcv. Mail logs : Set whether to display the received mail logs.
: Set whether to display the redial logs. Note If "Rcv. call logs" is set to "OFF", the recorded message list is not displayed. Note While 1Seg, Camera, or music playback function (except BGM), etc. is in use, Touch lock is not applied. If a call arrives during Touch lock, the Incoming call screen, etc. appears and operations become available temporarily. During background playback, you can adjust the volume by pressing F/E even if Touch lock is set. If Auto touch lock (P126) is set, Touch lock is applied automatically after a certain period of time. Touch lock cannot be set in some occasions such as during a call, while making a call, or communicating. Auto touch lock Automatically Setting Touch Lock You can automatically lock and disable touch operations and keys if the FOMA terminal does not operate for a certain period of time with the FOMA terminal in Turn View Style mode.
M "Settings" "Lock/Security" "Auto touch lock" Select a lock method OFF
: Do not activate Auto touch lock. After 15 sec.
: Activate Touch lock 15 seconds after the last After 30 sec. After 60 sec. operation of the FOMA terminal in Turn View Style mode.
: Activate Touch lock 30 seconds after the last operation of the FOMA terminal in Turn View Style mode.
: Activate Touch lock 60 seconds after the last operation of the FOMA terminal in Turn View Style mode. When LCD o : Activate Touch lock when the display turns o in Turn View Style mode. 126 Security Settings Secret mode Displaying Information Set as Secret You can set whether to display secret Phonebook entries/
Schedule events.
M "Settings" "Lock/Security" "Secret mode" Enter the Terminal security code Select a Secret mode setting OFF
: Display only general data other than secret data. Secret mode : Display secret and general data. Secret data only
: Display only secret data. Reject on list Rejecting a Call from Specied Number You can reject calls from the specic parties saved on the list. This function is available only when the caller sends caller ID. It is recommended that you set the Caller ID request service concurrently. Saving Phone Numbers to Reject You can save and edit up to 20 phone numbers to reject.
M "Settings" "Call/VT/Dialing"
"Incoming call" "Accept/Reject call" Enter the Terminal security code "Edit reject list"
Reject list screen Security Settings Continue on the next page Continued on next page 127 Reject all calls Rejecting All Incoming Calls You can mute the ring tone for all incoming calls or disconnect calls before incoming call actions are performed.
M "Settings" "Call/VT/Dialing" "Incoming call" "Accept/Reject call" Enter the Terminal security code "Accept/Reject set" "Reject all calls" "Silent"/"Disconnect call"
Silent Disconnect call
: Mute the ring tone for all incoming calls.
: Do not perform incoming call actions for all incoming calls. b To cancel the rejection Select "Accept" on the screen after selecting "Accept/
Reject set". Note When a call arrives while "Disconnect call" is set, the call is not appears on the Stand-by display. The call is notied and recorded in the Received call log as a missed call. The other party hears a busy signal. i-mode mail or SMS messages are received regardless of the rejection settings.
Select an empty list number Enter a phone number to reject "Silent"/"Disconnect call"
Silent Disconnect call M[Search]: Invoke a phone number to reject from the Phonebook.
: Mute the ring tone.
: Incoming call actions are not performed. Deleting a saved phone number Select a number to delete on the Reject list screen select
"Delete". Editing a saved phone number Select a number to edit on the Reject list screen select "Edit". Setting the Reject on List
M "Settings" "Call/VT/Dialing"
"Incoming call" "Accept/Reject call" Enter the Terminal security code "Accept/Reject set" "Reject on list"
b To cancel the rejection Select "Accept" on the screen after selecting "Accept/
Reject set". Note When the Reject on list is activated, and a call from a party saved as "Disconnect call" arrives, display and the call is recorded in the Received call log as a missed call. The other party hears a busy signal. i-mode mail or SMS messages are received regardless of the rejection settings. appears on the Stand-by 128 Security Settings Anonymous caller Setting Actions when Calls Arrive from Anonymous Callers You can set whether to accept or reject calls without caller ID per reason for anonymous call.
M "Settings" "Call/VT/Dialing"
"Incoming call" "Anonymous caller"
Enter the Terminal security code Perform the following operations
[User unset]
Set options for incoming calls without caller ID at the caller's will. Response Disable Reject call Silent alert
: Set response method for anonymous caller.
: Cancel the setting.
: Reject incoming calls.
: Mute the ring tone. You can select an image for the incoming call from images saved in "My picture" of
"Data Box".P296 Alert setting : Select an image and ring tone for the incoming call Incoming call image Ring tone from data in "Data Box".
: Set an image for anonymous caller.
"Terminal setting"/"Image"/"i-motion" Select an image
: Set ring tone for anonymous caller.
"Terminal setting"/"MUSIC"/"i-motion"/"Melody"
Select a ring tone If Chaku-Uta Full saved in "MUSIC" is selected, go to Step 3 in "Setting a Chaku-Uta Full Song as a Ring Tone" (P266).
[Pay phone]
Set options for calls made from payphones. Set items and operations are the same as in "User unset".
[Not support]
Set options for calls for which caller ID cannot be sent such as calls made from overseas or from a land-line phone via forwarding services.
(Caller ID may be sent depending on the carrier.) Set items and operations are the same as in "User unset". Note If an anonymous call set to "Reject call" arrives while the Anonymous caller is activated, the call is not notied and appears on the Stand-by display. The call is recorded in Received call log as a missed call. The other party hears a busy signal. Calls are rejected even when the Voice mail or Call forwarding service is activated. However, if Ringing time is set to 0 second or the FOMA terminal is out of service area or turned power o, network services are activated. i-mode mail or SMS messages are received regardless of the rejection settings. If "Select ring tone" (P100) or "Call & Mail image" (P109) is set with a moving picture/i-motion with audio/video for a specic caller and change either of them, the default sound or image, even if the response method is set to "Alert setting", is played for "Ring tone" or "Incoming call image" with the setting unchanged. If a moving picture/i-motion with video/sound is set as either
"Incoming call image" or "Ring tone", the same moving picture/
i-motion is set for the other item.
<User unset>
If the Caller ID request service is activated, it takes priority over the settings of "Anonymous caller". The caller hears the voice guidance for a Caller ID request. Security Settings Continue on the next page 129 Set mute ring(sec.) Muting Ring Tone for a Caller Unset in Phonebook You can set the FOMA terminal not to ring immediately when a call arrives from a caller not saved to the Phonebook or without caller ID. This prevents nuisance calls such as "one-
ring call" that are disconnected after a short ringing time.
M "Settings" "Sounds&Vibration"
"Set mute ring(sec.)" Perform the following operations
[Set mute ring time]
Set whether to enable the Set mute ring time.
[Mute time]*
Set the time for which the ring tone is muted before the ringing action starts between 1 and 99 seconds.
[Missed call logs]*
Set whether to display the Received call logs for the call that was terminated in the time specied in "Mute time".
* Can be set when "Set mute ring time" is set to "ON".
I[Done]
Note When a relevant call arrives while this function is activated, incoming call actions, such as sounding the ring tone, do not take place for the set time; however, the Incoming call screen appears. This function operates even when "Secret mode" is set to "OFF"
or a call from a operates Phonebook entry arrives.
<Set mute ring time>
If this option is set longer than the response time of the Voice mail/Call forwarding service, network services start without the ringing action. If this option is set longer than "To answer" time of "Record message", the Record message starts without the ringing action. You cannot set "Set mute ring time" when "Reject unknown" is set to "ON". Reject unknown Rejecting a Call from a Caller Unset in Phonebook You can set to reject calls from callers not saved to the Phonebook or without caller ID. It is recommended that you set the Caller ID request service concurrently.
M "Settings" "Call/VT/Dialing"
"Incoming call" "Accept/Reject call" Enter the Terminal security code Move the cursor to "Reject unknown" C[ON/OFF]
130 Security Settings Note The FOMA terminal does not perform incoming call actions for a rejected incoming call, however, the call is recorded in the Received call log. The other party hears a busy signal. Calls are rejected even when the Voice mail or Call forwarding service is activated. However, if the ringing time is set to 0 second, network services start. i-mode or SMS messages are received regardless of the rejection settings. You cannot activate "Reject unknown" when "Set mute ring time" is set to "ON" or "Data access lock" is set to "ON" with
"Phonebook" marked. Data Security Service Using Data Security Service This service enables you to back up the Phonebook, images and mails ("Saved data") at the DOCOMO's Data Center so that the Saved data can be restored if you lose your FOMA terminal or when changing models. Also, you can notify all connected parties of your mail address change at a time. No packet communication charges apply for sending the multi-
address notice mail. If you have a PC (My docomo), you can use this service more conveniently. For details about the Data Security Service, see "Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode] FOMA version". The Data Security Service is a fee-based service requiring a separate subscription (The i-mode contract is necessary for this subscription). Saving the FOMA Terminal Phonebook at the Data Security Center
M "LifeKit" "Data security service"
"Connect to center" Enter the Terminal security code "Yes"
Note You cannot save the UIM Phonebook. If another Phonebook is saved already, the data is updated. Note that if you use this service after deleting the Phonebook entries in the FOMA terminal, the Phonebook entries saved at the Data Center are deleted likewise. You can restore the Phonebook or use Set auto-update from
(i-mode's Data Security Service). "iMenu"
"English" "My Menu" select " (Data Security Service)". Displaying Exchanging History Display exchanging history with the Data Center.
M "LifeKit" "Data security service"
"Exchanging history" Select an exchanging history Move the cursor to an exchanging history and press M[Menu]
to select "Delete one" or "Delete all". Setting whether to Send Images Set for the Phonebook Set whether to save images set for the Phonebook entries to the Data Center.
M "LifeKit" "Data security service"
Move the cursor to "Sndg img in phonebook"
C[ON/OFF]
Security Settings Continue on the next page 131 Saving Images/Mails to the Data Center Example: To save images saved in "My picture"
cursor to a folder C[Open]
M "Data Box" "My picture" Move the
M[Menu] "Store in center" Mark images to save I[Done] Enter the Terminal security code "Yes"
Note Only images and mail saved in the FOMA terminal can be saved. SMS reports cannot be saved. An image larger than 100KB cannot be saved. Files attached to i-mode mail will not be saved. SMS with Korean text cannot be saved. Reset Settings Resetting Various Functions You can reset settings of various functions to the defaults. For functions that can be reset to the defaults, refer to "Menu List"
(P430).
M "Settings" "Others" "Reset/Clear"
"Reset Settings" "Yes" Enter the Terminal security code 132 Security Settings Note Perform "Reset Settings" with the battery level sucient. During "Reset Settings", functions/communication cannot be used. Clear memory Deleting Saved Data All at Once You can delete saved data.
"Clear memory"
M "Settings" "Others" "Reset/Clear"
Mark items to delete I[Done] "Yes"
Enter the Terminal security code Data to be deleted Item Pre-installed data User data PIM data Data Default data in "Data Box"*1 All data other than pre-installed data in "Data Box"
Data in "Phonebook"*2/"Schedule"/"Text memo"/
"Sketch memo"/"To do list"/"Remembering dates"/"1Seg", data in Inbox/Outbox*3, data in Bookmark, Screen memo, URL history, settings in Additional service and Additional guide of the network service
*1 Kisekae Tool data is not deleted.
*2 The total calls cost is not deleted.
*3 Inbox/Outbox folders, MessageR/F folders, and mail-connected i-ppli folder are not deleted. Deleting data saved on the microSD card You can delete all data saved on the microSD card. M "Settings" "Others" "Reset/Clear" "Clear microSD"
"Yes" Enter the Terminal security code
" and "Welcome " are deleted. Note Data saved on the UIM are not deleted.
" Welcome Mail
<Pre-installed data>
Some les that are used for default settings are not deleted. The use of WOW LG If you deleted pre-installed i-ppli, Deco-mail pictures, Deco-mail pictograms, wallpapers (the Stand-by display), frames, stamps, melodies, or i-motion and want to restore it, visit site, "WOW LG"
in iMenu and you can download.*
"iMenu" " (Menu list)" "
(Mobile Phone Manufacturers)" "WOW LG"
*Packet communication charges apply for downloading. Other Security Settings In addition to the security settings described in this chapter, the following functions/services are available. Function name/Service name IC card lock Reference Purpose P292 Nuisance call blocking service Caller ID request service To prevent unauthorized use of the IC card function To reject "nuisance call"
To reject a call from a caller without caller ID Purpose To update software on the FOMA terminal when necessary To protect the FOMA terminal from harmful data To accept only necessary mails out of mass mails Reference P459 P464 P149 See "Mobile Phone User's Guide
[i-mode] FOMA version". Function name/Service name Software Update Scanning function Receive option i-mode Disaster Message Board Service Change your mail address Spam Mail Prevention
(Reject Mail with URLs)
( Reject/Receive Mail Settings)
(Kantan Mail Settings)
( Reject Mass i-mode Mail Senders)
(SMS Rejection Settings)
( Reject Unsolicited Ad Mail)
( Conrm Settings) Suspending/reactivating mail functions Limiting mail size Keitai-Osagashi Service imadoco kantan search
(Location Search Service Lite) P397 P398 Security Settings Continue on the next page Continued on next page 133 Note The order of precedence when the function to prevent nuisance calls is set concurrently is the following:
a "Nuisance call blocking service"
b "Reject on list"
c "Reject unknown"
d "Accept/Reject call"
e "Anonymous caller"
134 Security Settings Mail Mail Functions of FOMA Terminal 136 i-mode Mail 136 Displaying Mail Menu Mail menu 137 Composing i-mode Mail/Deco-Mail Composing and Sending i-mode Mail Compose/Send i-mode mail 138 Creating and Sending Deco-mail Deco-mail 141 Using a Template to Create Deco-mail Template 144 Attaching a File Attachment 146 Receiving and Operating i-mode Mail When You Receive i-mode Mail Receive mail automatically 147 Receiving i-mode Mail Selectively Receive option 149 Checking New i-mode Mail Check new messages 150 Replying to i-mode Mail Reply to i-mode mail 151 Forwarding i-mode Mail to Other Address Forward i-mode mail 151 Adding Mail Addresses/Phone Numbers to Phonebook 152 Playing/Saving an Attached File from i-mode Mail 152 Operating Mailbox Displaying Mail in Inbox/Outbox or Unsent Messages Inbox/Outbox/Unsent message 154 Using Mail History Using Mail History Received mails/Sent mails/Recent mails 166 Conguring Mail Settings Setting Mail Functions of the FOMA Terminal Mail setting 168 Using Message Services When You Receive Message Receive Message 172 Checking New Message Check new messages 173 Displaying New Message MessageR/MessageF 174 Using SMS Composing and Sending SMS Compose/Send SMS 176 When You Receive SMS Messages Receive SMS 177 Checking New SMS Messages Check new SMS 177 Setting SMS SMS Settings 178 135 Mail Functions of FOMA Terminal The FOMA terminal provides 2 mail types: i-mode mail and SMS. Using i-mode mail requires i-mode subscription. Using SMS requires no i-mode subscription. If you send i-mode mail or SMS containing some symbols
a mobile phone other than i-mode terminal or on a PC. Mail function in Korean is supported only by SMS. If you receive e-mail in Korean via i-mode mail, text will not be displayed properly.
, etc.) or pictographs, they may not be displayed properly on
, SMS You can send and receive text messages using only mobile phone numbers without subscription to i-mode. SendingP176, ReceivingP177, CheckingP177 SMS Addresses The SMS address is the "subscribed mobile phone number". You can send and receive SMS to/from terminals that use international carriers other than DOCOMO. Visit the DOCOMO International Services website for available countries and international carriers. i-mode Mail Upon subscription to i-mode, you can send and receive e-mail via the Internet, as well as between i-mode terminals. In addition to the message text, a total of 2MB in 10 les
(pictures or moving pictures, etc.) can be attached. Also, Deco-mail is supported, in which you can change the color and size of message text or background color. You can also use Deco-mail pictogram to send expressive mail easily. For details about i-mode mail, see "Mobile Phone User's Guide
[i-mode] FOMA version". 136 Mail Number of Characters that Can be Sent or Received The number of characters that can be sent and received in SMS is as follows:
Receiver 21 characters (including "+") Japanese (70 characters), Korean (70 characters) English (160 characters) SMS text Sending and Receiving SMS in Korean You can send and receive SMS in Korean to/from terminals that support Korean. Use L-03B to send and receive international SMS in Korean to/from Korean-support terminals of Korea and other international carriers. Visit the DOCOMO International Services website for international carriers that support international SMS. The number of characters that can be sent depends on the situation of each recipient carrier. For details, contact recipient carriers. SMS texts in Korean sent to a terminal which does not support Korean will not be displayed properly on the terminal. Switching input modes in SMS message to KoreanP178 Entering in KoreanP382 When SMS Cannot be Received SMS delivered to the SMS center will be immediately sent to your FOMA terminal. However, when your FOMA terminal is turned o or out of service area, the SMS is stored in the SMS center. Note The maximum storage period of SMS in the SMS center is 72 hours. You can specify the storage period from "SMS validity period".P178 Expired SMS is automatically deleted. SMS stored in the SMS center can be received by "Check new SMS".P177 When SMS stored in the SMS center is delivered, it is deleted from the SMS center. Mail menu Displaying Mail Menu
Stand-by display g
Perform the following operations
[Inbox]
Display the Inbox list screen.P154
[Compose message]
Create new i-mode mail.P138
[Unsent message]
Display the Unsent mail list screen.P155
[Outbox]
Display the Outbox list screen.P155
[Check new messages]
Receive i-mode mail stored in the i-mode center by checking new messages.P150
[Receive option]
Check subjects of i-mode mail stored in the i-mode center, and select mail to be received, or deleted without reception from the i-mode center.P149
[SMS]
Compose new SMS, or receive SMS stored in the SMS center by checking new SMS.P176, P177
[Template]
Display a list of saved templates.P145
[Mail setting]
Set mail functions.P168 Mail menu screen Mail Continue on the next page 137 Compose/Send i-mode mail Composing and Sending i-mode Mail
Mail menu screen (P137) "Compose message"
Receiver Subject Attachment Message The total number of bytes of characters and decoration in the message text Compose message screen eld "Direct input" Enter the
Select address Up to 50 half-pitch characters can be entered. The address can be selected from Sent message log, Received message log, Phonebook, or Mail group.P139 Also, press T[Ph. book] to select an address from the Phonebook.
Select eld Enter the subject Up to 15 full-pitch or 30 half-pitch characters can be entered.
Select [Message] eld Enter the message Up to 5,000 full-pitch or 10,000 half-pitch characters can be entered. Message text entry screen
I[Send]
T[Save]: Save as unsent message. Note To decorate message textP141 To send with attachmentsP146 You can insert a line feed in the message text. The line feed is counted as 1 full-pitch character. A space inserted by pressing R is counted as 1 half-pitch character. Characters may not be sent to the receiver depending on the signal strength. Half-pitch katakana and pictographs except for mail exchanged between i-mode terminals may not be displayed correctly. The secret code is added automatically when mail is sent with the secret code set. However, the address of the sent mail does not display the added secret code. Even if i-mode mail is sent successfully, an error message indicating failure of sending mail may appear depending on the signal strength. 138 Mail If you use Deco-mail pictogram (Picto. D) in mail, the mail is automatically sent as Deco-mail. If you send a mail with pictographs added to the subject or message text to the other carrier's mobile phone, they will be automatically replaced with the similar pictographs that the carrier/mobile phone supports. However, they may not be displayed properly depending on the mobile phone type or its functions. i-mode mail that is successfully sent will be saved in Outbox. If the total number or total size of the stored sent mail exceeds the limit, the oldest mail will be deleted rst. Protect sent mail that you want to keep. Compose Message Screen Sub Menu
Compose message screen (P138) M[Menu] Perform the following operations
[Send]
Send mail.
[Auto send]
Send i-mode mail that was composed in out of service area automatically when the terminal moves to the place where signal can be received.
[Save]
Save mail being created or edited in Unsent message.
[Address]
Add address
: Send mail to multiple addresses (multi-address transmission). Up to 5 addresses can be added. Sent msg. log : Select an address from Sent message log. Rcv. msg. log Phonebook Mail group Direct input
: Select an address from Received message log.
: Select an address from Phonebook.
: Select an address from Mail group.
: Enter the receiver address directly.
: Delete a selected receiver address. Delete address Change rcv. type : Change the selected receiver address type.
: Change the selected receiver to To. The mail Change to To address entered in the To eld will be shown to the recipient. Change to Cc
: Change the selected receiver to Cc. You can specify additional addresses to send a copy of the same mail to other recipients in addition to the direct recipients. The mail address entered in the Cc eld will be shown to other recipients. The mail address may not be displayed depending on the recipient's mobile phone, device or mail software. Change to Bcc : Change the selected receiver to Bcc. You can specify addresses to hide from other recipients. The mail addresses entered in the Bcc eld will not be shown to other recipients.
[Attachment]
Attach, view/play, or delete les.P146
[Template]
Load template Save as template : Save the current Deco-mail as a template.
[Header/Sign.]
Attach header : Attach the set header. Attach sign.
: Attach the set signature.
: Load a template to create Deco-mail.P144. Mail Continue on the next page Continued on next page 139
: Attach the set header.
[Input setting]
Congure the character entry settings.P380
[Special input]
Enter a space, line feed, or enter characters using Kuten code. P380
[Header/Sign.]
Header Signature : Attach the set signature.
[Jump]
Top
: Move to the top of the displayed message text. Bottom : Move to the end of the displayed message text.
[Image info.]
Display detailed information about an image behind the cursor.
[Preview]
Open the preview screen of the message text.
[Delete body]
Delete the message text. Note
<Add address>
When selecting a Phonebook entry with multiple mail addresses saved, you need to further specify which addresses are to be added for recipients.
<Template>
If the message text is already entered, a conrmation whether to delete the text appears. To load the template, select "Yes". Message Text Entry Screen Sub Menu
Message text entry screen (P138) M[Menu] Perform the following operations
[Decorate mail]
Open the palette to select the decoration to Deco-mail.P142
[Common phrases]
Enter or edit Common phrases.P381
[Edit character]
Select a character or decoration in message text to copy, cut, or paste. Undo the last entry or pasting of characters.P385
[Edit user dict.]
Edit a dictionary stored in the FOMA terminal.P387
[Quote]
Quote the contents of a Phonebook entry, etc.P380 140 Mail Deco-mail Creating and Sending Deco-mail You can create your own designed mail by adding decorations such as changing font size, font color or background color, or inserting images while editing an i-mode mail message. Deco-mail up to 100KB can be sent. Up to 20 images within 90KB can be inserted. Some i-mode terminals may receive Deco-mail that is larger than 10,000 bytes as mail containing a URL to browse. The set decoration appears at the cursor position. Message text entry screen message"
Mail menu screen (P137) "Compose
Enter the receiver and subject Entering the receiver and subjectP138
Select [Message] eld g[Deco]
Palette display screen
Use the palette to decorate the message text DecoratingP142 b To specify a decoration before entering characters For operations, refer to "Specifying a Decoration before Entering Characters" (P143). b To enter characters before specifying a decoration For operations, refer to "Entering Characters before Specifying a Decoration" (P144).
M[Close]
b To view the Deco-mail message Press M[Menu] "Preview".
C[Set] I[Send]
Mail Continue on the next page Continued on next page 141 Note If you exchange Deco-mail with Deco-mail incompatible i-mode terminals, the decorations may not be displayed correctly. After decorated text is deleted, the decoration data may remain and this may result in a reduction in the number of characters available to enter in the text eld. Cancel any decoration before deleting the text. When you delete the text by pressing Q for 1+ seconds, the text including any decoration data will be deleted. If a template contains an image that cannot be sent via mail, the image may be deleted. Decorating
Message text entry screen (P138) g[Deco]
M[Close]: Switch from palette functions to character entry.
Perform the following operations
(Insert image)]
Data box Still image photography : Capture and insert a still image.
: Insert an image saved in "My picture" to the message text. Move the cursor to the folder C[Open] Select an image Capture an image C[Save] (If capturing in Turn View Style mode,
(Insert line)]
(Background color)]
Set a background color of the message text.
Insert a line in message text.
Specify the range of text to decorate.P144 This option cannot be selected when no text has been entered in the message.
(Edit decoration)]
(Char decoration)]
(Cancel decoration)]
Select decorations to apply to characters.P143
Delete decoration in the line at the cursor.
Apply My decoration : Apply a character decoration which is saved
(My decoration)]
Edit My decoration
: Save your favorite character decoration. beforehand. P143. 142 Mail
(Undo)]
Restore a set decoration to the previous state.
(Reset all settings)]
Delete all set decorations. Note When characters with "Telop" or "Swing" set are selected and copied or cut, "Telop" or "Swing" will not take eect.
<Insert image>
Up to 90KB or 20 images can be inserted. The number of available attachments may be reduced depending on the le size. If the maximum number of images or size is exceeded, a warning message appears. By default, images are saved in the "Decomail picture" and
"Decomail picto" folders. If the same image is inserted more than once, it is considered that one image is inserted. Specifying a Decoration before Entering Characters
Message text entry screen (P138) g[Deco] Select Perform the following operations
(Char decoration)
(Font color)]
Set the color for characters. You can also select a color from the palette by pressing I[Palette].
(Font size)]
Set a font size.
Set the text to blink. To cancel blinking, select
(Blink)]
(Blink).
(Move/Align)]
Set the display of the text. To cancel the setting, select
(Move Align (Default)).
(Telop)
: Set the text to display from right to left as a telop. Characters entered between a telop. and appear as
(Swing) : Set the text to swing.
(Left)
(Center)
(Right) Characters entered between swing.
: Align characters to be entered or images to be and inserted to the left.
: Align characters to be entered or images to be inserted to the center.
: Align characters to be entered or images to be inserted to the right.
C[Set] Enter characters Note
<Font size>
The size of Deco-mail pictogram cannot be changed.
<Font color>
Pictographs are also displayed in the specied color. To restore the default color, select on the right of
(Unchange)) from the color palette.
<Blink>
When characters set to blink are displayed on the preview screen or the Compose message screen, the characters stop blinking after a certain period of time.
(Text color Mail Continue on the next page 143
Compose message screen (P138) M[Menu]
"Template" "Load template" "Yes"
If the mail has entered message text, the entered text will be deleted and the template will be loaded.
Select a template The selected template is inserted in the message text. To select a template while viewing, press I[Preview] and switch templates using J. You can edit the message text after inserting a template. Creating a New Template Create user-dened templates. Created templates are saved in "Template" of Mail menu. M[Menu] "New Template"
Mail menu screen (P137) "Template"
Create templates
Create a template C[Set] Edit the title DecoratingP142 C[Set] "Yes"
Note If message text in the mail is not decorated, a template cannot be saved. Entering Characters before Specifying a Decoration
Message text entry screen (P138)
(Edit decoration)
Use K to move the cursor to start point g[Deco] Select C[Select]
I[SelAll]: Select the entire message. g[Top]: Move to the top of the message text. T[End]: Move to the end of the message text.
Use K to move the cursor to end point C[Select] Specify a decoration You can also decorate text by performing the following steps:
M[Menu] (for 1+ seconds) Use K to move the cursor to start point C[Select] Use K to move the cursor to end point C[Select] "Decoration" Specify a Decoration Selecting "Cancel decoration" deletes the decoration applied to the text. Template Using a Template to Create Deco-mail Templates are form data for Deco-mail with decorations such as the font size and image insertion already set. In addition to the pre-installed templates, you can use templates downloaded from sites. 144 Mail Editing Templates You can edit user-dened templates.
Mail menu screen (P137) "Template"
Template List Screen Sub Menu
Template list screen (P145) Move the cursor to a template M[Menu] Perform the following operations
[Compose mail]
Compose a new message with the selected template.
[New Template]
Create a new template.P144
[Delete]
Delete one
: Delete the selected template. Del. Selected : Select and delete templates. Template list screen
Select a template C[Edit] Edit the template DecoratingP142 Delete all Mark templates to delete I[Done] "Yes"
Press M[Menu] to select "Select all" or "Deselect all".
: Delete all templates. Enter the Terminal security code "Yes"
C[Set] "Overwrite save"/"New save"
Overwrite save : Save the edited template over the source template. New save
: Save the edited template as a new template.
Edit the title C[Set]
"Yes"
[Edit title]
Edit the title of the selected template.P145
[Detail info]
Display the properties of the selected template. Mail Continue on the next page 145
[Movie]
i-motion
: Select a moving picture/i-motion saved in
"i-motion" of "Data Box". Start camera : Capture and attach a moving picture. Capture a moving picture C[Save] (If capturing in Turn View Style mode,
[Motion Oekaki]
microSD
: Select a Motion OekakiTM image or Flash movie saved in "OTHER" folder of microSD card. Start drawing : Start Motion OekakiTM and attach a created image.
[Melody]
Select a melody saved in "Melody" of "Data Box". Move the cursor to a folder C[Open] Select a melody
[Phonebook]
Select a Phonebook entry.
[Calendar]
Select a schedule event saved in the FOMA terminal. Select a date Select a Schedule event
[To do]
Select To do saved in the FOMA terminal.
[Bookmark]
i-mode
: Attach a bookmark saved in "Bookmark" folder of Full browser : Attach a bookmark saved in "Bookmark" folder of "Full
"i-mode". browser". Attachment Attaching a File You can send i-mode mail with images or melodies attached. Up to 10 les, a total of 2MB, can be attached. The number of available attachments may be reduced depending on the le size. The following le types can be attached:
- Images (JPEG, GIF)
- Moving picture/i-motion
- Motion OekakiTM image
- Melody
- Phonebook
- Schedule event
- To do
- Bookmark
- Other les on microSD A le prohibited to be attached to mail or to be output from the FOMA terminal cannot be attached.
Compose message screen (P138) Select eld Perform the following operations
[Image]
My picture
: Select an image saved in "My picture" of "Data box".P296 Start camera : Capture and attach a still image. Capture a still image C[Save] (If capturing in Turn View Style mode,
) 146 Mail
[Others]
Attach a le saved in "OTHER" folder of a microSD card. Note GIF images and attached melodies cannot be received with an i-mode terminal using the mova service. A moving picture/i-motion larger than 2MB cannot be attached. Reduce the size under "Clipping" to the available size before attaching it.P312 Depending on the recipient terminal, a moving picture may be displayed coarsely or as sequential still images. When sending a moving picture/i-motion larger than 500KB to i-mode terminals other than 2MB-compatible ones, a moving picture captured with following setting is recommended. Size restriction: 500KB, Select size: QCIF (176144), Quality: Super ne Some i-motion may not be attached. Playing/Displaying/Deleting an Attached File
Compose message screen (P138) Select a desired attachment eld with a le attached Perform the following operations C[Select]: Play/display the selected attachment. g[Delete]: Delete the selected attachment. Note To add another attachment, select an attached. eld where no le is Receive mail automatically When You Receive i-mode Mail When the FOMA terminal is in the service area, i-mode mail is automatically sent from the i-mode center.
After the i-mode mail is received, at the top of the screen When the reception is completed, the Receive results screen appears. The previous screen returns if no operation is performed for approximately 30 seconds. Selecting "Mail" displays the Inbox list screen. Until the detail screen of received i-mode mail is displayed, the screen and the number of messages) appears in Stand-by. appears at the top of
(the number indicates appears Receive results screen Note When new i-mode mail is delivered, other i-mode mail and MessageR/F stored in the i-mode center are received at the same time. When receive option for i-mode mail has been set, sent i-mode mail is stored in the i-mode center. You can check the subject of i-mode mail stored in the center before selecting and receiving the mail.P149 If received mail was sent from a terminal that is capable of setting To, Cc, or Bcc, you can check how the mail was addressed to you on the FOMA terminal.P156 Melodies, moving pictures, and still images can be received as attachments to i-mode mail. Incompatible les may be automatically deleted at the i-mode center. If an attached le is deleted, " (Attached le deleted)" is added below the subject. Mail Continue on the next page Continued on next page 147 Displaying New i-mode Mail
Receive results screen (P147) "Mail"
Select mail to be displayed Select a folder Displaying/playing/saving/deleting an attached leP153 Received mail detail screen Note Selecting mail icon in Stand-by also display mail. Images attached to i-mode mail may not be properly displayed. Attachments incompatible with the FOMA terminal cannot be saved to "Data Box", however, they can be forwarded or saved to a microSD card (when saving in a microSD card, the le name will be changed to "OTHER001" to "OTHER999"). Files attached to a mail cannot be saved in the FOMA terminal when the FOMA terminal does not support the le type. Those les can be saved to a microSD card or forwarded.P151 Up to 100KB of i-mode mail including attachments can be automatically downloaded. Attachments larger than 100KB can be manually downloaded from the i-mode center.P152 You can set whether to receive attached melodies or images under "Receive attach le".P168 If the size of a received mail exceeds the number of characters
(data capacity) set under "iMenu" "English" "Options"
"Mail Settings" "Other Settings" "Limit Mail Size", you can select and download the attached le or the data whose name appears in the message text.P152 If the total number or total size of the received mail (i-mode mail and SMS) stored in the FOMA terminal exceeds the limit, the oldest read message will be deleted rst. Protect the received messages you want to keep. Incoming mail is saved at the i-mode center when:
- A videophone call in progress
- Power is o
- Self mode is activated - The terminal is out of service area
- Omakase Lock
- "Receive option set" is set to "ON"
- Inbox is full with protected or unread mail or appears. When mail is kept at the i-mode center, When the terminal power is o or the terminal is out of service area, these icons may not be displayed even there is i-mode mail at the i-mode center. If multiple i-mode mail messages or MessageR/F are received concurrently, the ring tone set to the last received i-mode mail or MessageR/F sounds. By default, "
" and "Welcome "
are saved in Inbox. No communication charge applied for this mail. You cannot reply to "
" and "Welcome Welcome Mail Welcome Mail 148 Mail Receive option Receiving i-mode Mail Selectively You can check the subject of i-mode mail stored in the i-mode center, and select mail to receive or delete at the i-mode center before downloading new messages. To use the Receive option, set "Receive option set" to "ON" in advance. Setting Receive Option After setting "Receive option set" to "ON", perform the following to receive selected i-mode mail.
Mail menu screen (P137) "Receive option"
C[Select] "ON"
After this option is set, i-mode mail will not be received automatically. Note To set "Receive option" to "OFF", perform from "Receive option set" (P168). When You Receive Mail
Notication of received mail screen appears Press C[OK] or Q/P to close the notication screen. Notication of received mail screen or Note displayed, and the mail ring tone will not sound. The i-Channel ticker stops while the Notication of received mail screen is displayed. indicating the incoming i-mode mail will not be Mail Continue on the next page 149 Check new messages Checking New i-mode Mail i-mode mails that could not be received for a reason, such as because the FOMA terminal was out of service area, are stored in the i-mode center. You can receive stored i-mode mail by checking the i-mode center. i-mode center. You can select items to check (mail or MessageR/F) under "Check new messages" (P168). You cannot check new messages when the FOMA terminal is out of service area. appears at the top of the screen when mail is kept at the
Mail menu screen (P137) "Check new messages"
When checking is completed, the Check results screen appears. Note Even when i-mode mail is kept at the i-mode center, appear on the screen if mail arrived while the FOMA terminal power was turned o. may not Setting Receive Option for Mail After "Receive option set" is set to "ON", perform the following steps to select and receive i-mode mail.
Mail menu screen (P137) "Receive option"
For subsequent steps, see "Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode]
FOMA version". b Icons displayed on the Receive option screen indicating attachments Icon File type An image is attached. i-motion is attached. A melody is attached. Another type of le is attached. Note Even if "Receive option set" is set to "ON", all messages will be received when "Check new messages" is used. If you do not want to receive mail, exclude "Mail" from the items to be checked.P168 Receive option can also be performed from "iMenu". Select
"iMenu" " (Menu List)" " (Receive option)". If the total number or total size of the received mail (i-mode mail and SMS) stored in the FOMA terminal exceeds the limit, the oldest read message will be deleted rst. Protect the received messages you want to keep. 150 Mail Reply to i-mode mail Replying to i-mode Mail You can reply to the sender of i-mode mail. Replying can be made by entering new text or quoting the text of received i-mode mail.
Received mail detail screen (P154) M[Menu] "Reply/Forward" "Reply"/"Reply with quote"
You can reply to mail also by pressing I[Reply] on the Received mail detail screen. If the mail is sent to multiple receivers, you can select "Sender"
to reply only to the sender or select "All" to reply the sender and all other receivers.
Enter the subject and the message text
"Re:" is added to the subject. When replying with quotation, ">" is added at the beginning of the quoted message. Editing the subject and messageP138
I[Send]
Note After exceeding the storage capacity of Outbox, you cannot send a reply. Delete mail saved in Outbox before replying. The reply to received Deco-mail with quotation has original decoration and images entered in the message text. However, images restricted to be output from the FOMA terminal will not be entered. Forward i-mode mail Forwarding i-mode Mail to Other Address You can forward received i-mode mail to other addresses. M[Menu] "Reply/Forward" "Forward"
Received mail detail screen (P154)
Enter the receiver
"Fw:" is added to the subject. Editing the receiver and message textP138
I[Send]
Note When a le prohibited to be attached to mail or to be output from the FOMA terminal is attached or pasted to an i-mode mail to be forwarded, the le will be deleted. After exceeding the storage capacity of Outbox, you cannot forward mail. Delete mail saved in Outbox before forwarding. If you forward a received Deco-mail, the original decoration and images remain entered in the message text. However, images restricted to be output from the FOMA terminal will not be entered. Mail Continue on the next page 151 Adding Mail Addresses/Phone Numbers to Phonebook You can save mail addresses and phone numbers in received mail to the Phonebook. Playing/Saving an Attached File from i-mode Mail You can play or save an image, melody, moving picture, or i-motion attached or pasted to i-mode mail. Saving an Address/Phone Number from the Message Text
Received mail detail screen (P154) Move the cursor to the address/number to save M[Menu] "Save" "No./addr. in body"
Go to Step 2 in "Adding Phonebook Entries from Redial/Received Calls etc." (P89). Saving a Receiver, Sender Address, or Phone Number
Received mail detail screen (P154) M[Menu] "Save" "Address"
If there are multiple recipients/senders, further select the addresses/phone numbers to save. Go to Step 2 in "Adding Phonebook Entries from Redial/Received Calls etc." (P89). Retrieving Selected Attached File When the size of a received message including attachments larger than 100KB, you will need to download the attachments from the i-mode center. All the attached les selected are downloaded regardless of the setting of "Receive attach le" option in "Communication" of "Mail setting". Expired les cannot be downloaded.
Received mail detail screen (P154) Select a le name Note When available space for Inbox is less than the le size, the attachment cannot be retrieved. 152 Mail Displaying/Playing/Saving/Deleting an Attached File
Received mail detail screen (P154) Move the cursor to the attached le C[Select]: Display/play the selected attachment.
M[Menu] "Attach le" Perform the following operations
[Save]
Save the selected attachment. In addition, select the destination when a microSD card is inserted on the terminal.
[Delete]
Delete the selected attachment. b Savable le type and saving destination File type Image*1 Image available as Deco-mail pictogram Moving picture/
i-motion Melody Phonebook Schedule To do Destination
"i-mode" folder of "My picture" in "Data Box"
"Decomail picto" of "My picture" of "Data Box"
"i-mode" folder of
"i-motion" in "Data Box"
"i-mode" folder of "Melody" in "Data Box"
Phonebook Schedule To do list File type Destination
"Bookmark" in "i-mode" or "Full browser"
Bookmark Others*2
*1 Images other than ones available as Deco-mail pictogram and Flash movie
*2 Other les, such as Flash movies, are saved only on a microSD card. However, depending on attachment, les cannot be saved. Note Large i-mode mail may be rejected by the i-mode center, and an error message may be returned to the source address. i-mode mail that is 100KB (with attachments included) or smaller can be automatically downloaded. Attachments larger than 100KB can be manually downloaded from the i-mode center. You can set a size limit for i-mode mail messages. When the image size is larger than the screen, it is shrunk and displayed. Some images and moving pictures/i-motion may not be displayed or played. When "Melody auto play" is set to "ON", an attached melody is played automatically when you open a received i-mode mail. A software that supports i-motion is required to play an i-motion mail on a PC. Mail Continue on the next page 153 Saving Inline Images
Received mail detail screen (P154) M[Menu] "Save" "Inline image"
Select an image "Yes"
To set as Stand-by display, select "Yes". Inbox/Outbox/Unsent message Displaying Mail in Inbox/Outbox or Unsent Messages To display contents of a folder with security set, enter the Terminal security code. Displaying Received Mail Up to 1,000 incoming i-mode mail and SMS messages can be saved in Inbox. However, the savable number depends on the amount of data. By default, "
saved. No communication charge applied for this mail. You cannot reply to "
" and "Welcome " are
" and "Welcome Welcome Mail Welcome Mail
Mail menu screen (P137) "Inbox"
I[ShowAll]: Display all received mail in list. T[Outbox]: Display the Outbox list screen.P155
Select a folder I[Reply]: Reply to the sender and multiple recipients.P151 T[Delete]: Delete the selected mail. g[Search]: Search from the Phonebook, Schedule, Address (Sent msg. log/Rcv. msg. log/Phonebook/Direct input), or Subject.
Select a message J: Display the previous or next mail. I[Reply]: Reply to the sender and multiple recipients.P151 Inbox list screen Received mail list screen Received mail detail screen 154 Mail Displaying Sent Mail Up to 500 i-mode mail, SMS, and unsent messages can be saved in Outbox. However, the savable number depends on the amount of data.
Mail menu screen (P137) "Outbox"
I[ShowAll]: Display all sent mail in list. T[Inbox]: Display the Inbox list screen. P154
Select a message J: Display the previous or next mail. I[Edit]: Display the Compose message or SMS screen.P138, P176 Sent mail detail screen
Select a folder I[Edit]: Display the Compose message screen or the Compose SMS screen. P138, P176 T[Delete]: Delete the selected mail. g[Search]: Search from the Phonebook, Schedule, Address (Sent msg. log/Rcv. msg. log/Phonebook/Direct input), or Subject. Outbox list screen Displaying Unsent Messages The number of messages saved in Unsent message are included in the maximum number of savable messages in Outbox.
Mail menu screen (P137) "Unsent message"
I[Send]: Send the selected mail. T[Delete]: Delete i-mode mail, or SMS. Sent mail list screen Unsent message list screen
Select a message The Compose message/SMS screen appears depending on the type of the selected mail. You can edit unsent mail. Mail Continue on the next page 155 Received/Sent/Unsent Mail Screen Components Received Mail List Screen/Received Mail Detail Screen Inbox/Outbox List Screen Received mail list screen Received mail detail screen a Displayed folder name b Subject
"SMS" is displayed for an SMS message. c Received date and time On the Received mail list screen, the date is displayed for messages received before today, and the time is displayed for messages received today. d Sender's phone number/mail address If the phone number or mail address is saved in the Phonebook, the name in the Phonebook appears. e Address types and multiple recipients If mail is sent to multiple addresses, their address types
(To or Cc) are displayed. If the mail address is saved in the Phonebook, the name in the Phonebook appears. Ex.: Inbox list screen a Folder name b Number of unread messages/total number of messages in the folder Appear on the Inbox list screen. For Outbox, only the total number of messages in the folder is displayed. b Icons displayed on the Inbox/Outbox screen Icon Description
"Inbox"/"MessageR"/"MessageF"/"Outbox"
(Default folders) No messages Security set No unread mail Standard i-ppli i- ppliDX
* Created automatically when mail-connected i-ppli is received. 156 Mail b Icons displayed on the Received mail list screen/Received mail detail screen Icon
(Gray) Description Unread i-mode mail/SMS/SMS report request Read i-mode mail/SMS/SMS report Replied Forwarded The message is protected. Saved in the UIM. Mail-connected i-ppli (Standard i-ppli) Mail-connected i-ppli (i- ppliDX) Received date and time Dierent Time zone SMS received Melody is attached. i-ppli can be started from the message text. Melody (SMF)/melody (MFi)/still Image/moving pictures/Phonebook entry/Schedule event/
bookmark/other le is attached. Multiple les attached Damaged le (Example: For a still image) Deleted attachment (Example: For a still image) Attached le un-retrieved Attached le deleted without retrieving Attached le interrupted while retrieving Acquisition failed. Attached le with the UIM security function activated Icon Description
Subject The message sent with the address as To, Cc, or Bcc Multiple recipient address types other than own address (To/Cc) Sender mail address to which the reply cannot be sent Multiple recipient addresses to which the reply cannot be sent
* Dierent icons indicated with ( ) appear on a detail screen. Sent Mail List Screen/Outbox Detail Screen Sent mail list screen Sent mail detail screen a Displayed folder name b Sent date and time On the Sent mail list screen, the date is displayed for messages sent before today, and the time is displayed for messages sent today. c Subject
"SMS" is displayed for an SMS message. d Recipient phone number/mail address If the phone number or mail address is saved in the Phonebook, the name in the Phonebook appears. e Receiver type Indicate the receiver type of the sent mail (To, Cc, or Bcc). Mail Continue on the next page Continued on next page 157 b Icons displayed on the Sent mail list screen/Sent mail detail screen Unsent Mail List Screen Icon
Description Sent i-mode mail/SMS i-mode mail sent to multiple recipients Failed to be sent The message is protected. SMS saved in the UIM Mail-connected i-ppli (Standard i-ppli) Mail-connected i-ppli (i- ppliDX) Sent date and time Melody is attached. i-ppli can be started from the message text. Melody (SMF)/melody (MFi)/still image/moving pictures/Phonebook entry/Schedule event/
Bookmark/other le is attached. Multiple les attached File with UIM security function attached Subject Sent as To/Cc/Bcc Failed to send as To/Cc/Bcc
* Dierent icons indicated with ( ) appear on a detail screen. 158 Mail Unsent mail list screen a Saved date and time The date is displayed for messages saved before today, and the time is displayed for messages saved today. b Subject
"SMS" is displayed for an SMS message. c Recipient phone number/mail address If the phone number or mail address is saved in the Phonebook, the name in the Phonebook appears. Icons displayed on the Unsent mail list screen Icon
Description Unsent i-mode mail/SMS i-mode mail with auto send reserved Auto send failed
* Other than the above, same icons as for sent mail are used. Inbox/Outbox List Screen Sub Menu
Inbox list screen (P154)/Outbox list screen
(P155) M[Menu] Perform the following operations
[Manage folders]
New folder Delete folder
: Add a folder.
: Delete the selected folder. Enter the Terminal security code "Yes"
Edit folder name : Change the name of the selected folder. Reorder folder
: Select the display position of the selected folder and sort. Folder lock
: Set or release security to the selected folder. Enter the Terminal security code
[Delete message]
Read in folder*
: Delete all read messages in the Inbox folder. Enter the Terminal security code "Yes"
All without Protected : Delete all messages in the Inbox/Outbox folders. (Except the protected messages) Enter the Terminal security code "Yes"
All with Protected
: Delete all messages in the Inbox folder.
(Including the protected messages) Enter the Terminal security code "Yes"
[Send all Ir data]
Send all mail in Inbox/Outbox via infrared communication.P329 Enter the Terminal security code Enter the authentication password "Yes"
[Copy all microSD]
Copy all messages in Inbox/Outbox to the microSD card. Enter the Terminal security code "Yes"
[Memory status]
Display number of messages in Inbox/Outbox and Unsent message folders.
[Clear inbox]*
Delete the user-dened folders and mail saved in "Inbox" and
"user-dened" folder. (Except the protected messages and folders containing the protected messages) Enter the Terminal security code "Yes"
* Not displayed for sent mail list screen. Note
<Delete folder/Edit folder name/Reorder folder>
This option is not available for the default "Inbox", "Outbox",
"MessageR", and "MessageF" folders. However, "Auto sort" is available for the "MessageR" and "MessageF" folders.
<Delete message>
A folder containing protected mail cannot be deleted. Protected mail and SMS saved in the UIM are not deleted. When unread mail exists, or when "Delete folder" is selected for a folder containing mail, a conrmation for deletion appears. Select "Yes" to delete.
<Send all ir data>
If mail with a Flash movie (les with extension of swf including Motion OekakiTM les) larger than 100KB attached is sent, the attached le is deleted. Mail Continue on the next page Continued on next page 159
<Copy all microSD>
If mail with a Flash movie (les with extension of swf including Motion OekakiTM les) larger than 100KB attached is copied, the attached le is deleted. Received Mail List Screen Sub Menu
Received mail list screen (P154) Move the cursor to mail M[Menu] Perform the following operations
[Reply/Forward]
Reply Reply with quote : Reply to the selected mail by quoting the
: Reply to the selected mail.P151 received message text.P151
: Forward the received mail to another receiver. Protect all Clear :
Forward
[Delete]
Delete one Delete selected : Select and delete mail.
: Delete the selected mail. Mark mail to delete I[Done] "Yes"
Press M[Menu] to select "Select all" or
"Deselect all".
: Delete all read mail in the folder. Enter the Terminal security code "Yes"
: Delete all mail in the folder. Enter the Terminal security code "Yes"
[Move]
Move one Move selected : Select and move mail to another folder.
: Move the selected mail to another folder. Mark mail to move I[Done] Select a destination folder Press M[Menu] to select "Select all" or
"Deselect all".
: Move all mail in the folder to another folder. Move all
[Protect]
Protect :
Protect one Protect selected : Select and protect mail.
: Protect the selected mail. Mark mail to protect I[Done]
Press M[Menu] to select "Select all" or
"Deselect all".
: Protect all mail in a folder. Clear one Clear selected : Select and unprotect mail.
: Unprotect the selected mail. Mark mail to unprotect I[Done]
Press M[Menu] to select "Select all" or
"Deselect all". Clear all
: Unprotect all mail in a folder. Delete all read Delete all 160 Mail Enter the Terminal security code "Yes"
Copy to microSD : Copy the selected mail or all mail in the selected
[Store in center]
Save mail at the Data Center. Save one
: Save the selected mail. Save selected : Select and save mail. Mark mail to save I[Done]
If the number of saved mail is less than 10, press M[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all. Enter the Terminal security code "Yes"
[Sort]
Set conditions and sort mail.
[Filter]
Display messages that meet certain conditions. Unread Read Protected With attach le : Display only mail with a le attached. Mail SMS All
: Display only i-mode mail.
: Display only SMS and SMS reports.
: Display all mail in the folder.
: Display only unread mail.
: Display only read mail.
: Display only protected mail.
[Export]
Ir exchange UIM
[Search]
With phonebook With scheduler Address
: Send the selected mail or all mail in the selected folder via infrared communication.P328 folder to the microSD card. Copying all mail in the folder requires you to enter the Terminal security code.
: Copy or move the selected SMS to the FOMA terminal or the UIM.
: Search mail by the Phonebook group search.
: Select date from the Schedule to search received mail on the selected date. Sent msg. log : Search mail by recipients' address in Sent mails. Rcv. msg. log : Search mail by sender address in Received mails. Phonebook Direct input
: Search mail by searching all Phonebook entries.
: Enter address to search mail.
: Enter subject to search mail. Subject Note
<Delete>
If there are unread messages, a conrmation for deletion appears. Select "Yes" to delete. Protected mail cannot be deleted.
<Protect>
Up to 1,000 mail can be protected.
<Store in center>
SMS with Korean text cannot be saved at the Data Center. Mail Continue on the next page Continued on next page 161
[Copy]
Copy contents of the displayed mail. Body Subject Address
: Select and copy contents of message text.P385
: Copy the subject.
: Copy address. If there are multiple addresses, select an address from the Mail address list screen.
[Attach le]
Save or delete les attached to the displayed i-mode mail.P153
[Export]
Ir exchange Copy to microSD : Copy the displayed mail to the microSD card. UIM
: Copy or move the displayed SMS to the FOMA
: Send the displayed mail via infrared communication. terminal or the UIM.
[Store in center]
Save the displayed mail at the Data Center. Enter the Terminal security code "Yes"
[Font size]
Set a font size for the message text on the Mail display screen. Note
<Delete>
Protected mail cannot be deleted.
<Protect>
Up to 1,000 mail can be protected.
<Export>
If mail with a Flash movie (les with extension of swf including Motion OekakiTM les) larger than 100KB attached is sent via infrared communication ("Ir exchange") or copied to microSD
("Copy to microSD"), the attached le is deleted. Received Mail Detail Screen Sub Menu
Received mail detail screen (P154) M[Menu] Perform the following operations
[Reply/Forward]
Reply or forward the displayed mail to another receiver.P151
[Delete]
Delete the displayed mail.
[Move]
Move the displayed mail to another folder.
[Protect]
Protect or unprotect the displayed mail.
[Save]
Address
: Save the mail address of the sender or multiple recipients to the Phonebook.P152 No./addr. in body : Save the phone numbers or mail addresses in the displayed mail to the Phonebook.P152
: Save images contained in the displayed mail. P154
: Save Deco-mail as a template. Edit the title "Yes"
Inline image Template 162 Mail
<Export>
If mail with a Flash movie (les with extension of swf including Motion OekakiTM les) larger than 100KB attached is sent via infrared communication ("Ir exchange") or copied to microSD
("Copy to microSD"), the attached le is deleted.
<Store in center>
SMS with Korean text cannot be saved at the Data Center. Sent Mail List Screen Sub Menu
Sent mail list screen (P155) Move the cursor to mail M[Menu] Perform the following operations
[Edit]
Edit and send sent mail.P138, P176
[Delete]
Delete one Delete selected : Select and delete mail.
: Delete the selected mail. Mark mail to delete I[Done] "Yes"
Press M[Menu] to select "Select all" or
"Deselect all". Delete all
: Delete all mail in the folder. Enter the Terminal security code "Yes"
[Move]
Move one Move selected : Select and move mail to another folder.
: Move the selected mail to another folder. Mark mail to move I[Done] Select a destination folder Press M[Menu] to select "Select all" or
"Deselect all".
: Move all mail in the folder to another folder. Move all
[Protect]
Protect :
Protect all Clear :
Protect one Protect selected : Select and protect mail.
: Protect the selected mail. Mark mail to protect I[Done]
Press M[Menu] to select "Select all" or
"Deselect all".
: Protect all mail in a folder. Cancel one Cancel selected : Select and unprotect mail.
: Unprotect the selected mail. The operations are the same as "Protect selected". Cancel all
: Unprotect all mail in the folder.
[Store in center]
Save mail at the Data Center. Save one
: Save a selected mail. Save selected : Select and save mail. Enter the Terminal security code "Yes"
Mark mail to save I[Done]
If the number of saved mail is less than 10, press M[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all. Enter the Terminal security code "Yes"
[Sort]
Set conditions and sort mail. Mail Continue on the next page Continued on next page 163
: Display only protected mail.
[Filter]
Display mail that meet certain conditions. Protected With attach le : Display only mail with a le attached. Mail SMS All
[Export]
Ir exchange
: Display only i-mode mail.
: Display only SMS.
: Display all mail in the folder.
: Send the selected mail or all mail in the selected folder via infrared communication.P328 Copy to microSD : Copy the selected mail or all mail in the selected UIM folder to the microSD card. Copying all mail in the folder requires you to enter the Terminal security code.
: Copy or move the selected SMS to the FOMA terminal or the UIM.
[Search]
With phonebook : Search mail by the Phonebook group search. With scheduler
: Select date from the Schedule to search mail received on the selected date. Address
Sent msg. log : Search mail by recipients' address in Sent mails. Rcv. msg. log : Search mail by sender address in Received mails. Phonebook Direct input
: Search mail by searching all Phonebook entries.
: Enter address to search mail.
: Enter subject to search mail. Subject 164 Mail Note
<Delete>
Protected mail cannot be deleted.
<Protect>
Up to 500 mail can be protected.
<Store in center>
SMS with Korean text cannot be saved at the Data Center.
<Export>
If mail with a Flash movie (les with extension of swf including Motion OekakiTM les) larger than 100KB attached is sent via infrared communication ("Ir exchange") or copied to microSD
("Copy to microSD"), the attached le is deleted. Sent Mail Detail Screen Sub Menu
Sent mail detail screen (P155) M[Menu]
Perform the following operations
[Edit]
Edit and send sent mail.P138, P176
[Delete]
Delete the displayed mail.
[Move]
Move the displayed mail to another folder.
[Protect]
Protect or unprotect the displayed mail.
[Save]
Address
: Save the mail address to the Phonebook.P152 No./addr. in body : Save the phone numbers or e-mail addresses in the displayed mail to the Phonebook.P152
: Save images contained in the displayed mail. Inline image Template P154
: Save Deco-mail as a template. Edit the title "Yes"
[Copy]
Copy contents of the displayed mail. Body Subject Address : Copy the address. If there are multiple recipients, select
: Select and copy contents of message text.P385
: Copy the subject. addresses to copy.
[Attach le]
Save or delete les attached to the displayed i-mode mail.P153
[Export]
Ir exchange Copy to microSD : Copy the displayed mail to the microSD card. UIM
: Copy or move the displayed SMS to the FOMA
: Send the displayed mail via infrared communication. terminal or the UIM.
[Store in center]
Save the displayed mail at the Data Center. Enter the Terminal security code "Yes"
[Font size]
Set a font size for the message text on the Mail display screen. Note
<Delete>
Protected mail cannot be deleted.
<Protect>
Up to 500 mail can be protected.
<Export>
If mail with a Flash movie (les with extension of swf including Motion OekakiTM les) larger than 100KB attached is sent via infrared communication ("Ir exchange") or copied to microSD
("Copy to microSD"), the attached le is deleted.
<Store in center>
SMS with Korean text cannot be saved at the Data Center. Unsent Mail List Screen Sub Menu
Unsent mail list screen (P155) Move the cursor to mail M[Menu] Perform the following operations
[Delete]
Delete one Delete selected : Select and delete mail.
: Delete the selected mail. Mark mail to delete I[Done] "Yes"
Press M[Menu] to select "Select all" or
"Deselect all". Delete all
: Delete all unsent mail. Enter the Terminal security code "Yes"
Mail Continue on the next page Continued on next page 165 Note
<Store in center>
SMS with Korean text cannot be saved at the Data Center.
<Ir exchange>
If mail with a Flash movie (les with extension of swf including Motion OekakiTM les) larger than 100KB attached is sent, the attached le is deleted.
<Copy microSD>
If mail with a Flash movie (les with extension of swf including Motion OekakiTM les) larger than 100KB attached is copied, the attached le is deleted. Received mails/Sent mails/Recent mails Using Mail History Up to 30 entries will be saved in each the Received mail logs and Sent mail log. Also, up to 60 entries of sent/received mail will be saved in "Recent". These logs can be used to compose mail and save addresses to the Phonebook. If the maximum number of recordable entries has been exceeded, the oldest entry will be deleted rst.
[Store in center]
Save mail at the Data Center. Save one
: Save the selected mail. Save selected : Select and save mail. Enter the Terminal security code "Yes"
Mark mail to save I[Done]
If the number of saved mail is less than 10, press M[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all. Enter the Terminal security code "Yes"
: Display only i-mode mail.
: Display all unsent messages.
[Sort]
Set conditions and sort mail.
[Filter]
Display mail that meet certain conditions. Mail SMS : Display only SMS. All
[Ir exchange]
Send the selected mail or all unsent mail via infrared communication.P328
[Copy microSD]
Copy the selected mail or all unsent mail to the microSD card. Copying all unsent mail requires you to enter the Terminal security code.
[Cancel auto send]
Cancel the auto send setting.
[Auto send fail reason]
Display the reason for auto send failure. 166 Mail Example: To display the Received mails
Stand-by display L(for 1+ seconds) b To display the Sent mails Stand-by display press R(for 1+ seconds). b To display the Recent mails Press J on the Received mail list screen/Sent mail list screen. I[Mail]: Create mail to the receiver or sender of the selected log entry. g[V. phone]: Make a videophone call to the phone number of the selected log entry. T[Call]: Make a voice call to the phone number of the selected log entry. Ex.: Received mail list screen b Icons displayed on the Received mails/Sent mails/Recent mails Icon Description Received mail Sent mail Received SMS Sent SMS Mail and SMS that were received/sent while roaming*
* The received/sent date and time is shown in the local time. Received Mails/Sent Mails/Recent Mails Sub Menu
Use H to move the cursor to a log entry to use M[Menu] Perform the following operations
Select an entry in the log C[Call]: Make a call to the selected number in the log. I[Mail]: Create mail to the receiver or sender of the selected entry. g[V. phone]: Make a videophone call to the phone number of the selected log entry. T[Add]: Add the selected mail address in the log to the Phonebook. Go to Step 2 in Adding Phonebook Entries from Dialed/Received Calls etc." (P89). Only unsaved mail addresses can be saved. a The name saved in the Phonebook b Other party's mail address c Receive/sent date & time
[Call function]
Voice call Videophone call Customize call Ex.: Received mail detail screen
[Mail]*1 Compose mail
: Make a voice call to the phone number of the selected log entry.
: Make a videophone call to the phone number of the selected log entry.
: Edit the phone number of the selected log entry and dial.
: Create mail to the receiver or sender of the selected log entry. Go to Step 3 in "Composing and Sending i-mode Mail" (P138). Compose SMS : Create SMS to the receiver or sender of the selected log entry. Go to Step 3 in "Composing and Sending SMS" (P176).
[Add to phonebook]
Save the mail address of the selected log entry to the Phonebook. Go to Step 2 in "Adding Phonebook Entries from Redial/Received Calls etc." (P89). Only unsaved mail addresses can be saved. Mail Continue on the next page Continued on next page 167
: Display recent call log entries.
: Display recent mail log entries.
[Change list]*2 Recent calls Recent mails Received calls : Display incoming call log entries. Received mails : Display received mail log entries. Redial
: Display phone redial log entries. Sent mails
: Display sent mail log entries. The item for the currently displayed log is not displayed.
[Delete]*3 Delete the selected log entry.
[Delete]*2 Delete one Selected
: Delete the selected log entry.
: Select and delete log entries. Mark mail to delete I[Delete]
Press M[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all. Delete all
*1 On the detail screen of Received mails/Sent mails/Recent mails,
: Delete all log entries.
"Compose mail" is displayed instead.
*2 Not displayed on the detail screen of Received mails/Sent mails/
*3 Displayed only on the detail screen of Received mails/Sent Recent mails. mails/Recent mails. Mail setting Setting Mail Functions of the FOMA Terminal Communication Conguring Communication Settings
Mail menu screen (P137) "Mail setting"
"Communication" Perform the following operations
[Receive option set]
To enable/disable the Receive option (P149), set whether to receive i-mode mail automatically. ON : Do not receive mail automatically. OFF : Receive mail automatically.
[Receive attach le]
Specify attached les to be retrieved when i-mode mail is received. Mark items to download I[Done]
[Check new messages]
Specify request items when using "Check new messages". Mark items to check I[Done]
Note
<Receive option set>
When this option is set to "ON", i-mode mail cannot be received automatically. Incoming i-mode mail is kept at the i-mode center, and the Notication of received mail screen (P149) appears.
<Receive attach le>
If the attached le set not to be received arrives, the le name is displayed in the message text and you can receive by selecting it.P152 168 Mail Display Conguring Display Settings
Mail menu screen (P137) "Mail setting"
"Display" Perform the following operations
[Font size]
Set a font size for text on the Mail detail screen. Pressing 1, 2, or 3 on the Received mail detail screen also changes the font size.
[Folder lock]
Set security for Inbox/Outbox and Unsent message in Mail menu. To display security-activated mail, the Terminal security code must be entered. Enter the Terminal security code Mark items to set I[Done]
[Melody auto play]
Set whether to automatically play attached or pasted melodies on the Mail display screen.
[Receiving display]
Set whether to notify with a ring tone or Receive results screen when i-mode mail or MessageR/F is received while operating the FOMA terminal (displaying other than Stand-by display). Alarm mode
: Notify with a ring tone or the Receive results screen. The Receive results screen is not displayed depending on the function in use such as while calling or activating Camera. Operation mode : Prioritize the FOMA terminal operation and does not notify with a ring tone or the Receive results screen, etc. When receiving i-mode message or MessageR/F while the display is turned o, the display does not light up. Mail group Registering Mail Group Register mail addresses to a mail group so that you can easily specify a certain group of multiple recipients. Up to 20 mail groups can be created. Up to 5 recipients can be registered to a mail group.
Mail menu screen (P137) "Mail setting"
"Mail group"
Mail group list screen
I[Add] Enter a mail group name
Select a registered mail group Move the cursor to a receiver eld C[Add] Select a registration method I[Done]
Sent msg. log : Select an address from Sent mails. Rcv. msg. log : Select an address from Received mails. Phonebook
: Select an address from the Phonebook. Direct input
: Enter an address directly. Mail Continue on the next page 169 Mail Group List Screen Sub Menu
Mail group list screen (P169) M[Menu]
Perform the following operations
[Delete group]
Delete the selected mail group.
[Add group]
Create a new mail group.
[Rename group]
Edit the selected mail group name.
[Write Mail]
Create i-mode mail addressed to the selected mail group.P138 Auto sort Sorting Mail Automatically to Folders Set conditions to automatically save mail in specied folders. Setting Auto Sort Rule Set conditions to sort mail to folders automatically. Create folders in "Inbox" or "Outbox" for sorting beforehand. Up to 30 sorting conditions can be saved. 170 Mail
Mail menu screen (P137) "Mail setting"
"Auto sort"
Auto sort screen eld
"Sort inbox"/"Sort outbox" Select a Sort rule
Select the Sorting criteria eld Perform the following operations
[Address]
Set mail address or phone numbers as a condition to sort.
"Direct input" Enter a mail address/phone number Select an address from Recent msg log, Recent dial log, or Phonebook.P139
[Phonebook Group]
Set a phonebook group as a condition to sort.
[Subject]
Set mail subject as a condition to sort.
Select the Folder to sort into eld Select a folder to sort into I[Done]
Note To edit the sorting condition, select a sorting condition to edit and set a rule again. The same sorting conditions as ones set to another folder cannot be set. When setting a mail address as a sorting condition, the domain name (the string after @) should be included. For example, when setting from the Sent message log, or the Received message log, if the mail is exchanged based on their phone numbers, the address does not include the domain name. In this case, the mail address is not recognized as a sorting condition. When setting a sorting condition to SMS, enter a phone number for "Address". You cannot set "Phonebook Group"/"Subject" as a sorting condition. Re-sorting Mail Re-sort saved mail according to a sorting condition.
"Inbox"/"Outbox"
Auto sort screen (P170) "Re-sort"
Mark folders to re-sort I[Done] "Yes"
Press M[SelAll] to select all. Deleting Auto Sort Rule
Auto sort screen (P170) "Sort inbox"/"Sort outbox" Move the cursor to the Sort rule eld M[Menu] Perform the following operations
[Delete]
Delete one Delete selected : Select and delete the sorting rules.
: Delete the selected sorting rule. Mark sorting rules to delete I[Done]
Press M[SelAll] to select all. Delete all
: Delete all sorting rules. Re-ordering Auto Sort Rule The execution priority of the auto sort rule follows the display sequence of the rules on the screen. Re-ordering the auto sort rules changes the execution priority. outbox"
Auto sort screen (P170) "Sort inbox"/"Sort
Move the cursor to the Sort rule eld to re-
order I[Reorder] Use H to move a sort rule C[Select]
Mail Continue on the next page 171 Edit Editing Header/Signature/Quotation
Mail menu screen (P137) "Mail setting"
"Edit" Perform the following operations
[Edit header]
Set a header to be inserted to i-mode mail text. C[Edit] Enter a header
[Edit signature]
Set a signature to be inserted to i-mode mail text. C[Edit] Enter a signature
[Edit quotation]
Set a symbol indicating that a text is quoted from received mail when replying with quoting. C[Select] Enter a quotation mark I[Done]
[Auto attach]
Set whether to automatically attach a header or signature when composing i-mode mail. Mark items to be attached I[Done]
Others Conguring Other Settings
Mail menu screen (P137) "Mail setting"
"Others" Perform the following operations
[Check settings]
Check the contents set in "Mail setting".
[Reset settings]
Reset the contents set in "Mail setting" to the default. Enter the Terminal security code "Yes"
Receive Message When You Receive Message When the FOMA terminal is in service area, MessageR/F is sent automatically from the i-mode center. When MessageR/F arrives, the display, ring tone, or vibration noties you of new messages. Up to 100 MessageR/F can be saved respectively. However, the number of savable messages varies depending on the message size. Viewing New Message When MessageR/F arrives, the latest message appears automatically.
"Auto-display setting" can be congured to allow the detail screen to automatically open after receiving a MessageR/F.P173
Automatically receive MessageR/F when it arrives After receiving MessageR/F, the Receive results screen is displayed. The previous screen returns if no operation is performed for approximately 30 seconds. 172 Mail Auto-display setting Displaying Message Automatically Set automatic display method of MessageR/F.
i-mode menu screen (P182) "i-mode setting"
"Image&Eect set." "Auto-display setting"
Perform the following operations MessageR preferred : Display MessageR automatically when MessageR and MessageF arrive simultaneously. MessageR only MessageF preferred : Display MessageF automatically
: Display only MessageR automatically. MessageF only Auto-display OFF when MessageR and MessageF arrive simultaneously.
: Display only MessageF automatically.
: Do not display MessageR/F automatically. Melody auto play Playing a Melody Automatically when Message is Displayed Set whether to automatically play a melody when MessageR/F is displayed.
i-mode menu screen (P182) "i-mode setting"
"Image&Eect set." "Melody auto play"
Switch between ON and OFF each time "Melody auto play" is selected.
, or Check new messages Checking New Message MessageR/F that was not received because the FOMA terminal was out of service area is stored at the i-mode center, and Checking new messages downloads the stored MessageR/F. You cannot check new messages when the FOMA terminal is out of service area. Set items to check (mail and MessageR/F) in "Check new messages" (P168).
i-mode menu screen (P182) "Check new messages"
When checking is completed, the Check results screen appears. appears at the top on the screen.
"MessageR"/"MessageF"
Note Incoming MessageR/F is stored at the i-mode center when:
- Power is OFF
- A videophone call in progress
- Self mode is activated
- The FOMA terminal is out of service area
- Omakase Lock is activated
- MessageR/F on the FOMA terminal is full Mail Continue on the next page 173 MessageR/MessageF Displaying New Message When MessageR/F arrives from the i-mode center, appears at the top of the screen. or
i-mode menu screen (P182) "MessageR/F"
"MessageR"/"MessageF"
T[Delete]: Delete the selected MessageR/F a Subject b Received date and time On the MessageR/F list screen, the messages received before today are displayed with date and ones received today are displayed with time. Ex.: MessageR list screen b Icons displayed on the MessageR/F list/detail screen Icon
Description Unread MessageR/F Read MessageR/F
* Icons other than above are the same as for Received mail.P157 MessageR/F List Screen Sub Menu
MessageR/F list screen (P174) Move the cursor to a message M[Menu] Perform the following operations
[Delete]
Delete one Delete selected : Select and delete MessageR/F.
: Delete the selected MessageR/F. Mark MessageR/F to delete I[Done] "Yes"
Press M[Menu] to select "Select all" or
"Deselect all".
: Delete all read MessageR/F. Enter the Terminal security code "Yes"
: Delete all MessageR/F. Enter the Terminal security code "Yes"
Select MessageR/F a Received date and time b Subject Delete all read Delete all Ex.: MessageR detail screen 174 Mail
[Protect]
Protect :
Protect one Protect selected : Select and protect MessageR/F.
: Protect the selected MessageR/F. Mark MessageR/F to protect I[Done]
Press M[Menu] to select "Select all" or
"Deselect all".
: Protect all MessageR/F.
: Unprotect the selected MessageR/F.
: Select and unprotect MessageR/F. The operation is the same as "Protect selected".
: Unprotect all MessageR/F. Protect all Clear :
Clear one Clear selected Clear all
[Sort]
Set conditions and sort MessageR/F.
[Filter]
Display only the MessageR/F that meet sorting conditions. Unread Read Protected : Display only the protected MessageR/F. All
: Display only the unread MessageR/F.
: Display only the read MessageR/F.
: Display all MessageR/F. MessageR/F Detail Screen Sub Menu
MessageR/F detail screen (P174) M[Menu]
Perform the following operations
[Delete]
Delete the displayed MessageR/F.
[Protect]
Protect or unprotect the displayed MessageR/F.
[Save]
No./addr. in body Inline image
: Save the mail address or phone numbers in the currently displayed MessageR/F to the Phonebook.P152
: Save or check information about an image inserted in the currently displayed MessageR/F. Background image : Save the background image used in the currently displayed MessageR/F.
[Attach le]
Save
: Save an attached le of the currently displayed Delete : Delete an attached le of the currently displayed MessageR/F. MessageR/F. Note
<Delete>
If there are unread MessageR/F, a conrmation for deletion appears. Select "Yes" to delete. Protected mail cannot be deleted.
<Protect>
Up to 100 MessageR/F can be protected respectively. Note
<Delete>
Protected message cannot be deleted.
<Protect>
Up to 100 MessageR/F can be protected respectively. Mail Continue on the next page 175 Compose/Send SMS Composing and Sending SMS You can send and receive SMS to/from terminals that use international carriers other than DOCOMO. Visit the DOCOMO International Services website for available countries and international carriers. You can send and receive SMS in Korean to/from terminals that support Korean. Use L-03B to send and receive international SMS in Korean to/from Korean-support terminals of Korea and other international carriers. Visit the DOCOMO International Services website for international carriers that support international SMS. The number of characters that can be sent depends on the situation of each recipient carrier. For details, contact recipient carriers. Switching input modes in SMS message to KoreanP178
Mail menu screen (P137) "SMS"
"Compose SMS"
g[Ph. book]: Select a recipient from the Phonebook.
Select screen eld "Direct input" Enter the Compose SMS phone number Up to 21 digits (including "+") can be entered. On the Phone number entry screen, press M[Menu] to select
"Int. call", "Select prex", or "Cancel". To cancel the entry, press I[Cancel]. The address can be selected from Sent message log or Received message log, or Phonebook.P139 176 Mail
Select eld Enter the message The number of characters that can be entered diers depending on the settings in "SMS input character".P178
I[Send]
Note For a destination of an international carrier other than DOCOMO, enter in the order of "+" (press 0 for 1+ seconds),
"Country Code", and "other party's mobile phone number". For the mobile phone number starting with "0", enter the phone number excluding "0". Numbers may be entered in the order of "010",
"Country Code", and the "other party's mobile phone number" (to reply to overseas SMS received, enter "010"). Characters may not be sent correctly on receiver's side depending on the signal strength, etc. When you send an SMS to a receiver who uses an international carrier and some of the characters you send are not supported by the carrier, those characters may not be displayed correctly. Even if you set "Caller ID notication" to "Not notify", your caller ID is sent to the other party. You cannot reply to SMS sent with unknown ID or from a public phone. When sending SMS, "Pictographs" and "Pictograph idioms" other than screen. SMS texts in Korean sent to a terminal which does not support Korean will not be displayed correctly on the terminal. are displayed as half-pitch space in receiver's and Compose SMS Screen Sub Menu
Compose SMS screen (P176) M[Menu]
Perform the following operations
[Send]
Send SMS.
[Save]
Save SMS being created or edited as an unsent message.
[Report request]
Set whether to request an SMS report when SMS is delivered.P178
[Validity period]
Set the period of time that a sent SMS can be kept undelivered at the SMS center.P178 Receive SMS When You Receive SMS Messages When the FOMA terminal is in service area, SMS is automatically received. Up to 1,000 received SMS messages including i-mode mail can be saved. However, the savable number depends on the amount of the data. appears at the top of
When SMS is received the screen When the reception is completed, the Receive results screen appears. The previous screen returns if no operation is performed for approximately 30 seconds. Selecting "SMS" opens the Inbox list screen. Until the detail screen of received SMS opens, and number of messages) appears in Stand-by. appears at the top of the screen
(the number indicates the Receive results screen Note When Stand-by i-ppli is set, the Receive results screen for SMS does not appear, and the ring tone and vibrator for SMS do not work. Viewing New SMS
Receive results screen (P177) "SMS"
Select an SMS message to display Select a folder Received mail detail screen Check new SMS Checking New SMS Messages SMS that could not be received for a reason such as because the FOMA terminal was out of service area, are stored at the SMS center. You can receive stored SMS by checking the SMS center. You cannot check new messages when the FOMA terminal is out of service area.
Mail menu screen (P137) "SMS"
"Check new SMS"
When the reception is completed, the Check results screen appears. Mail Continue on the next page 177 SMS Settings Setting SMS SMS Input Character Set the SMS input mode. SMS Report Request Set whether to request an SMS report after the SMS is delivered. If set to "ON", an SMS report indicating that the SMS has been delivered to the receiver will be sent to you.
Mail menu screen (P137) "Mail setting"
"SMS" "SMS report request" "ON"/"OFF"
Note An SMS report includes the sent time and the phone number of the receiver. SMS Validity Period Set the period of time that a sent SMS will be kept undelivered at the SMS center because the recipient terminal is out of service area, etc. If "0 day" is selected, sending the SMS message is retried after a while, then the message is deleted from the SMS center.
Mail menu screen (P137) "Mail setting"
"SMS" "SMS validity period" Select the period 178 Mail
Mail menu screen (P137) "Mail setting"
"SMS" "SMS input character" Select an item to set JP(70Chara)
: Enter Japanese text. Up to 70 characters can be entered. JP/KR(70Chara)
: Enter Japanese and Korean text. Up to 70 characters can be entered. English(160Chara) : Enter English text. Up to 160 characters can be entered. SMS Center
* You usually do not need to change this setting. Set the SMS center settings.
M "Settings" "International roaming"
"Network" "SMS center" Perform the following operations
[SMS Center]
DOCOMO : Set DOCOMO as the SMS center. Others
[Address]
When "Others" is selected for "SMS Center", enter connection address.
: Set a carrier other than DOCOMO as the SMS center.
[Type of number]
Set this option when "Others" is selected for "SMS Center". International
: If the SMS center phone number is for international calls, select this option. Unknown
: If you do not know whether the SMS center phone number is for international calls, select this option.
I[Done]
Mail Continue on the next page 179 i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel Using i-motion i-motion 201 Downloading i-motion from Sites i-motion Download 201 Using i-Channel i-Channel 203 Displaying i-Channel 203 Setting i-Channel i-Channel Setting 204 i-mode 182 Displaying the i-mode Menu i-mode Menu 182 Displaying a Site Displaying a Site 183 Viewing and Operating Sites 186 Subscribing to a Site in My Menu My Menu 187 188 Changing i-mode Password Change i-mode Password Displaying Internet Web Pages Internet Access 188 Saving Web Pages or Sites for Quick Access Bookmark 190 Saving Site Contents Screen memo 192 Downloading Images, Melodies etc. from Sites Downloading Data from Sites 194 Useful Functions of i-mode Using Phone To/Mail To/Web To/Media To/i-ppli To Function Phone To/Mail To/Web To/Media To/i-ppli To function 196 Setting i-mode Setting i-mode i-mode setting 197 Using Certicates Operating SSL Certicate SSL Certicate Info 200 181 i-mode i-mode makes use of the display of the FOMA terminal supporting i-mode (i-mode terminal) to use online services such as sites access, Internet access and i-mode mail. i-mode is a fee-based service requiring a separate subscription. For details about i-mode, see "Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode]
FOMA version". Before using i-mode Contents of sites and Internet web sites (web pages) are generally protected by copyright law. Data, such as text or images you download to the i-mode terminal from sites or web pages, can be used only for personal entertainment, and the data cannot be used, in whole or in part, as it is or after modication, for sale or redistribution, without the consent of the copyright holders. If you insert another UIM or turn the FOMA terminal power on without the UIM, depending on the model of the FOMA terminal, still images, moving pictures, melodies downloaded from sites, mail attachments (still images, moving pictures or melodies), screen memos, and MessageR/F cannot be viewed or played. When a le with UIM restrictions is set as the Stand-by display or ring tone, the setting will revert to its default if a dierent UIM is inserted or the terminal power is turned on without a UIM. i-mode Menu Displaying the i-mode Menu You can use i-mode functions from the i-mode menu.
Stand-by display I i-mode menu screen
Perform the following operations
[iMenu]
Connect to the i-mode center.P183
[Bookmark]
Display the Bookmark folder list screen.P190
[Screen memo]
Display the Screen memo list screen.P193
[Last URL]
Open the last viewed i-mode site or web page.P185
[Go to location]
Enter a URL to connect to the Internet.P188
[i-Channel]
Display the i-Channel menu screen.P204 182 i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel
Select an item (link) I[Reload]: If the current site is updated, reload the page. g[]: Scroll the screen up. T[]: Scroll the screen down. P: Exit i-mode. Select "Yes". Note When a number appears in front of a link item, press the corresponding dial key to access the linked site. Some sites may not be possible to connect. Some sites may require "Phone/Terminal and UIM ID" to be sent in order to gain access. The "Phone/Terminal and UIM ID" is sent to the IP (Information Provider) so that the IP can recognize you and provide customized information or judge whether the contents that the IP provides can be used on your mobile phone. The "Phone/
Terminal and UIM ID" is sent via the Internet to the IP and may be seen by a third party. This action does not reveal your address, age, or sex to the IP. Images that can be displayed are in JPEG, GIF, and SWF formats.
[MessageR/F]
Display a list of MessageR/F.P174
[Check new messages]
Check whether i-mode mail or MessageR/F is stored at the i-mode center.P173
[i-mode setting]
Congure the FOMA terminal i-mode functions.P197
[Full browser]
Display the Full browser menu screen.P206 Displaying a Site You can use various services oered by IP (Information Providers). Services vary depending on the IP (Information Providers). Some sites require a separate subscription.
i-mode menu screen (P182) "iMenu"
"English" "Menu List"
appears at the top of the screen during i-mode communication. C[Select]
Press I[Stop] to cancel a page download. i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel Continue on the next page 183
[Compose message]
Create i-mode mail with the URL of the displayed page pasted in the message text. Go to Step 2 in "Composing and Sending i-mode Mail"
(P138). Select from the following options when a linked item is selected. This page Link page
[Add to Phonebook]
Save a phone number or mail address displayed on the site to the Phonebook.P187
[Display]
Change char code : If characters are not displayed correctly,
: Paste the URL on the displayed page.
: Paste the URL of the link. Retry change the character encoding and display.
: Play Flash movie/an animation contained in the displayed page from the beginning.
[Settings]
Image display : Set whether to display images contained on the displayed page. Sound eect
: Set whether to play sound eects of the Flash movie contained in the displayed page. i-motion type : Specify the i-motion type to download.P202
[Switch to Full Browser]
Switch to Full browser.P213 Site Display Screen Sub Menu
While viewing a site M[Menu] Perform the following operations
[Bookmark]
Save : Save the URL of the displayed site as a Bookmark. Go to Step 2 in "Adding to Bookmark" (P190).
: Display the Screen memo list screen.P193
: Display the Bookmark folder list screen.P190 List
[Screen memo]
Save : Save the displayed page as a Screen memo.P192 List
[Save image]
Save images or background images contained in the displayed page. P194
[Show properties]
URL Page properties : Display the URL and title of the displayed page. Certicates
: If the displayed page supports SSL, the SSL
: Display the URL of the displayed page. certicate is displayed.
[Go to location]
Enter URL
: Enter a URL to access the web page. Go to Step 2 in
"Displaying Internet Web Pages" (P188). Home URL history : Select an entry in the URL history to access the web
: Connect to the URL set as "Home". page. Go to Step 2 in "Using URL History"(P189).
[Reload]
If the displayed site is updated, reload the page. 184 i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel Note
<Change char code>
If characters are not displayed correctly, repeat the steps. However, after the character code is changed 4 times, the default character encoding returns. Characters may not be displayed correctly even after repeatedly changing the encoding. The new character encoding is valid only for the displayed page.
<Image display>
Images may not be displayed correctly even when this option is set to "ON". In this case, appears. Downloading an SSL page The screen shown on the right appears when you access an SSL site. When accessed, the SSL page opens and appears on the top of the screen. Note If the SSL certicate has already expired or the site does not support SSL, a warning indicating that this site may not be secure may appear. To connect, select "Yes". However, note that your personal information (credit card number or contact address) may not be sent safely. Last URL Opening the Last Viewed Web Page After i-mode is terminated, the URL of the last opened page is saved in "Last URL". You can re-connect to the last accessed page using Last URL.
i-mode menu screen (P182) "Last URL"
I[Connect]
Returning to a normal site The screen shown on the right appears when you return to a non-SSL site. Select "Yes" to return to a normal site, and disappears. i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel Continue on the next page 185 Viewing and Operating Sites This section describes basic operations on sites. Going Back to Previous Page/Going to Next Page The FOMA Terminal The FOMA terminal temporarily saves the displayed sites data in a cache. Data saved in the cache can be displayed, without revisiting the site, by using J. However, communication is established if the data is larger than the cache size, or if the site requires the latest information always be loaded. Characters or settings entered at the site will not be stored in the cache. Terminating i-mode deletes data from the cache. Example: When pages are displayed in the order of Screen
"A" "B" "C" "B" "D"
If the pages are opened in the order "A""B""C", then returning to
"B", and opening "D", "C" is deleted from the cache. Pressing J displays "B""D". Note Touch operation is not available on sites which use Flash movies. Operation on sites may dier when a Flash movie is displayed. Selecting Links or Items You may need to perform operations using the following items while connecting to i-mode. For details, see "Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode] FOMA version". Name Radio button Display example
(Not selected) Details Select only 1 item.
(Selected)
(Not selected)
(Selected) Check box Text box Pull down menu Select multiple items. Enter text. Select a text box to display the text entry screen. Select an item from an option list. Click pull-down menu to display the option list. Display order of pages The order when displaying the previous page from Screen "D"
186 i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel Note
<Text box>
Perform the following operations to quote and enter information saved in the FOMA terminal, such as Phonebook entries, your own number, or data scanned with the bar code reader. M[Menu] "Quote" "Phonebook"/"Own number"/"Bar code"
Displaying Flash Movies The FOMA terminal supports Flash movies, an animation technology using images and sounds. You can access sites that provide various kinds of animations. You can also download a Flash movie and set it for the Stand-by display. Note Even if a Flash movie is displayed, the animation may not work correctly. Some Flash movies use data about your FOMA terminal. To allow Flash movies to use the data, set "Use phone info." to
"ON". If the Flash movie contains audio, it will be played at the volume set for "Incoming call". To mute sound eects, set "Sound eect" to "OFF".P198 If you play a Flash movie with vibration set, the FOMA terminal vibrates regardless of "Vibrator" (P102) settings on the FOMA terminal. Flash movies are not displayed if "Images" is set to "OFF". Flash movies which are saved in Data Box, microSD card, or Screen memo may appear dierently depending on the saved part. Flash sound eect or vibration does not work if they are set to the Stand-by display/incoming call screen, etc. Adding a Mail Address/Phone Number to Phonebook You can save a phone number or mail address displayed at a site to the Phonebook.
While viewing a site Move the cursor to a phone number/mail address M[Menu]
"Add to Phonebook" "Yes"
Go to Step 2 in "Adding Phonebook Entries from Redial/Received Calls etc." (P89). My Menu Subscribing to a Site in My Menu Frequently accessed sites can be saved in My Menu for quick access. Up to 45 entries can be saved in My Menu. Some sites cannot be saved in My Menu.
Display a site to save " (Save in My Menu)"
Item names may vary depending on the site.
Select i-mode password text box Enter the i-mode password " (OK)"
The entered i-mode password is masked by asterisks "". i-mode passwordP188 Note When you subscribe to a fee-based site in "Menu List", the site is automatically added to My Menu. i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel Continue on the next page 187 Note If you forget the i-mode password, you need to bring a picture ID such as your driver's license to the docomo Shop to have the i-mode password reset to "0000". Internet Access Displaying Internet Web Pages You can view a web page by entering its URL. Use half-pitch alphanumeric characters and symbols to enter a URL. i-mode menu screen (P182) "Go to location"
"Enter URL"
Enter the URL Up to 2,033 half-pitch characters can be entered. Note Web pages that do not support i-mode may not be displayed correctly. When the same URL as a history entry is accessed, the old URL is overwritten and the entry is displayed at the top of the URL history as the latest URL. Accessing a Site from My Menu
i-mode menu screen (P182) "iMenu"
"English" "My Menu" Select the site to access Change i-mode Password Changing i-mode Password
"i-mode Password" (4 digits) is required to save to/delete from My Menu, subscribe to/unsubscribe from message services or fee-based i-mode sites, or congure mail settings. The password is set to "0000" by default. Change it to a number of your own choice for safety. Do not reveal your i-mode password to others.
i-mode menu screen (P182) "iMenu"
"English" "Options" "Change i-mode Password"
new i-mode password (4 digits) Enter the i-mode password (4 digits)
Select the "Current Password" text box
Select the "New Password" text box Enter a
Select the "New Password (Conrmation)"
text box Enter the new i-mode password
(4 digits)
"Select"
188 i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel Using URL History Up to 10 previously entered URLs are stored in the URL history. You can access a web page by using the URL history.
i-mode menu screen (P182) "Go to location"
"URL history"
URL history list screen
Select the URL to access Note If more than 10 URLs are saved in the history, the oldest URL will be overwritten rst. The visited URL is displayed at the top of the URL history. URL History List Screen Sub Menu
URL history list screen (P189) Move the cursor to a URL history entry M[Menu]
Perform the following operations
[Connect]
Connect to the selected site in the URL history.
[Edit URL]
Edit and connect to the URL of the selected history. Edit URL C[Set]
[Delete]
Delete one Del. selected : Select and delete entries in the URL history. Mark the URL history entries to delete I[Delete] "Yes"
Press M[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.
: Delete a selected URL history entry. Delete all
: Delete all entries in the URL history. Enter the Terminal security code "Yes"
[Compose message]
Create i-mode mail with the URL of the selected history entry pasted in the message text. Go to Step 2 in "Composing and Sending i-mode Mail" (P138). i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel Continue on the next page 189 Accessing a Homepage/Site from Bookmark
i-mode menu screen (P182) "Bookmark"
I[Add]: Add a folder. Up to 16 full-pitch or 32 half-pitch characters can be entered for a folder name. g[Edit]: Edit the folder name of the selected user-dened folder. Bookmark folder list screen Icons displayed on the Bookmark folder list screen Icon
(Gray)
(Yellow) Description
"Bookmark" (pre-installed folder) User-dened folder Bookmark Saving Web Pages or Sites for Quick Access Save frequently accessed sites or web pages in Bookmark to quickly display the pages. Adding to Bookmark Up to 100 URLs can be saved in the Bookmark folders.
"Save"
While viewing a site M[Menu] "Bookmark"
C[Select] Edit a title C[Set]
I[Add] Select a destination folder If there is already the same URL saved, a conrmation to overwrite appears. Select "Yes". Note Up to 256 half-pitch characters can be entered for a URL saved as a Bookmark. Up to 12 full-pitch or 24 half-pitch characters can be saved for a Bookmark title. If the maximum number of Bookmarks has been saved, a conrmation whether to select items to delete appears. To select, "Yes" select a folder select Bookmark to delete select a destination folder. 190 i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel
Select a folder I[URL]: Display the URL. g[Edit]: Edit the title. Bookmark list screen
Select the Bookmark URL to access Bookmark Folder List Screen Sub Menu
Bookmark folder list screen (P190) Move the cursor to a folder M[Menu] Perform the following operations
[Manage folder]
Create folder
: Add a folder. Up to 16 full-pitch or 32 half-pitch characters can be entered for a folder name. Rename folder : Edit the selected folder name. Sort folder
[Delete]
Delete one : Delete the selected folder.
: Sort the selected folder. Enter the Terminal security code "Yes"
Delete all
: Delete all Bookmarks. Enter the Terminal security code "Yes"
[Send all Ir data]
Send all Bookmarks via infrared communication. Enter the Terminal security code Enter the authentication password "Yes"
[Copy all microSD]
Copy all Bookmarks to a microSD card. Enter the Terminal security code "Yes"
[Memory status]
Display the number of saved Bookmarks in the entire folder. Note
<Rename folder/Sort folder/Delete one>
The pre-installed "Bookmark" folder cannot be renamed, moved, or deleted.
<Delete one>
If there is a bookmark in the folder, a conrmation to delete appears. Select "Yes" to delete in the entire folder. Bookmark List Screen Sub Menu
Bookmark list screen (P191) Move the cursor to a bookmark M[Menu] Perform the following operations
[Connect]
Connect to the selected Bookmark site.
[Edit title]
Edit the title or URL of the selected Bookmark. Edit the title or URL C[Set]
i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel Continue on the next page Continued on next page 191
[Move]
Move this Move selected : Select and move Bookmarks.
: Move the selected Bookmark to another folder. Mark the Bookmarks to move I[Move]
Select a destination folder Press M[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.
: Move all Bookmarks in the folder to another folder. Move all
[Delete]
Delete one Del. selected Delete all
: Delete the selected Bookmark.
: Select and delete Bookmarks. Mark the Bookmarks to delete I[Delete]
"Yes"
Press M[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.
: Delete all Bookmarks. Enter the Terminal security code "Yes"
[URL Info]
Display the URL of the selected Bookmark.
[Copy URL]
Copy the URL of the selected Bookmark.
[Compose message]
Create i-mode mail with the selected Bookmark attached. Go to Step 2 in "Composing and Sending i-mode Mail" (P138).
[Ir exchange]
Send Send all
: Send the selected Bookmark via infrared communication.
: Send all bookmarks in the folder via infrared communication. Enter the Terminal security code Enter the authentication password "Yes"
192 i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel
[Copy microSD]
Copy one : Copy selected Bookmark to microSD card. Copy all
: Copy all Bookmarks in the folder to microSD card. Enter the Terminal security code "Yes"
[Memory status]
Display the number of saved Bookmarks in the folder. Screen memo Saving Site Contents You can save the displayed page as a Screen memo. Pages saved as Screen memo can be opened without connecting to i-mode. Saving Screen Memos Up to 50 Screen memos can be saved. However, the actual number of savable pages may be reduced depending on the saved data size. Up to approximately 100KB per page can be saved.
While viewing a site M[Menu] "Screen memo" "Save" "Yes"
Note If the maximum number of Screen memos have already been saved, a conrmation whether to select a screen memo to delete appears. To select, "Yes" select a screen memo to delete. Viewing Screen Memos
i-mode menu screen (P182) "Screen memo"
I[Delete]: Delete the selected Screen memo. T[URL]: Display the URL. Screen memo list screen
Select the Screen memo to display The Screen memo detail screen is displayed. Note The page saved as a Screen memo has the information at the time it was saved. The Screen memo may not contain the latest information. Screen Memo List Screen Sub Menu
Screen memo list screen Move the cursor to the Screen memo M[Menu] Perform the following operations
[Display]
Display the selected Screen memo.
[Edit title]
Edit the title of the selected Screen memo. Up to 12 full-pitch or 24 half-pitch characters can be entered for a title.
[Delete]
Delete one Del. selected
: Delete the selected Screen memo.
: Select and delete Screen memos. Mark the Screen memos to delete I[Delete] "Yes"
Press M[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all. Delete all
: Delete all Screen memos. Enter the Terminal security code "Yes"
[URL Info]
Display the URL of the selected Screen memo.
[Protect on/o]
One ON/OFF memo.
: Disable/Enable protection for the selected Screen Select ON/OFF: Select and protect or unprotect a Screen memo. Mark Screen memos to protect I[Done]
Press M[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all. Unprotect all
: Unprotect all Screen memos. Enter the Terminal security code
[Memory status]
Display the number of Screen memos. i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel Continue on the next page 193 Screen Memo Detail Screen Sub Menu
Screen memo detail screen M[Menu]
Perform the following operations
[Save image]
Save an image or background image contained in the current Screen memo. Go to Step 2 in "Downloading Images from Sites or Screen Memos" (P195).
[Show properties]
URL Page properties : Display the title and the URL of the displayed
: Display the URL of the displayed Screen memo. Screen memo. Certicates
: If the displayed Screen memo supports SSL, the SSL certicate is displayed.
[Add to Phonebook]
Save a phone number or mail address on the site to the Phonebook. P187
[Retry]
Play a Flash movie or an animation contained in the Screen memo from the beginning.
[Sound eect]
Set whether to play sound eects of the Flash movie contained in the displayed Screen memo. ON : Play the Flash movie sound eects. OFF : Do not play the Flash movie sound eects.
[Edit title]
Edit the title of the displayed Screen memo. Up to 12 full-pitch or 24 half-pitch characters can be entered for a title.
[Delete]
Delete the displayed Screen memo.
[Protect ON/OFF]
Protect or unprotect the displayed Screen memo. 194 i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel Note
<Delete>
Protected Screen memos cannot be deleted. Unprotect them before deleting.
<Protect ON/OFF>
Up to 10 Screen memos can be protected. The number of protectable Screen memos may vary depending on the data size. Downloading Data from Sites You can download les or data such as images or melodies from sites and save them to the FOMA terminal or microSD card. Savable data (le) type and maximum savable size per le are as follows:
- Image (JPEG, GIF, or SWF format), i-melody, template: 100KB
- Kisekae Tool: 2MB
- Dictionary: 32KB Save image Downloading Images from Sites or Screen Memos Save images on the displayed site or contained in Screen memo to the FOMA terminal or a microSD card. Obtained images are saved in the "i-mode" folder in "My picture" of
"Data Box" or microSD card. Example: To save the image displayed on a site image"
While viewing a site M[Menu] "Save
"Select image" Select an image to save b To save the background image from a site Select "Save backgnd". Image les in JPEG, GIF, or Progressive JPEG* formats cannot be displayed after they are saved with the size (pixels) exceeding the following. However, they can be output to external devices such as by attaching to mail.
- JPEG or Progressive JPEG image les that exceed 2592 1944 dots
- GIF image les that exceed 800600 dots
* Progressive JPEG is an image format that is used on the Internet. The image looks coarse at the beginning of the download and the image sharpness improves as the download progresses. A savable image is framed by a dotted border.
"Yes"
Further select the destination when a microSD card is inserted on the FOMA terminal. However, images in SWF format is automatically saved to the FOMA terminal. If you saved the image on the FOMA terminal, a conrmation appears asking whether to set the saved image as Stand-by display. Select "Yes" to set it. Note Images cannot be saved if "Images" is set to "OFF". Some images saved on the FOMA terminal may not be displayed properly even if they are displayed on the site. Some obtained images may not be displayed correctly. Downloading Data from a Site Savable data type and the saving destination are as follows. Data (le) type i-melody Template Kisekae Tool Dictionary Destination
"i-mode" folder in "Melody" of "Data Box" or microSD card
"Template" in Mail menu (P144)
"i-mode" folder in "Kisekae Tool" of "Data Box"
"Download dictionary" (P389)
While viewing a site Select data When download completes, a conrmation appears. i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel Continue on the next page Continued on next page 195
"Save"
To cancel saving, select "Back". You can check data by selecting "View", "Play", or "Preview"
depending on the data type. b To save i-melody Further select the destination if a microSD card is inserted on the FOMA terminal. b To save a template Select "Save" change the le name "Yes". b To save a dictionary Select the destination. Note i-melody Download may not be possible depending on the site. Some downloaded melodies may not be played correctly. In some downloaded melodies, playback part may be specied. Those melodies will be played entirely at playback, however, when the melody is set for a ring tone etc., only the specied part is played.
<Template>
When downloading templates, select "Compose mail" to create Deco-mail using downloaded template. Dictionary Using downloaded dictionariesP389 Phone To/Mail To/Web To/Media To/i-ppli To function Using Phone To/Mail To/Web To/ Media To/i-ppli To Function When a phone number, mail address or URL is highlighted on a site or in mail, you can use it to easily make a call, send i-mode mail, or access the web page. Also, when 1Seg information is highlighted, you can watch 1Seg or set timer for starting 1Seg. Phone To, AV Phone To, Mail To, Web To, or Media To function in mail sent from a PC may not be available. Phone To/AV Phone To Function Make a voice call (Phone To)/videophone call (AV Phone To) to the highlighted phone number on a site or in mail.
Select a phone number Perform the following operations Voice call Video call SMS Add phonebook Copy
: Make a voice call.
: Make a videophone call.
: Create an SMS message addressed to the selected phone number.
: Add the selected phone number to the Phonebook. Go to Step 2 in "Adding Phonebook Entries from Redial/Received Calls etc."
(P88).
: Copy the selected phone number. 196 i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel Note The Phone To/AV Phone To function may not be available depending on the site. For mail, the order of displayed items varies. Mail To Function You can send a mail to an i-mode mail address highlighted on a site page or in mail.
Select a mail address Go to Step 3 in "Composing and Sending i-mode Mail" (P138). Note The Mail To function may not be available depending on the site. i-ppli To Function You can start i-ppli from a URL highlighted on a site or in i-mode mail. If "Set i-ppli To" (P285) or "Mail i-ppli To" in "Set i-ppli To" is not marked, the i-ppli will not start.
Select i-ppli information "Yes"
Note Some i-ppli, which immediately start directly from the site using the i-ppli To function, may not be saved. Web To Function Access a URL highlighted on a site or in mail.
Select a URL For mail, further press C[Connect]. Note The Web To function may not be available depending on the site. The appearance of the URL varies depending on the site. The Web To function may be available using a highlighted item other than a URL. Media To Function You can watch 1Seg or set timer for starting 1Seg.
Select 1Seg information "Yes"
Note The Media To function may not be available when other functions are running. i-mode setting Setting i-mode Set functions of i-mode or MessageR/F. Communication Conguring Communication Settings
i-mode menu screen (P182) "i-mode setting"
"Communication" Perform the following operations
[Connection timeout]
Set the timeout duration until the connection is automatically terminated if there is no response due to network trac.P199
[Check new messages]
Specify request items when using "Check new messages". Mark the items to check I[Done]
i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel Continue on the next page 197 Image&Eect set. Conguring Image and Eect Settings
i-mode menu screen (P182) "i-mode setting"
"Image&Eect set." Perform the following operations
[Images]
Set whether to display images or Flash movies contained on sites or in Screen memos.
[Sound eect]
Set whether to play sound eects of Flash movies contained on sites or in Screen memos.
[Font size]
Set the font size for sites or Screen memos.
[Scroll]
Set the number of lines to scroll with each press of H on sites or Screen memos.
[Use phone info.]
When a Flash movie is displayed on a site or in a Screen memo, information saved on the FOMA terminal may be required. Set whether to use the information from the FOMA terminal then.
[Auto-display setting]
Set how MessageR/F is displayed automatically.P173
[Melody auto play]
Set whether to automatically play a melody when MessageR/F is displayed.P173 198 i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel appears. Note
<Images>
Images may not be displayed correctly even when "Images" is set to "ON". In this case,
<Sound eect>
Even if "Sound eect" is set to "ON", some sound eects may not sound depending on the Flash movie.
<Use phone info.>
If set to "ON", the battery level, signal strength, Date & Time, Ring Volume, Language, and terminal model information may be sent to IP (Information Provider) via the Internet, and a third party may intercept the information. Home Conguring Home Setting Set the home URL by selecting "Home" from the Site display screen sub menu. i-mode menu screen (P182) "i-mode setting"
"Home"
Select "Enable" "http://" eld Enter the URL I[Done]
Note If set to "Disable", selecting "Home" does not open the specied page. The URL entered in the "http://" eld will remain intact. Others Conguring Other Settings Host selection Changing Access Point from i-mode
i-mode menu screen (P182) "i-mode setting"
"Others" Perform the following operations
* If you use the DOCOMO i-mode service, changing the access point is not required.
[Check settings]
Check the options set in "i-mode setting".
[Reset settings]
Reset the options set in "i-mode setting" to the default. Enter the Terminal security code "Yes"
Connection timeout Setting Connection Timeout Set the timeout duration until the connection is automatically terminated if there is no response due to network trac.
i-mode menu screen (P182) "i-mode setting"
"Communication" "Connection timeout"
"60 seconds"/"90 seconds"/"Unlimited"
If set to "Unlimited", the connection will not be automatically terminated. Note Even if set to "Unlimited", the connection attempt may be terminated depending on the signal strength etc. Set an Access Point Name (APN) used when you use services other than i-mode (DOCOMO). i-mode and i-mode mail become unavailable when you connect to an APN other than DOCOMO. Adding Access Points
M "Settings" "International roaming"
"Network" "Host selection"
Host selection screen
I[Add] Enter the Terminal security code Perform the following operations
[Host name]
Enter the access point name within 15 full-pitch or 30 half-pitch characters.
[Host number]
Enter the number of the access point within 99 half-pitch alphanumeric characters.
[Host address]
Enter the access point address within 30 half-pitch alphanumeric characters. i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel Continue on the next page Continued on next page 199
[Host address 2]
Enter the access point address for i-Channel within 30 half-pitch alphanumeric characters.
I[Done]
Changing Access Point
Host selection screen (P199) Select the access point to change Host Selection Screen Sub Menu
Host selection screen (P199) Move the cursor to the access point M[Menu]
Perform the following operations Not available while "i-mode" is selected.
[Add new]
Add a new access point.P199
[Edit]
Edit the access point settings. Enter the Terminal security code Edit the access point settings I[Done]
[Delete]
Delete the selected access point.
"Yes" Enter the Terminal security code
[View]
Display the selected access point settings. C[Edit]: Edit the access point settings. Note When an access point is changed, the i-Channel ticker does not appear. When the information is auto-updated or you download the latest information by pressing Q in Stand-by, the ticker will appear automatically. If the set access point is deleted, "imode" will be set as the default host. SSL Certicate Info Operating SSL Certicate You can view an SSL certicate, or set a certicate valid or invalid.
i-mode menu screen (P182) "i-mode setting"
"Certicates"
C[Select]: Display the contents of the selected certicate.
Move the cursor to the certicate I[Invalid/Valid]
Press M[Menu] and select "Certicate Info" or "Valid/Invalid". Icon Description Valid certicate Invalid certicate Certicates used for SSL communication These certicates are issued by an authentication company, and are saved on the FOMA terminal by default. 200 i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel i-motion i-motion is a moving picture with video and sound. They can be obtained from i-motion sites, played, saved, and set as the Stand-by display or a ring tone, etc. i-motion Download Downloading i-motion from Sites Up to 2,000 i-motion can be saved. However, the savable number depends on the amount of the data. Downloaded i-motion is saved in the "i-mode" folder in "i-motion" of
"Data Box" or microSD card. i-motion Types There are 2 types of i-motion. b Standard type There are 2 formats of the Standard type. a The format in which an i-motion can be played after download (Up to10MB) b The format in which an i-motion can be played during the download (Up to 10MB) Some standard type i-motion cannot be saved. b Streaming type This type allows you to play i-motion while downloading data. Up to 10MB of i-motion can be played. The data is deleted after playback. It cannot be saved on the FOMA terminal. Note i-motion that can be downloaded and played are in MP4 (Mobile MP4) format. i-motion in ASF format cannot be downloaded or played.
While viewing a site Select i-motion When "Auto-replay setting" is set to "ON", i-motion is played automatically after downloaded. Operations during playbackP308 b Streaming-type i-motion The Playback conrmation screen appears. Select "Yes" to play i-motion during the download. When "i-motion type" is set to "Standard type", you cannot play i-motion. Switch to "Std/Streaming", then download i-motion again.P202
After download, Q "Save"
: Play downloaded i-motion. Play File property : Display information about downloaded i-motion. Back
: Return to the Site display screen without saving i-motion. Further select the destination when a microSD card is inserted on the FOMA terminal. i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel Continue on the next page Continued on next page 201 Note Depending on the connected site or i-motion, some i-motion may not be downloaded or played during the download. If you play i-motion while downloading data, i-motion may stop playing or the image may become distorted due to signal strength etc. Some i-motion cannot be saved on the FOMA terminal. Some i-motion have playback restrictions. i-motion with playback count. playback period or playback limit. i-motion which has restricted term for playback cannot be played before/after the term. Some downloaded i-motion may not be played correctly. appears for appears for i-motion with When a Link is Set in Ticker When a ticker is set in i-motion, the ticker is displayed during playback. If a phone number, a mail address, or a URL is set in the ticker, you can use Phone To, AV Phone To, Mail To, or Web To functions after the i-motion playback is nished. i-motion playback ends Select an item
Auto-replay setting Setting whether to Play i-motion Automatically Set whether to play i-motion automatically when downloading from a site or mail.
i-mode menu screen (P182) "i-mode setting"
"i-motion setting" "Auto-replay setting"
Switch between ON and OFF each time "Auto-replay setting" is selected. i-motion type Specifying Type of Downloading i-motion Set the type of the new i-motion to download from a site.
i-mode menu screen (P182) "i-mode setting"
"i-motion setting" "i-motion type" Select a type Standard type : Download only standard-type i-motion. Std/Streaming : Download standard or streaming-type i-motion. Note To download streaming-type i-motion, "Std/Streaming" must be set. 202 i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel i-Channel i-Channel is a service which provides information such as news or weather forecasts to i-Channel compatible terminals. Automatically received latest information is displayed and runs as a ticker on the Stand-by display. Also, pressing Q displays the latest information in the channel list. (Display channel listP203) i-Channel is a fee-based service requiring a separate subscription
(The i-mode contract is required for this subscription). i-Channel has 2 types of channel: "Basic channels" provided by DOCOMO and "Favorite channels" provided by IP
(Information Provider). Packet communication charge does not apply to automatic update of information delivered to
"Basic channels". You can register your favorite channels on
"Favorite channels". For this channel, packet communication charge applies for automatic update of information. Note that packet communication charges apply to view detailed information for both channels. To use International roaming service, packet communication charges apply for both automatic updating and viewing detailed information. For details about i-Channel, see "Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode]
FOMA version". The i-Channel service is provided in Japanese only. Displaying i-Channel If you subscribe to i-Channel, information appears as a ticker on the Stand-by display as the information is received. To automatically display the ticker, set "Ticker display" to "ON". P204 When Public mode (Drive mode) is set, the ticker is not displayed.
Stand-by display Q Q Ticker Ticker Channel list screen
Select a channel item Connect to the site and detailed information is displayed. L: Return to the Channel list screen. i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel Continue on the next page Continued on next page 203 i-Channel Setting Setting i-Channel You can set whether to display the ticker on the Stand-by display or to set the ticker display speed. Also you can delete all i-Channel information on the FOMA terminal.
Stand-by display I "i-Channel" Perform the following operations
[i-Channel list]
Display the Channel list screen.P203
[Ticker setting]
Ticker display display.
: Set whether to display a ticker on the Stand-by
: Set the ticker display speed.
: Set the ticker font size.
: Set the ticker font color. Ticker speed Font size Font color
[Reset i-Channel]
Delete i-Channel data downloaded on the FOMA terminal and restore Ticker setting to defaults. Note
<Ticker display>
If you unsubscribe the i-mode service before unsubscribing i-Channel, the "Ticker display" setting remains. blinks. Note While information is being received, Even when the information arrives, a ring tone does not sound nor does the terminal vibrate. The illumination does not light/
blink either. Information may not be received when the FOMA terminal power is turned o, while the FOMA terminal is out of service area, or when the signal reception is weak. Press Q in Stand-by to receive information, then the obtained information is displayed automatically as the ticker on the Stand-by display. Also, information may not be received if the default settings are kept. In this case, press Q in Stand-by to receive and automatically display the information as the ticker on the Stand-by display. In some conditions, information may be received only when a channel list is displayed. If you change the access point in "Host selection", the access point of i-Channel is also changed (normally, you do not need to change these settings). The ticker will not appear after i-Channel is unsubscribed. When i-motion is set to the Stand-by display, the ticker will not appear during playback. There may be a message notifying of failure to acquire channel information if:
- the i-Channel access point has been changed
- the UIM has been replaced Touch operation is not available on i-Channel screen. 204 i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel Full Browser Displaying Web Pages Designed for PC Full browser 206 Setting Full Browser Full Browser Settings 214 205 Full browser Displaying Web Pages Designed for PC With Full browser, FOMA terminal can display web pages designed for PC. Some pages may not be displayed correctly. Up to approximately 500KB per page can be displayed. Note that accessing web pages containing lots of images or performing communication with large amount of data such as data download makes communication charge high. For details about packet communication and billing plan, see "Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode] FOMA version". Displaying Full Browser Menu i-mode menu screen (P182) "Full browser"
Perform the following operations
[Home]
Display a web page which URL is set as "Home".
[Bookmark]
Display the Bookmark folder list screen.
[Last URL]
Display the last accessed web page.
[Go to location]
Input address URL history
: Enter a URL to access a web page.P207
: Select an entry in the URL history to access a web page. Go to Step 2 in "Using URL History"
(P189).
[Full Browser Settings]
Set Full browser functions.P214 Note SSL/TLS-supporting web pages can be displayed with Full browser. SSL/TLS are methods to protect privacy and communicate safely with authentication/encryption technologies. SSL/TLS pages prevent others from eavesdropping, spoong, and altering information during communication by exchanging encrypted data, and enable you to exchange your personal information such as credit card number and address safer. Full browser menu screen 206 Full Browser Displaying a Web Page by Entering URL
Full browser menu screen (P206) "Go to
"Input address" C[Select] Enter the URL location"
I[Connect]
When "Access Setting" (P214) of Full browser is set to "Not Use", the Access setting screen is displayed to conrm whether to use Full browser when activating Full browser. Selecting "Yes" sets the Access setting to "Use" and displays a web page. This setting is valid even after Full browser is quit. Some web pages may take a while to be displayed. Up to 2,033 half-pitch characters can be entered. During Full browser communication, the screen. To cancel the page retrieval while retrieving, press I[Stop]. Once a URL is input, you can use the URL history to open its web page by selecting on the Full browser menu screen (P206)
"Go to location" "URL history". For details, refer to "Using URL History" (P189) in i-mode section. To close a web page, press P "Yes". appears at the top of Note Some web pages automatically establish communication. When starting communication, a conrmation appears. Select a communication method on a conrmation screen. Yes (once)
: Connect this time only. Yes (permanently) No : Do not connect.
: After this, connect automatically without conrmation. Full Browser Screen XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX Displaying a web page
(vertical) Displaying a web page
(horizontal) a Display mode
: Displayed only in PC layout modeP215 b Key operations while viewing a web page Operation Description Scroll the screen to the direction of the key press H(In Keitai mode), K(In PC layout mode), F/E g[]*
T[]*
M[Menu]*
I[Action]*
C Dial keys, *, #* Shortcut OperationsP208
* Available only in a vertical screen. Scroll the screen up Scroll the screen down Display sub menu Display action menu Select a link Full Browser Continue on the next page 207 Changing operations assigned to shortcuts a While viewing a web page M[Menu] "Shortcut List"
The Shortcut list screen appears. b Move the cursor to a shortcut to change its assigned operation C[Edit] Move the cursor to an operation to assign C[Done]
Note Images that can be displayed are in JPEG, GIF, BMP, and PNG formats. The following functions are not supported.
- Displaying Flash movies - Plug-ins
- Saving Screen memo
- Phone To (AV Phone To)
- Playing sound When user certicate stored in FOMA terminal is required for SSL/TLS communication, certicate selection screen appears. Tilting the FOMA terminal to the left automatically switches to the horizontal screen. Shortcut Operations Some operations can be done directly by pressing dial keys while displaying a web page. The following operations are assigned to each key by default. The assigned operations can also be modied. b Shortcut operations Operation Description 1 (Zoom out) 2 (Scroll up) 3 (Zoom in) 4 (Scroll left) 5 (PagePilot) 6 (Scroll right) 7 (Back to previous page) 8 (Scroll down) 9 (Go to next page) 0 (Bookmark list)
* (Switch to the left widow) Minify the view Scroll up on the screen Magnify the view Scroll left on the screen Display the whole pageP210 Scroll right on the screen Display the previous page Scroll down on the screen Display the next page Display the list of saved Bookmarks Display the left window while displaying multiple windows.
# (Switch to the right widow) Display the right window while displaying multiple windows. 208 Full Browser Displaying a Framed Web Page A web page composed of multiple frames can be displayed.
Display a web page composed of multiple frames Frame page All frames screen
Select a frame to display as full frame To return to the All frames screen, press Q. Frame page Note For a web page composed of many frames, all frames may not be displayed. Displaying in Multiple Windows You can open multiple windows at a time and display those by switching. Up to 5 windows can be opened. The maximum number of window may not be opened depending on frame numbers or contents of the pages.
While viewing a web page M[Menu]
"Window Operat." "New Window" Perform the following operations
[Open]
Display the Bookmark folder list screen.
[Go to location]
Input address : Enter a URL to access a web page.P207 URL history
: Select an entry in the URL history to access a web page. Go to Step 2 in "Using URL History" (P189).
[Home]
Display a web page whose URL is set as "Home".
[Link]
Display a linked page Full frame screen Full Browser Continue on the next page Continued on next page 209
[Bookmark]
Register a web page as Bookmark or display the list screen of the Bookmark folder.
[Go to location]
Input address : Enter a URL to access a web page.P207 Home URL history
: Display a web page whose URL is set as "Home".
: Select an entry in the URL history to access a web page. Go to Step 2 in "Using URL History" (P189).
[Display]
Set display settings for web pages. Zoom :
Zoom In Zoom Out Zoom
: Magnify the view of the web page.
: Minify the view of the web page.
: Set zoom factor for web page display. Display Mode : Change display mode of a web page.P215 PagePilot
: Minify the whole view of the displayed web page and select a range to display. Move the cursor to the part to display C[Select]
All frames
: Display the All frames screen when the Full frame screen is displayed. Goto on Page : Display the top/end of the web page. Go to Top Go to End
: Go to the top of the displayed web page.
: Go to the end of the displayed web page. Note Tabs are displayed on the top of the screen. To switch windows, press M[Menu]
"Window Operat." "Change Window" select a window name to display. The tab of the displayed web page appears to the front. Tab XX XX XX X XXX XXX Operations in Full Browser The operations in Full browser is basically same as those on sites accessed from Go to location menu of i-mode (P186). Here describes dierent parts of the operation. Full Browser Screen Sub Menu
While viewing a web page M[Menu]
Perform the following operations
[Goto Page]
Back Forward
: Display the previously accessed web pages.
: When displaying web pages backwards, display next page of the displayed web page. Visit History : Access a web page by using the URL history. Home
[Reload]
Reload the displayed web page.
: Display a web page whose URL is set as "Home". 210 Full Browser Search Character code : Change character code of the displayed web
: Search text in the displayed web page. When the search text is found, the matched text is highlighted. Select the Search text eld Enter the text to search I[Done]
To search the exact match word only, mark
"Whole Words Only". To search a word distinguishing upper case from lower case, mark "Case Sensitive". To display search result in sequence, press M[Prev]/I[Next]. Press Q to quit the search. page. Every time you change the character code, the code switches in order of Shift-JIS EUC JIS UTF-8.
: Play GIF animation displayed from the beginning
: Display the title of the displayed web page. Play animation Title Info URL Info :
frame. URL Info : Display the URL of the displayed web page. To copy the URL, press M[Menu] "Copy". Link Info : Display the URL of the selected link. To copy the URL, press M[Menu] "Copy". SSL Info : Display the certicate of the web page.
[Window Operat.]
New Window Open as Back Open Link
: Open another web page loaded from the Open/Go to location/Home/Link in a new window.P209
: Open another web page loaded from the Open/Go to location/Home/Link in a background window. P209
: Display the selected link in a new window. If a moving picture is linked, a new window is closed and a moving picture application starts. Close Window Change Window : Select a web page from the list of pages
: Close the displayed web site. displayed in multi windows.
[Save Image]
Save images on a web page to the FOMA terminal or microSD card. Select an image to save "Yes"
If microSD card is inserted, further select save location.
[Text]
Text Copy
: Copy text on a web page. Select start point of a range including text to copy Select end point Select start point Select end point Press I[SelAll] to copy all text. Text Paste : Paste copied text to the selected text box. Full Browser Continue on the next page Continued on next page 211 Full Browser Screen Action Menu
While viewing a web page I[Action]
Perform the following operations
[Open Link]
Display a linked page
[Link Info]
Display the URL of selected link.
[Save Image]
Save the selected image to the FOMA terminal or microSD card. P211
[Text Paste]
Paste copied text to the selected text box.
[Zoom In]
Magnify the view of the web page.
[Zoom Out]
Minify the view of the web page.
[Display Mode]
Change display mode of a web page.P215
[Compose msg]
Create i-mode mail with the URL of the displayed web page in the message text. Go to Step 2 in "Composing and Sending i-mode Mail"
(P138). Select from the following options when a linked item is selected. This page : Paste the URL of the displayed web page. Link page : Paste the URL link on the selected web page.
[Setting]
Image display : Set whether to display images. Set as Home TLS
: Set the displayed web page as "Home".
: Set whether to use TLS. Normally, changing this setting is not necessary.
[Shortcut List]
Check operations assigned to the dial keys in list. The assigned operations can be modied as well.P208 Note For some web pages, characters may not appear correctly or their view may dier from the web pages displayed on PC. When characters appear incorrectly, "Character code" (P211) may x the problem. When no data is obtained for a web page due to communication error etc., may appear on the screen. In this case, reloading the web page (P210) may x the problem.
<Save Image>
Images that can be saved are in JPEG, GIF, BMP, PNG formats and up to 100KB. For BMP and PNG formats, images are automatically saved in
"OTHER" folder of microSD card. These images cannot be saved in the FOMA terminal. Images may not be saved depending on the site.
<Text>
In some pages, text cannot be copied. 212 Full Browser
[PagePilot]
Minify the whole view of the displayed web page and select a range to display.P210
[Go to Top]
Go to the top of the displayed web page.
[Go to End]
Go to the end of the displayed web page.
[Text Copy]
Copy text on a web page.P211 Note Some menu items may not appear depending on the operating condition. Uploading Images You can upload JPEG/GIF images saved in the FOMA terminal to a web page. Upload method varies depending on web pages. Follow the instructions on the screen. Note Up to 80KB of an image can be uploaded. However, when multiple images and characters are included, the maximum size is 100KB altogether. Uploading may not be available on some web pages. Images which are restricted to be transferred from the FOMA terminal cannot be uploaded. Bookmark Adding to Bookmark
While viewing a web page M[Menu]
Select the Title eld Edit a title I[Add]
"Bookmark" "Add"
Select the folder to save Note The operations available for Bookmark folder list or Bookmark list are the same as for i-mode.P190 Switching to Full Browser from i-mode You can switch i-mode view to Full browser. Some web pages may not appear or may not appear correctly. Note that the billing system for Full browser is dierent from the one for i-mode, and accessing web pages containing lots of images or performing communication with large amount of data such as data download makes communication charge high. For details about packet communication charges and billing plan, see "Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode] FOMA version".
While viewing an i-mode site M[Menu]
"Switch to Full Browser" "OK"
Full Browser Continue on the next page 213
[Referer Setting]
Set whether to send Referer (information that where a page is linked from) when accessing a web page by selecting a link. DOCOMO is not responsible if your information is passed to a third party by sending Referer.
[TLS]
TLS is a method to protect privacy and communicate safely with authentication/encryption technologies. Set whether to use TLS. Normally, changing this setting is not necessary. Note
<Access Setting>
If inserting another UIM, Access Setting becomes invalid.
<Cookie Setting>
If inserting another UIM, Cookie Setting becomes "Invalid". If changing the setting from "Invalid" to "Valid"/"Valid (notify)", and if UIM information does not match, the Terminal security code is required. Full Browser Settings Setting Full Browser Set browser functions. Communication Conguring Communication Settings
Full browser menu screen (P206) "Full Browser Settings" "Communication"
Perform the following operations
[Access Setting]
Check the information about using Full browser. When you use Full browser changing settings, please read the information in the Access Setting carefully.
[Cookie Setting]
Set whether to validate Cookie. Cookie is the scheme to store information such as user name, access date, or number of accesses in the FOMA terminal temporarily when accessing web pages and use those data when accessing the same page next time. DOCOMO is not responsible if your information is passed to a third party by validating Cookie. When selected "Valid (notify)", you can select the option from
"Sending", "Receiving", or "Sending/receiving".
[Delete Cookie]
Delete Cookie. Enter the Terminal security code "Yes"
214 Full Browser Image&Eect set. Conguring Image and Eect Settings
Full browser menu screen (P206) "Full Browser Settings" "Image&Eect set."
Perform the following operations
[Zoom]
Set zoom factor for a web page display.
[Display Mode Setting]
Set display method of a web page. PC layout mode : Display a web page in the same way as you view Keitai mode on PC. Scrolling up/down, or to the right/left is available.
: Display a web page t to the display width. Scrolling up and down is available.
[Set Image display]
Set whether to display images.
[Bookmark Display]
Set display method for saved Bookmark folder.
[Window Open Guard Setting]
Set the action when getting an instruction to open a new window from JavaScript on a web page. Valid Invalid : A conrmation appears when opening a new window.
[Script Setting]
Set whether to validate JavaScript. JavaScript is a program which works on web pages. Some web pages may not appear correctly with "Invalid" set.
: A new window does not open. Home URL Conguring the Home Setting
Full browser menu screen (P206)
"Full Browser Settings" "Home URL"
C[Select] Enter URL I[Done]
Up to 2,033 half-pitch characters can be entered. Others Conguring Other Settings
Full browser menu screen (P206) "Full Browser Settings" "Others" Perform the following operations
[Check Settings]
Display the list of Full browser settings.
[Reset Settings]
Reset the Full browser settings. Enter the Terminal security code "Yes"
Full Browser Continue on the next page 215 Camera Copyrights and Portrait Rights You have no right to copy, modify, or distribute contents such as text, image, music, or software downloaded from web sites on the Internet, or images captured with this product without permission from the copyright holder except when the copy or quote is for personal use that is allowed under copyright laws. Note that it may be prohibited to capture or record live performances or exhibitions even for personal use. Refrain from taking portraits of other people and uploading such portraits to web sites without their consent, as this violates portrait rights. Please be considerate of other people's privacy when capturing and sending pictures using camera-
equipped mobile phones. Before Using Camera 218 Capturing Still Images Photo-mode 222 Capturing Moving Pictures Movie-mode 227 Changing Settings for Shooting 230 Changing Camera Settings Camera settings 232 Using Bar Code Reader Bar code reader 234 217 Before Using Camera Notes for Capturing Images The camera employs high-precision technology, but some pixels or lines may seem brighter or darker than others. Also, when you capture images in places with insucient lighting, noises such as white lines increase. This is not a malfunction. Clean the lens with a soft cloth before capturing. If the lens is stained with ngerprints or oil, the captured image may be out of focus or blurred. Do not leave the FOMA terminal in a warm place or under a direct sunlight for a long period of time. The image or video to capture may deteriorate. If you capture under a uorescent light, mercury lamp, or sodium lamp ickering at high speed, ickering such as stripes may appear. The color tone of still images or moving pictures may vary depending on the capturing timing. Do not expose the lens to direct sunlight for a long period of time and do not point at the sun or a bright light directly. The image may become discolored or the camera may malfunction. Do not cover the lens with your nger, hair, or the strap when capturing. Capturing a fast moving object may result in an image slightly o from the image displayed on the screen at the time of capturing, or the image may be blurred. When the battery level is low, you may not be able to save captured still images or moving pictures. Check the battery level before using the camera. Captured still images or moving pictures may dier from the actual subjects in brightness or color tone. Even in Manner mode, the shutter tone sounds at a xed volume. The shutter tone sounds from the speaker even when a Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch (optional) is connected to the FOMA terminal. 218 Camera Using Camera You can use camera with the terminal closed or opened. This manual describes operations in horizontal capture mode
(in Turn View Style) as a priority. Also, you can select the Inner or the Outer camera, depending on the situation. b Outer camera Useful for taking pictures of scenery or other people. The screen output is similar to what you see (normal image). The Auto focus adjusts the focus of still image capturing with the Outer camera.P225 Outer camera Photo light/Light b Inner camera Useful for taking pictures of yourself. Inverted (mirrored) images are shown in the frame. Captured image can be saved as either mirrored image or normal image.P224 Inner Camera Note Photo light turns orange or blinks when capturing a still image/
moving picture. The light can only be used for the Outer camera. Capture Screen Components The meanings of marks (icons and others) on the Still image/
Moving picture capture screen are as follows:
Still image capture screen
(vertical capture mode) Still image capture screen
(horizontal capture mode) Moving picture capture screen
(horizontal capture mode) Camera Continue on the next page Continued on next page 219 QCIF (176144) Sub-QCIF (12896) Wallpaper (800480)
* Numbers in parentheses of still image les indicate as in horizontal capture mode. The right and left numbers switch when capturing in vertical capture mode. d QualityP233, P234 Super ne Fine Normal e White balance Auto Incandescent Sunny Fluorescent Cloudy f LightP222, P227 OFF When capturing Always ON AUTO g Shake reduction ON h Receiving mailP34 i Continuous modeP232 Auto Manual j Scene modeP232 Auto Night scene Set this mode when capturing in a dark place, etc. Portrait Landscape Sports Sunset Moving picture capture screen
(vertical capture mode) a Menu b Camera-modeP223, P228 Photo-mode Movie-mode Funny face shot c Image sizeP232, P233 5.1M (25601920) 3M (20481536) 2M (16001200) 1M (1280960) VGA (640480) (Outer camera) VGA (480640) (Inner camera) CIF (352288) QVGA (320240) 220 Camera k MacroP233 ON l Battery levelP50 m Auto timerP232 3sec 10sec 15sec n Memory in useP233, P234 Handset memory External memory (microSD card) o Number of available shotsP448, P469 p Focus frameP225 The frame color changes to indicate status when the Auto focus is in operation. q Zoom barP230 r Exit key Return to the previous screen. s Camera-mode Photo-mode Movie-mode Bar code reader Funny face shot Album t CameraSWP223, P227 u Light OFF When capturing Always ON AUTO v BrightnessP231 w Display key operation guide x CapturingP223 y Task statusP34 z Size restrictionP234 No restriction For mail long For mail short A TypeP234 Sound+Video B Total recordable time C Start recording buttonP227 D RecordingP228 Movie only Sound only Note In horizontal capture mode, items a, q to v, B, and C disappear in approximately 3 seconds after the Still image capture screen/Moving picture capture screen is displayed. Touch the screen to display. Camera Continue on the next page 221 Save Format of Still Images and Moving Pictures Display name of the le Still image le Moving picture le The year, month, date, hour, and minute at the time of capture are added automatically. Example: If taken at 10:10:10 on 2009/8/1 Photo-mode: "P2009_0801_101010"
Movie-mode: "V2009_0801_1010_X" (X is a sequential number)
* If memory in use is "External memory" (microSD card) and type is "Sound+Video" or "Movie only", the le is named as "MOLXXX" (XXX is a sequential number). If the type is "Sound only", the le is named as "MMFXXXX" (XXXX is a sequential number). Maximum le size Approx. 5.1MB QCIF: Approx. 58MB QVGA (320240) QCIF (176144) Sub-QCIF
(12896) Photo-mode Capturing Still Images Captured still images are saved in the "Camera" folder in "My picture" of "Data Box" on the FOMA terminal. To change the saving destination to a microSD card, set in "Memory in use" (P233).
Stand-by display G Still image capture screen Moving picture le MP4 (Mobile MP4) QVGA (320240) QCIF (176144) Sub-QCIF
(12896) File format Resolution*
JPEG Outer camera Inner camera Still image le 5.1M (25601920) 3M (20481536) 2M (16001200) 1M (1280960) VGA (640480) CIF (352288) QVGA (320240) QCIF (176144) Sub-QCIF (12896) Wallpaper
(800480) VGA (480640) CIF (352288) QVGA (320240) QCIF (176144) Sub-QCIF (12896) Encoding Format File Extension
* Numbers in parentheses of still image les indicate as in horizontal capture mode. The right and left numbers switch when capturing in vertical capture mode. Video: MPEG-4 Sound: AMR
.3gp
.jpg 222 Camera b Touch/Key operations on the Still image capture screen
(horizontal capture mode) Operation G Zoom bar, F/E
"Menu"
Description Shutter Zoom Display setting menu Exit Photo-mode
(Camera-mode) Change Camera-mode
(Switch camera) Switch between the Inner camera and the
(Light)
(Brightness) Outer camera Set lighting condition Display the Brightness adjustment bar b Key operations on the Still image capture screen (vertical capture mode) Operation C[Take], G J, F/E H 1, I[Mode]
M[Menu]
T[Light]
Q g[CameraSW]
0 2 3 4 Description Shutter Zoom Adjust brightness Change Camera-mode Display setting menu Set lighting condition Exit Photo-mode Switch between the Inner camera and the Outer camera Display key operation guide Select sizeP232 Shot modeP232 Scene modeP232 Operation Description 5 6 7 8 9
A EectP232 White balanceP232 Funny face shotP226 MacroP233 Auto timerP233 Memory in useP233 Display captured images in "My picture" of
"Data Box"
Auto focusP233
Point the camera to a subject G The shutter tone sounds and the still image is captured. The Conrm save screen appears, and you can select whether to save the image. Conrm save screen
(Ex.: Outer camera) Camera Continue on the next page Continued on next page 223 b Touch operations on the Still image conrm save screen
(horizontal capture mode) Operation Description
*2
*1
*1
*2
*2 Create an i-mode mail with captured image attached Return to the Still image capture screen without saving the captured image Save the captured image Save and upload the captured image to Picasa Save the captured image as a mirror image Check the captured image by switching to normal/mirror image Save all continuous pictures captured Delete the selected image
*1 Appear only with the Inner camera.
*2 Appear only in the Continuous mode. b Key operations on the Still image conrm save screen
(vertical capture mode) Operation I[Picasa]
T[Mail]
C[Save]
Q, I[New]*2 M[Menu]*1 C[Save all]*2 224 Camera Description Save and upload the captured image to Picasa Create an i-mode mail with captured image attached Save the captured image Return to the Still image capture screen without saving the captured image
<Save mirror image>
Save the captured image as a mirror image
<View normal image>
Check the captured image by switching to normal image Save all continuous pictures captured Operation g[Delete]*2
*1 Appear only with the Inner camera.
*2 Appear only in the Continuous mode. Delete the selected image Description
/G The captured image is automatically saved in the destination specied under
"Memory in use" (P233) and the Complete save screen will be displayed. When using the Inner camera, images on the capture screen and the Conrm save screen are displayed as a mirror image, however, the image will be saved as a normal image. To save the image as a mirror image, set
"Auto Saving" to "OFF" and touch on the Conrm save screen. Complete save screen
(Ex.: Outer camera) b Touch/Key operations on the Still image complete save screen (horizontal capture mode) Operation Description
/G Create an i-mode mail with captured image attached Return to the Still image capture screen Set the captured image as wallpaper, etc. to the Stand-by display Edit the captured image Delete the captured image Upload the captured image to Picasa When "Auto Saving" (P233) is set to "ON"
Pressing G captures a still image and automatically saves it in the destination specied under "Memory in use". (P233) After the Complete save screen appears, the Still image capture screen returns. However, in the Continuous mode, the screen that noties of saving appears instead. Note Even when Manner mode is activated, the shutter tone sounds when capturing. If capturing with "Select size" set to "5.1M (25601920)" or capturing using the Inner camera, the zoom feature cannot be used.
<Picasa>
The FOMA terminal connects to the Picasa site. Log in the site and upload les by mail attachment. The captured image is retained up to the compose message screen for uploading so make sure the receiver's address. A le of more than 2MB cannot be uploaded. For details, visit Picasa site (http://picasa.google.co.jp/) via PC, etc. b Key operations on the Still image complete save screen
(vertical capture mode) Operation I[Picasa]
T[Mail]
Q, C[New]
M[Menu]
Description Upload the captured image to Picasa Create an i-mode mail with captured image attached Return to the Still image capture screen
<Use as>
Set the captured image as wallpaper, etc. to the Stand-by display
<Edit>
Edit the captured image
<Delete>
Delete the captured image
<Album>
Display captured images in "My picture" of "Data Box"
Auto focus When you capture images with the Outer camera, Auto focus operates and the subject in the center of the screen can be automatically focused on. When G is pressed on the Still image capture screen, auto adjustment starts, then the focus frame turns red. The focus frame turns green when focused, and shutter clicks. For images captured with "Continuous mode"
The captured image is displayed on the left side and the touched image is displayed in the center of the screen. To save all captured images, touch To select and send images via mail, touch images to send To select and delete images, touch images to delete
. Camera Continue on the next page 225 Note The right edge of the previously taken image is displayed at the left edge of the current capture screen, helping you to frame for the next shot. Touching while capturing starts over capturing. Funny Face Shot If you point the camera to a subject, the camera recognizes faces and you can convert them into various funny faces. About image size, you can select for the Inner camera from "VGA
(480640)" to "QVGA(320240)", for the Outer camera from
"Wallpaper (800480)" to "QVGA (320240)".
"Funny face shot"
Stand-by display G
Select a funny face type
(Camera-mode) Panorama Shot You can create a panoramic image from 3 captured still images taken by moving the FOMA terminal rightward. This option is available when the image size is "VGA (640840)" to
"Sub-QCIF (12896)"
This option is not available for the Inner camera.
Stand-by display G
"Menu" "Preview" "Shot mode"
"Panorama shot"
Indicate where the current frame is Panorama shot screen
G
Move the FOMA terminal rightward G
Move the FOMA terminal rightward G
/G A panoramic image made up of the 3 images is displayed. 226 Camera b Funny face type Type
(OFF)
(Bighead)
(Mosaic)
(Animal mask)
(Snow)
(Monotone)
(Facial color)
(Outfocus)
(Radialblur)
(Fisheye)
(Concave) Description Cancel Funny face shot mode. Change shape of head as enlarged. Apply mosaic to face. If this type is selected, animal mask type is displayed. Select a mask type to cover face with the selected animal mask. Apply eect as if the snow is falling on the entire image. Apply black-and-white eect. Apply eect to make face look like beautiful skin. Blur face outline. Blur face outline radially. Apply eect as if captured with Fisheye lends. Apply face to look shrunk.
Point the camera to the subject G Once your face is recognized, the eect is displayed on the screen.
/G Movie-mode Capturing Moving Pictures Captured moving pictures are saved in the "Camera" folder in
"i-motion" of "Data Box" on the FOMA terminal. To change the saving destination to a microSD card, set in "Memory in use" (P234).
Stand-by display G
"Movie-mode"
(Camera-mode) b Touch/Key operations on the Moving picture capture screen (horizontal capture mode) Moving picture capture screen Operation
/G Zoom bar, F/E
"Menu"
Description Start recording Zoom (available while capturing) Display setting menu Exit Movie-mode Change Camera-mode
(Camera-mode)
(Switch camera) Switch between the Inner camera and the
(Brightness)
(Light) Outer camera Display the Brightness adjustment bar Set lighting condition Camera Continue on the next page Continued on next page 227
Point the camera to the subject G The tone sounds and capturing moving picture starts. recording.
* Pause is not available when
: Pause/resume the
"Type" is "Sound only". b Key operations while capturing moving pictures (vertical capture mode) Capturing moving picture screen Operation Description M[Pause]
C[Stop]
Q, I[Cancel] Cancel capturing Pause/Resume capturing Stop capturing
/G The tone sounds and capturing moving picture ends. The photo light turns o. After a moving picture is captured, the Conrm save screen appears, and you can select whether to save the moving picture. Conrm save screen b Key operations on the Moving picture capture screen
(vertical capture mode) Key C[Rec.], G J, F/E H 1, I[Mode]
M[Menu]
T[Light]
Q g[CameraSW]
0 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Description Start recording Zoom (available while capturing) Adjust brightness Change Camera-mode Display setting menu Set lighting condition Exit Movie-mode Switch between the Inner camera and the Outer camera Display the key operation guide Select sizeP233 Auto SavingP234 Video qualityP234 EectP233 White balanceP234 TypeP234 Common modeP234 Flicker tuningP234 Memory in useP234 Display captured images in "My picture" of
"Data Box"
228 Camera b Touch operations on the Moving picture conrm save screen (horizontal capture mode) Operation Description
"New"
"YouTube"
Create an i-mode mail with captured moving picture attached Return to the Moving picture capture screen without saving the captured moving picture Preview the captured moving picture Save the captured moving picture Save and upload the captured moving picture to YouTube b Key operations on the Moving picture conrm save screen
(vertical capture mode) Operation Description C[Save]
M[Play]
I[YouTube] Save and upload the captured moving picture to Save the captured moving picture Preview the captured moving picture T[Mail]
Q YouTube Create an i-mode mail with captured moving picture attached Return to the Moving picture capture screen without saving the captured moving picture
/G The captured moving picture is automatically saved in the save location specied under "Memory in use" (P234) and the Complete save screen appears. When using the Inner camera, images on the capture screen are displayed as a mirror image, however, images will be saved as a normal image. Complete save screen b Touch/Key operations on the Moving picture complete save screen (horizontal capture mode) Operation Description
"New", G Create an i-mode mail with captured moving picture attached Return to the Moving picture capture screen Preview the captured moving picture Set the captured moving picture as wallpaper, etc. to the Stand-by display Delete the captured moving picture
"YouTube" Upload the captured moving picture to YouTube b Key operations on the Moving picture complete save screen (vertical capture mode) Operation Description Q, C[New]
M[Use as]
g[Delete]
I[YouTube]
T[Mail]
Return to the Moving picture capture screen Set the captured moving picture as wallpaper, etc. to the Stand-by display Delete the captured moving picture Save and upload the captured moving picture to YouTube Create an i-mode mail with captured moving picture attached When "Auto Saving" (P234) is set to "On"
Pressing the destination specied under "Memory in use" (P234). The Complete save screen appears and the Moving picture capture screen returns.
/G stops the recording and automatically saves it in Camera Continue on the next page Continued on next page 229 Note Even when Manner mode is activated, the shutter tone sounds when capturing starts and ends. Moving picture capturing will be terminated when it is interrupted by a call arrival. After the call is terminated, the Conrm save screen appears, and you can save the moving picture recorded until the interruption. Playing moving pictures on a PC.P447
<YouTube>
The FOMA terminal connects to the YouTube site. Upload les by mail attachment. The captured moving picture is retained up to the compose message screen for uploading so make sure the receiver's address. A le of more than 2MB cannot be uploaded. For details, visit YouTube site (http://www.youtube.com/) via PC, etc. Changing Settings for Shooting Set the Camera functions according to the capturing conditions. Using Zoom Set the image zoom magnication. When capturing a still image, if capturing with "Select size" set to
"5.1M (2560 1920)" or capturing using the Inner camera, the zoom feature cannot be used.
Still image capture screen (P222)/Moving picture capture screen (P227) Slide the Zoom bar to adjust zoom magnication Move the Zoom bar pressing F or E, or with your nger touching the touch panel. For vertical capture mode, using J also slides the zoom bar. Zoom bar Zoom setting
(Ex.: Still image capture screen) 230 Camera b Outer camera maximum magnication Camera
-mode Photo-mode Movie-mode Image size*
5.1M (25601920) 3M (20481536) 2M (16001200) 1M (1280960) VGA (640480) CIF (352288) QVGA (320240) QCIF (176144) Sub-QCIF (12896) Wallpaper
(800480) QVGA (320240) QCIF (176144) Sub-QCIF (12896) Zoom Maximum magnication Approx. 1.2 times Approx. 1.6 times Approx. 2.0 times 10 steps Approx. 1.6 times Approx. 2.0 times Approx. 3.6 times Approx. 5.0 times
* Numbers in parentheses indicate as in horizontal capture mode. The right and left numbers switch when capturing in vertical capture mode. b Outer camera maximum magnication Camera
-mode Image size*
Zoom Maximum magnication Movie-mode Approx. 2.0 times Approx. 3.3 times Approx. 5.0 times
* Numbers in parentheses indicate as in horizontal capture mode. The QVGA (320240) QCIF (176144) Sub-QCIF (12896) 10 steps right and left numbers switch when capturing in vertical capture mode. Adjusting Brightness Adjust the image brightness (exposure). You can adjust brightness in 9 steps. picture capture screen (P227)
Still image capture screen (P222)/Moving
Display the Brightness adjustment bar b Horizontal capture mode Touch
. b Vertical capture mode Press H.
Slide the Brightness adjustment bar to adjust brightness Move the Brightness adjustment bar with your nger touching the touch panel. In horizontal capture mode, pressing F or E also allows to slide. For vertical capture mode, using J also slides the brightness adjustment bar. Brightness adjustment bar Brightness setting
(Ex.: Still image capture screen) Camera Continue on the next page 231 Setting Auto Timer Set the number of seconds from the time the shutter is pressed until an image is captured. The Auto timer is not available for moving picture capturing.
Still image capture screen (P222) "Menu"
"Preview" "Auto timer"
"3sec"/"10sec"/"15sec"
(the number indicates the number of seconds) appears at the top of the screen. To release Auto timer, set to "OFF".
G Auto timer starts. An image is captured automatically after the set number of seconds. After the shutter key is pressed, photo light blinks in orange and the timer sound rings until the image is captured. 232 Camera Camera settings Changing Camera Settings Still Image Capture Screen Setting Menu
Still image capture screen (P222) "Menu"
"Preview"/"Others" Perform the following operations
[Select size]
Set the image size to capture.
[Shot mode]
Normal Continuous mode : Press the shutter key to capture images
: Capture one still image. continuously. You can capture up to 6 continuous images smaller than "CIF (352288)", or up to 4 images of "CIF (352 288)". When "Auto" is selected, you can capture continuous images by pressing the shutter key once. When "Manual" is selected, you can capture continuous images by pressing the shutter key repeatedly. image. Select a frame from "My picture". Move the cursor to a folder [Open]
Select a frame Shoot with frame : Add a frame to the subject when capturing an
: Capture a panoramic image.P226 Panorama shot*
[Scene mode]*
Capture a still image suitable for the capturing conditions.
[Eect]
Add an eect when capturing a still image.
[White balance]
Set hue/tint for the image. When set according to the capturing conditions, a naturally colored image can be produced.
[Macro]*
Set close-up capturing. Become focused when distance between the Camera and subject is approximately 10cm.
[Auto timer]
Select the number of seconds from the time the shutter is pressed until an image is captured.
[Image quality]
Select the image quality used when saving the still image.
[Auto Saving]
Set whether to save the still image automatically.
[Memory in use]
Set the save location for the still image.
[Shake reduction]*
Set whether to enable the shake reduction function.
[Auto focus]*
Set the Auto focus. When "Face tracking" is selected, a face is recognized and focused automatically. Up to 3 faces can be detected.
[Shutter sound]
Set the shutter tone.
[Flicker tuning]
The icker on the screen under a uorescent light, etc. may be reduced. Auto : Suppress the icker automatically. 50Hz : Select this option in an area where the frequency of the 60Hz : Select this option in an area where the frequency of the power is 50Hz. power is 60Hz.
[Reset settings]
Restore the still image capture settings to default.
* Not available for the Inner camera. Note
<Continuous mode>
This option is available when the image size is "CIF (352288)"
or smaller. When "Auto" is selected, the Outer camera captures at intervals of approximately 0.7 seconds, and the Inner camera at intervals of approximately 0.2 seconds. When "Continuous mode" is set, "Auto timer" is disabled. If you press Conrm save screen appears.
<Shoot with frame>
This option is available when the image size is "CIF (352288)"
to "Sub-QCIF (12896)" and "Wallpaper (800480)" (Available only for the Outer camera).
<Auto focus>
When "Manual" is selected, the focus adjustment bar appears on the Still image capture screen in horizontal capture mode. Move the bar with your nger touching the touch panel. When capturing in vertical capture mode, use H to display/adjust the focus adjustment bar. while capturing, you can end capturing and the Moving Picture Capture Screen Setting Menu
Moving picture capture screen (P227)
"Menu" "Preview"/"Others" Perform the following operations
[Select size]
Set the moving picture size to capture.
[Eect]
Add an eect when capturing moving pictures. Camera Continue on the next page Continued on next page 233 Note
<Flicker tuning>
If you record the moving picture in the size of "QVGA
(320240)" in a room where 50Hz uorescent light is used, icker may not be reduced. Bar code reader Using Bar Code Reader You can scan information embedded in a JAN code or QR code using the Outer camera. You can create i-mode mail or connect to the Internet using the scanned information. You can also save or play the scanned information, image or melody. UP to 5 pieces of scanned information can be saved. Scan the code when the entire code is displayed on the screen. Hold the camera parallel to the code. b JAN codes JAN code is a bar code representing numbers using vertical bars in dierent thickness and spaces. 8-digit
(JAN8) or 13-digit (JAN13) bar code can be scanned. The scanned result of the following JAN code is
"4942857123456".
[White balance]
Set hue/tint for the image. When set according to the capturing conditions, a naturally colored moving picture can be produced.
[Video quality]
Set the image quality used when saving the moving picture.
[Size restriction]
Restrict the le size of a moving picture.
[Memory in use]
Set the save location for a moving picture.
[Auto Saving]
Set whether to save the moving picture automatically.
[Type]
Set whether video and sound are to be included in a moving picture.
[Common mode]
Set le size suitable for attaching to i-mode mail (up to 500KB). If set to "On", you can select image size from "QCIF (176144)" or
"Sub-QCIF (12896)" and the Image quality is set to "Super ne"
and the Size restriction is set to "For mail short".
[Flicker tuning]
The icker on the screen under a uorescent light, etc. may be reduced. Auto : Suppress the icker automatically. 50Hz : Select this option in the location where the frequency of the 60Hz : Select this option in the location where the frequency of the power is 50Hz. power is 60Hz.
[Reset settings]
Restore the moving picture capture settings to default. 234 Camera b QR codes QR code is one of the 2 dimensional codes that express text including alphanumeric characters, Kanji, Kana, or pictographs in the vertical and horizontal patterns. Some QR codes have an image or melody embedded, and some are split QR codes where multiple images contain 1 larger piece of information. The scanned result of the following QR code is "NTT
(NTT DOCOMO, INC.)". Scanning Codes When scanning bar cords, use the Outer camera and hold the FOMA terminal approximately 10cm away from the code to scan.
M "LifeKit" "Bar code reader"
b Key operations on the Scan screen Operation Description C[Scan]
M[Mode]
I[List]
T[Light]
g[
Start Auto focus Change Camera-mode List the saved scanned data Light ON/OFF
], Q Exit Bar code reader C[Scan]
After the auto focusing, scan the code. When scanning completes, a tone sounds and the scanned data appears. When the bar code reader is activated, scanning starts automatically. When focused, scan the code automatically without pressing C[Scan]. If you can not scan the code with auto focus, press C[Retry] to scan the code again. When Manner mode is activated, the tone does not sound.
Display the code to scan within the screen Scanned data screen (Ex.: For a melody)
Depending on the type of scanned data, performs the following operations Depending on the scanned data, the screen or operation may dier. Always save the scanned data if you want to use it later. Up to 16 split QR codes can be continuously scanned and combined.P237 Scan screen Camera Continue on the next page Continued on next page 235 Note
<Common functions>
Bar codes other than JAN codes, QR codes, and 2 dimensional codes cannot be scanned. Bar codes may not be correctly scanned because of scratch, smudge, damage, printing quality, or reection of light. Some codes may not be scanned depending on the type, size, or QR code version. If trying to save more than 5 pieces of data, a conrmation asking whether to delete older data rst appears. To save the new data, select "Yes" select data to delete select "Yes". If Bar code reader cannot scan the code within approximately 30 seconds after being activated, a message indicating that scanning failed appears. If the Bar code reader cannot scan the code after a certain period of time, it automatically terminates.
<Compose message>
If the address has invalid characters, nothing is entered in the address.
<Make call>
Valid characters are numbers and symbols [#, :, +, , P,
(, and )]. If the phone number contains characters other than these, the call cannot be made.
<Start i-ppli>
If "Barcode i-ppli To" (P283) is not set, you cannot start an i-ppli from scanned data. b For phone number Select the displayed phone number to open the Phone number entry screen with the scanned phone number already entered. If "Add to phonebook", etc. appears, select it to save to the Phonebook. b For mail address Select the displayed mail address to create i-mode mail with the scanned mail address already entered. If "Compose message", etc. appears, select it to create i-mode mail with the scanned mail address or subject already entered . If "Add to phonebook", etc. appears, select it to save to the Phonebook. b For URL Select the displayed URL to access the URL. If "Add bookmark", etc. appears, select it to save as Bookmark. b For text The scanned characters are displayed. b For image The scanned image is displayed. b For melody Press C[Play] to play the scanned melody. If you press C[Stop] during a playback, the melody stops. b For i-ppli If "Start iappli", etc. appears, select it to launch. 236 Camera Scanned Data Screen Sub Menu Displayed items vary depending on the type of scanned data.
Scanned data screen (P235) M[Menu]
Perform the following operations
[Copy]
Copy selected URL, phone number, or address on the scanned result screen.
[Play]
Play the scanned data.
[Save to list]
Save the scanned data in a list.
[Save to Databox]
Save the scanned image or melody to "Data Box".
[Add to phonebook]
Save the scanned name, phone number, URL, or mail address to Phonebook.
[Add bookmark]
Save the scanned URL to "Bookmark".
[Retry]
Scan the code again. Scanning split QR codes a Perform Steps 1 and 2 in "Scanning Codes" (P235) b After the message "Scan next bar code" appears, scan the next code c Repeat Step b Press Q to cancel scanning or C[Retry] to readjust the Auto focus. File name of the scanned data The scanned data is automatically named using the year, month, date, hour, and minute. The le cannot be renamed. Example: If taken at 10:10 on 2009/8/1 JAN code:
"P2009_0801_1010_X.JAN" (X is a sequential number) QR code:
"P2009_0801_1010_X.QR" (X is a sequential number) Using/Deleting Saved Data
Scan screen (P235) I[List]
b To activate scan screen Press M[Menu] "Scan". b To delete 1 item of saved scanned data Move the cursor to data to delete M[Menu]
"Delete one" "Yes". b To delete all saved scanned data Press M[Menu] "Delete all" enter the Terminal security code "Yes".
Select the scanned data For further operations, refer to Step 3 in "Scanning Codes"
(P235) depending on the type of data. Camera Continue on the next page 237 1Seg 1Seg 240 Before Using 1Seg 242 Setting Channels Channel settings 243 Watching 1Seg Activate 1Seg 245 Using i-ppli Program Guide Program guide 248 Setting Timer for Watching 1Seg Program TV timer list 248 Using Data Broadcasting Data broadcasting 250 Using TVlink TVlink 251 Setting 1Seg 1Seg settings 252 239 1Seg 1Seg is a digital terrestrial broadcasting service for mobile devices and provides data broadcasting as well as video and sound broadcasting. Use i-mode to acquire the detail information on TV programs, join panel shows, or enjoy TV shopping. For details about "1Seg" service, visit the web site below. The Association for Promotion of Digital Broadcasting PC: http://www.dpa.or.jp/english/
i-mode: http://www.dpa.or.jp/1seg/k/ (Japanese only) Using 1Seg 1Seg is a service provided by TV broadcasters (broadcast stations). Communication charge does not apply to receive video and sound. For viewing fee of NHK, contact NHK. The information displayed on a data broadcasting domain has 2 types; "data broadcasting" and "data broadcasting site". "Data broadcasting" is displayed on broadcast wave together with video and sound, and "data broadcasting site" is accessed by connecting to a site provided by TV broadcasters (broadcast stations) from data broadcasting information. And it may be connected to "i-mode site". Accessing to a site requires a separate i-mode subscription. Packet communication charges apply to view a "data broadcasting site" or "i-mode site". Some sites (fee-based i-mode sites) require an information fee for use. About Signal 1Seg is one of the broadcasting services, and receives a signal (broadcast wave) dierent from FOMA service. Therefore, regardless of whether the FOMA terminal is in/out of service are, you cannot receive 1Seg broadcasting in place the signal cannot reach or during the hours the broadcasting is out of service. Also, in the following places, the signal status may become weak or the signal may not be received even if the FOMA terminal is within a digital terrestrial broadcasting service area. Place that is far from the tower which sends the broadcast wave Place where the signal is interrupted due to the landscape or buildings such as mountain areas or behind a building Place where the signal is weak or does not reach such as a tunnel, basement, or recess of a building To improve the reception status, fully extend the 1Seg antenna. Changing the direction of antenna, holding the FOMA terminal apart from or close to your body or moving to another place may also improve the reception status. 240 1Seg Display when Using 1Seg for the First Time When 1Seg is activated for the rst time after purchase, a conrmation of disclaimer appears. Conrm each term and press C[OK]. After this, the conrmation does not appear. About Broadcast Storage Area Broadcast storage area is a storage area in the terminal specic for 1Seg. Information you entered following the data broadcasting instruction is stored on the broadcast storage area based on the TV broadcasters (broadcast stations) setting. The stored information may include personal data such as your answer results of quizzes, membership number, gender, age, and occupation. The saved information may be displayed on a data broadcasting site when viewing, or may be sent to the TV broadcasters (broadcast stations) without you re-entering it. To erase broadcast storage areaP252 When you replaced or removed the UIM, a conrmation asking whether to initialize the broadcast storage area appears. Select
"Yes" to initialize the broadcast storage area. Selecting "No"
disables services using the broadcast storage area. Display when reading the broadcast storage area If you use the information saved in the broadcast storage area while watching a program, a conrmation "Use saved information? It may include information used by the same broadcasting group" appears. Select "Yes" to disable the subsequent conrmation on reading the saved information performed while watching the same program. Select "Yes
(permanently)" to disable the subsequent conrmation on any program. 1Seg Continue on the next page 241 Before Using 1Seg Procedures for Watching 1Seg Example: When watching 1Seg for the rst time Step 1 : Channel settingsP243 Save channel lists corresponding to your area. Step 2 : Activate 1SegP245 Save channel lists corresponding to your area. 1Seg Antenna Fully extend the 1Seg antenna when watching 1Seg. b To extend the 1Seg antenna a Pinch the head of the 1Seg antenna a, and pull it out in the direction of the arrow b b Fully extend the 1Seg antenna c Hold the lower part of the 1Seg antenna to change direction Forcibly trying to change the direction of the 1Seg antenna could deform or damage it. b To put the 1Seg antenna back a Hold the lower part of the 1Seg antenna and pull it down straight Forcibly trying to put the 1Seg antenna in could deform or damage it. b Rotate the head of the 1Seg antenna to t the depression 242 1Seg Receiving a Call or Message while Watching 1Seg While watching 1Seg, the FOMA terminal suspends 1Seg program when following events occur. After the other task is terminated, the FOMA terminal resumes the 1Seg program. The operations suspended with sound and video are the following:
- Receiving a voice/videophone call
- Receiving mail/SMS (when "Receiving display" is set to "Alarm mode")
- Sounding an Alarm, or alarms set for Schedule event, To do task, or Booked program Note If 1Seg is used for a long time while charging, the battery life may become shorter than estimated. Put the 1Seg antenna back in when 1Seg is not used. Channel settings Setting Channels Conguration of Channel settings beforehand to save a channel list is required to watch 1Seg. Up to 10 channel list items can be saved. If you set a channel list for other areas where you visit, you can watch the local TV program there. Up to 62 channels can be saved in 1 channel list.
M "1Seg" "Channel settings"
If there is no channel list saved The New channel creation screen appears. If there is more than 1 channel list is saved Move the cursor to "Not registered"
M[Menu] "Add new"
Perform the following operations
[Select area]
Select an area from area list registered in the FOMA terminal. Select a region to register Select a prefecture C[Select]
"Yes"
[Auto channel set]
Automatically set channels which can be received in your area.
"Yes" C[Save] "Yes"
To cancel, press g[Cancel] "Yes". Press T[Retry] before saving to retry the setting. Note
"Select area" may not be congured properly depending on your area. In this case, perform "Auto channel set". Make sure to perform the setting of "Auto channel set" within a digital terrestrial broadcasting service area. 1Seg Continue on the next page 243
[Delete]
Delete the selected channel list. Currently used channel list cannot be deleted.
[Delete all]
Delete the all channel lists. Enter the Terminal security code "Yes"
Channel List Detail Screen Sub Menu
Channel list screen (P244) Move the cursor to a channel list I[Detail] M[Menu]
C[Watch]: Display the selected channel.
Perform the following operations
[Replace remote no.]
Replace the remote controller number of the selected channel. Select a channel to change Select a new remote controller number "Yes"
If a destination number has a channel saved, the channel is replaced with the target channel.
[Delete]
Delete the selected channel. Selecting a Channel List to Use When multiple channel lists are saved, switch channel lists to be used from those saved.
M "1Seg" "Channel settings"
The channel list in use is marked. I[Detail]: Display the detail screen of the selected channel list. Channel list screen
Select a channel list to use Channel List Screen Sub Menu
Channel list screen (P244) Move the cursor to a channel list M[Menu] Perform the following operations
[Add new]
Add a channel to the selected channel list.P243
[Detail]
Display the detail screen of the selected channel list.
[Rename]
Change name of the selected channel list. 244 1Seg Activate 1Seg Watching 1Seg Perform channel settings before watching 1Seg.P243
T(for 1+ seconds) The conrmation of disclaimer is displayed only at the rst time. Read through the agreement and press C[OK]. To terminate 1Seg, select P "Yes". 1Seg Watch Screen Components 1Seg watch screen
(Vertical screen) Data broadcasting
(Full screen) 1Seg watch screen
(Horizontal screen (Standard)) a Video Touch here to display Volume adjustment and Channel selection icons. b Subtitles c Data broadcasting d Remote control no. e Strength of broadcast wave Strong Weak f Operation mode
: TV
: Data broadcasting g Channel name and program name h Volume i j In Multiple sound broadcasting k Main/Sub sound display
: Mute
: Main+Sub sound
: Sub sound
: Main sound 1Seg Continue on the next page Continued on next page 245 b Key operations on the 1Seg screen TV
(Vertical) H E*
(1+ seconds) Operation TV
(Horizontal) Data broadcasting Description J F/E F
(1+ seconds) Adjust volume E*
(1+ seconds) Mute Select a channel Search receivable channelsP246 Show/hide program name, etc. Switch vertical/
horizontal (Standard)/
horizontal (Full screen) Switch TV and data broadcasting Select a data broadcasting item Switch normal screen/full screen of data broadcasting Display program guide Terminate 1Seg J H Dial key, *, #
H J
(1+ seconds)
(1+ seconds) C I[Disp]
A I[Disp]
(1+ seconds) g A H C I[Disp]
(1+ seconds) P "Yes"
* Turn to F in Turn View Style mode. 246 1Seg Note You can activate 1Seg from a link of 1Seg information displayed in a site or mail (Media To).P196 Intermittent sound or image may be heard or seen due to broadcast wave receptions. Also, a block-shaped noise may be displayed or the image may not be displayed. The screen orientation automatically switches to horizontal by tilting the FOMA terminal to the left. Placing the position of the FOMA terminal in horizontal direction while data broadcasting is displayed, only video is displayed. Searching Available Channels <Channel Search>
Search available channels in order of frequency and display them.
1Seg watch screen (P245) J(for 1+
seconds in vertical), H(for 1+ seconds in horizontal) Display available channels if any. M[Menu] select "Add to channel list" to add to the channel list. b To cancel the channel search Press M[Cancel]/Q "Yes". Note When "Tuning..." is displayed for a long time in an area where broadcast wave is weak, the channel search allows you to search available channels. When moving to other area, the terminal may receive a channel which is not saved in the Channel settings. 1Seg Watch Screen Sub Menu
1Seg watch screen (P245) M[Menu]
Perform the following operations
: Set Image display ON/OFF.
: This option is not available.
[Channel settings]
Display the Channel list screen. P244
[TVlink]
Display a TVlink list.
[DBC]
Make data broadcasting setting. Image display Eect sound Certicate info : Display certicate at SSL communication. Reload Back to DBC
[Switch TV/DBC]
Switch TV and data broadcasting.
[Display settings]
Set the display of the screen. TV disp. Mode DBC disp. Mode : Set the display of the data broadcasting. Subtitles
: Reload and display image.
: Return to data broadcasting.
: Set the display of the screen.
: Switch subtitle ON/OFF. Even if set to ON, subtitle may not be displayed depending on a program. Backlight
: Set the backlight level of the display.
[Sound settings]
Set sound. Mute(Unmute) Main/Sub sound : Set main/sub sound. Switch sound
: Mute/unmute the sound. program.
: Change the sound of multi sound broadcasting
[Program guide]
Display program guide.P248
[Recom. channel mail]
You can create a mail with the channel information you are watching. If the destination FOMA terminal supports Media To function, the information can be selected to activate 1Seg.
[Add to channel list]
Add the currently watching channel to the channel list.P246
[Select service]
You can switch programs if these programs are in the same channel.
[Program info.]
Display the detail information about the program you are watching. 1Seg Continue on the next page 247
M "1Seg" "TV timer list"
I[New] Perform the following operations g[Cancel]: Cancel adding a new booking. TV timer list screen
(Set date)]
(Set time)]
Specify the booking date.
Specify the start time of the booking program.
(Channel)]
Select a channel.
Up to 120 full-pitch or 240 half-pitch characters can be entered. Program title]
Program guide Using i-ppli Program Guide By using i-ppli Program guide, you can select a program from the program guide to start 1Seg or set timer for starting 1Seg.
M "1Seg" "Program guide"
Press M[TV] to watch the program which is being broadcast on the selected channel. For further operations, refer to "G (G-GUIDE Program List Remote Controller)" (P283). Note Pressing g on the 1Seg watch screen (in vertical) also displays program guide. You can set i-ppli Program guide in "Program guide key setting" in "Software set"P278 TV timer list Setting Timer for Watching 1Seg Program Setting Timer to Start a 1Seg Program Set "Announce on" to notify you of a program start by alarm 1 minute before the program starts. You can set or view timer from Schedule (P353). Up to 20 entries can be set. 248 1Seg
(Announce on/o)]
Set whether to notify by alarm 1 minute before the program start. If set to "Announce on", perform the following steps to select the alarm tone. D C[List] on the Music
: Select a music data saved in "Music" of "Data Box". eld Select a type of the alarm tone P270 Go to Step 3 in "Setting a Chaku-Uta Full Song as a Ring Tone" (P266). i-motion : Select a moving picture/i-motion saved in "i-motion" of
"Data Box".P307
(Set repeat)]
Melody : Select a melody saved in "Melody" of "Data Box".P314
Set repeat booking of a program that is broadcasted regularly. Select
"None" for not to repeat. If "Weekdays" is selected, perform the following steps to specify the day of the week. D C[List] on the I[Done]
You can set period if other than "None" is selected. D C[List] on the select the date setting eld Select expiration date eld "Set expiration" Use D to eld Mark days of the week
I[Done]
Note You cannot book a 1Seg program that starts now or within 1 minute. You can book a 1Seg program from a link of 1Seg information displayed in a site or mail (Media To).P196 If "Announce on/o" is set to "Announce o", an alarm will not sound. And 1Seg will not be activated. When the alarm reaches the booked time If "Announce on" is set, you will be notied by alarm 1 minute before the starting time. The Alarm screen appears, the alarm tone sounds, and the illumination lights up. Press I[Watch] to start the 1Seg program. After started, select P "Yes" to terminate 1Seg. Press C[OFF] to stop the alarm (1Seg will not be activated at the specied time.). When multiple timer are set for the same time Press I[Detail] on the Alarm screen select a program to watch. Checking Booking Information
TV timer list screen (P248) Select a booked program to check Booking program detail screen appears. b To edit the booking information Press C[Edit].P248 b To delete the booking Press g[Delete]. b To add a new booking Press I[New].P248 1Seg Continue on the next page 249 Data broadcasting Using Data Broadcasting 1Seg provides data broadcasting in addition to video and sound. You can use various information containing images or moving pictures such as a site connected with a program. You cannot watch data broadcasting in horizontal screen.
A on 1Seg watch screen appears and you can operate data broadcasting items. Press A to switch TV and data broadcasting. You can also switch TV and data broadcasting by touching video/data broadcasting display area. Press I[Disp] for 1+ seconds to switch full screen and normal screen of data broadcasting.
Select an item Some items connect to a data broadcasting site or an i-mode site. Select "Yes" or "Yes (permanently)" if a conrmation whether to establish i-mode connection appears. Selecting "Yes
(permanently)" disables the subsequent conrmations on the same function, and the information of data broadcasting and data broadcasting site may automatically be updated. Note that packet communication charges may apply in such cases. Note Even if you switch to data broadcasting from TV, the sound of 1Seg streams. TV Timer List/Detail Screen Sub Menu
TV timer list screen (P248)/detail screen M[Menu] Perform the following operations
[Add new]
Book a new 1Seg program to watch.
[Edit]
Edit the selected timer.P248
[Delete]
Delete the selected booked program. You can select followings on the TV timer list screen. One
: Delete the selected booked program. Selected : Select and delete booked programs. Mark booked programs to delete g[Delete] "Yes"
Press M[Sel. all/Clr. all] to select/clear all.
: Delete all booked programs.
"Yes" Enter the Terminal security code All 250 1Seg TVlink List Sub Menu
TVlink list screen M[Menu] Perform the following operations
[TVlink info]
Display the TVlink detail information.
[Delete]
Delete a selected TVlink.
[Delete all]
Delete all saved TVlinks. Note The URL or memo information saved as a TVlink is available only from 1Seg. Not available from i-mode or Full browser. TVlink Using TVlink Depending on a data broadcasting or data broadcasting site, a URL or memo information can be saved as TVlink. If saved, you can display the target information from a TVlink list. Saving as a TVlink
Select an item that can be saved as a TVlink in data broadcasting "Yes"
Displaying Saved TVlink
M "1Seg" "TVlink"
The TVlink list screen appears. You can also display a TVlink list by pressing M[Menu]
"TVlink" on 1Seg watch screen.
Select a TVlink "Yes"
1Seg Continue on the next page 251
[1Seg settings status]
You can check 1Seg settings. 1Seg settings Setting 1Seg
M[Menu] "1Seg" "1Seg settings"
Perform the following operations
[Subtitles]
Show/hide subtitles.
[Backlight]
Set the backlight level of the Display.
[Set image display]
Set the display of the data broadcasting site.
[Set eect sound]
This option is not available.
[Close setting]
Set whether to continue sound output even when the FOMA terminal is closed.
[Main/Sub sound]
Set Main/Sub sound.
[Reset permission display]
Set to display the hidden conrmation.
[Reset 1Seg settings]
Restore the settings in "Subtitles", "Backlight", "Set image display",
"Set eect sound" and "Main/Sub sound" to their defaults. Enter the Terminal security code "Yes"
[Erase storage area]
Delete the storage area. Move the cursor to a broadcast station to delete the storage area M[Menu] "Delete"/"Delete all"
The Terminal security code is required to delete all. 252 1Seg Music Precautions for Music Data In this manual, Chaku-Uta Full songs, WMA (Windows Media Audio) les, and SD-Audio data (music data compatible with SD-Audio standard) are collectively referred to as "music data". This FOMA terminal can play WMA les, protected by copyright protection technology, Chaku-Uta Full songs, and SD-Audio data. Before downloading music data from web sites, read the license agreement (license and prohibited activities, etc.) carefully. Information unique to your FOMA terminal is used to play WMA les, protected by copyright protection technology. If the information unique to your FOMA terminal is changed due to failure, repair, or changing model, WMA les saved before the change was made may not play. Music data saved in the FOMA terminal or on a microSD card can be played for personal use only. When playing music, do not violate a third party's intellectual property rights such as copyright, and other rights. Do not copy or move music data saved in the FOMA terminal or on a microSD card to other media, such as a PC. DOCOMO assumes no responsibility for handling CCCD (copy controlled CD) materials, or cases you cannot convert music data to SD-Audio data. Precautions for Using or Handling a microSD CardP317 Music&Video Channel Music&Video Channel 254 Setting Programs 254 Playing Programs 256 Operating the Music&Video Channel from Data Box 259 Music Player Playing Music 260 Music Player 261 Saving Music Data 261 Playing Music Data MUSIC player 263 Using Playlist 267 Managing Music Data 270 Using Other Functions while Listening to Music Play in background 272 253 Music&Video Channel Music&Video Channel is a service that automatically downloads set music programs of up to approximately 1 hour at night. Also, you can enjoy high-denition moving picture programs of up to 30 minutes. The programs are updated regularly. You can enjoy the programs at any time, such as while commuting. Setting Programs Set programs are automatically downloaded at night. Up to 2 programs can be set. You need to register a site to My Menu that provides Music&Video Channel programs.P187
M "MUSIC" "Music&Video Ch"
Before Using Music&Video Channel Music&Video Channel is a fee-based service requiring a separate subscription. (The i-mode and Pake-hodai, Pake-hodai full, or Pake-
hodai double contracts are required for the subscription. The usage fee may reach the upper limit if using Pake-hodai double, even if you use the service only several times.) In addition to the usage fee for the Music&Video Channel, some programs may require additional information fees. After subscribing to the Music&Video Channel, if you insert the UIM into a FOMA terminal that does not support the Music&Video Channel, the service becomes unavailable. However, service charges still apply unless you cancel the Music&Video Channel subscription. You cannot set or download programs while using the international roaming service*. If you go overseas, deactivate the program download before leaving Japan. When you come back to Japan, activate the program download.
* Packet communication charges apply if setting or downloading programs during international roaming. You can use mail or access an i-mode site while listening to a Music&Video Channel program (Background playback). Multitask CombinationsP445 For details about Music&Video Channel, see "Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode] FOMA version". 254 Music Music&Video Channel screen
"Set program"
No programs are set by default. After programs are set, the program titles appear.
Follow on-screen instructions to set programs For details, see "Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode] FOMA version". Note In order to set programs with another UIM inserted, start with conrming the program setting information from Program setting. If checking the program setting information the programs that have not been moved from "Distributed program" folder may be deleted. This is a fee-based service requiring a separate subscription. If you have not subscribed to the service, a message indicating that you have not subscribed to the Music&Video Channel appears. Selecting "Program list" on the Music&Video Channel screen displays the list of all programs oered for the Music&Video Channel. Selecting "About this service" displays how to use the service and any special cautions. Also, you can subscribe to the service from here. Viewing or Canceling Program Setting
Music&Video Channel screen (P254)
Follow on-screen instructions
"Set program"
For details, see "Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode] FOMA version". Note Canceling programs does not remove the My Menu registration. appears on the Stand-by display 12 hours prior to the program After Specifying Programs download. Programs are automatically downloaded at the designated download time. appears on Programs are downloaded automatically at night. the Stand-by display if the download has been successful, and appears on the Stand-by display if the download has failed. Once the Music&Video Channel screen is displayed, the icon disappears. Note If the download is interrupted because the FOMA terminal is out of service area or the communication is disconnected, the download resumes automatically after 3 minutes. The attempts will be made up to 5 times. If the programs are not downloaded at the download time because the FOMA terminal is not turned on, the FOMA terminal is out of service area, or the signal is weak, the programs will be downloaded again at the same time on the following night. You cannot download the program except when the battery is indicated as program, a message will appear to notify that you cannot start downloading because of lower battery level). It may take a while to download programs. Make sure that the battery level is sucient and signal reception is strong when downloading. Programs cannot be automatically downloaded in the following cases. In each case, set the programs again on the Music&Video Channel screen.
- If a dierent UIM is inserted after programs were set
- If the UIM that programs were set with is inserted in another
(When you attempt to download the Music&Video Channel compatible FOMA terminal
- If the memory in the FOMA terminal is cleared If the download is interrupted because the signal is weak etc., the programs will not be automatically downloaded again until next time. Download programs manually. Downloaded programs are temporarily stored in the "Distributed program" folder in "Music&Video Ch" of "Data Box". If the channel to which the downloaded programs belong is updated, the programs stored in the "Distributed program" folder are deleted and the programs can no longer be playable. The programs you want to keep should be moved to another folder.P259 However, some programs may not be moved. If you set new programs, cancel a program, or cancel the subscription to My Menu, Music&Video Channel, or i-mode, the programs that have not been moved from "Distributed program"
folder are deleted. The ring tone does not sound and the terminal does not vibrate when the program download starts or completes. The illumination does not light/blink either. Music Continue on the next page 255 Downloading Programs Manually If the download fails, download remaining programs manually.
Music&Video Channel screen (P254) Select a program "Yes"
appears to a program that was failed in downloading. a Chapter title/artist name b DOLBY setting Not displayed for moving picture programs. c Program title d Playback progress bar/elapsed time/total time Display the playback elapsed time using a bar. e Currently-playing chapter number/Total chapter numbers f Repeat setting Note If you operate on the Music&Video Channel program list in Data Box, move the cursor to a program that failed in downloading C[Play] select "Yes". Even if the download was interrupted, the program can be played up to the chapter downloaded before the interruption. Programs exceeding the playback count, playback period, or playback limit cannot be resumed downloading. Depending on the time, manual download may not be possible. Playing Programs
Music&Video Channel screen (P254) Select a program Music&Video Channel player screen 256 Music OFF ON g Chapter image/moving picture or program image h Volume i Control key Display available navigation keys. b Key operations on the Music&Video Channel player screen Operation C[Pause/Play]
C (1+ seconds) H, F/E J J (Hold down) g, #
0 7/9 8 I[List]
T[Web to]
Description Pause/play Go to the beginning of the current program and pause Adjust the volume Play from the beginning of the current chapter or play previous/next chapter Rewind/fast forward while being held down Switch the Repeat setting Switch the DOLBY setting*
If multiple images are saved, display the previous/next image*
Show/hide the chapter/program image* (If both chapter image and program image are saved, those images can be switched.) Display the Chapter list Access sites Operation Description P Quit the Music&Video Channel player
* Not available for moving picture programs. Note Playback is paused in the following cases. The playback will resume automatically after the operation completes.
- When a voice or videophone call arrives
- When i-mode mail or SMS is received (If "Receiving display" is set to "Alarm mode")
- When an alarm sounds A program with playback restrictions cannot be played after the playback count, playback limit, or playback period is exceeded. You can check the playback count, playback limit, or playback period in the Program information. Some programs cannot be played other than in a set period time. Broadcasting time follows the FOMA terminal time set with auto time adjustment. When you attempt to play a partially downloaded program, a conrmation asking whether to download the remaining data appears. Select "Yes" to start downloading. Select "Play" to play up to the downloaded chapters. When you play the program data overseas, the actual playback limit expiration date may be earlier or later than the displayed date. Music&Video Channel Screen Sub Menu
Music&Video Channel screen (P254) Move to the cursor to a program M[Menu]
Perform the following operations
[Move program]
Move the selected program from the "Distributed program" folder. P259
[Delete]
Delete the selected program.
[Program info.]
Display information about the selected program.
[Chapter list]
Display chapter list of the selected program.P258
[Connect to URL]
Access a site if the selected program contains a URL. Note
<Delete>
Deleting programs does not cancel the program setting. Programs are automatically updated until you access the Music&Video Channel site and cancel the setting. Music&Video Channel Player Screen Sub Menu
Music&Video Channel screen (P256) M[Menu] Perform the following operations
[BGM]*1 Play in background.P272
[Expand]*2 Display an enlarged moving picture.
[Chapter list]
Display a chapter list.
[Chapter info.]
Display information about the chapter in playback.
[Program info.]
Display information about the program in playback. Music Continue on the next page Continued on next page 257
[Set repeat]
ON : Play program in playback repeatedly. OFF : The program will not be repeated.
[DOLBY PRESETS]*1 Set sound quality for program playback. (Dolby Mobile support) If "Original" is selected, you can set ON/OFF for every 3 items. However, settings on "Sound Space for Headphones" only functions with stereo earphone output but not function with the FOMA terminal speaker.
[Chapter Image]*1 Display the chapter image/program image. P267
[Connect to URL]
Access a site if the program in playback contains a URL.
*1 Appear only for music programs.
*2 Appear only for moving picture programs. 258 Music Displaying Chapter List of Program Select and play a chapter, or display the information.
Music&Video Channel player screen (P256) I[List]
C[Play]: Play the selected chapter. I[Info.]: Display information about the selected chapter. appears for the chapter in playback. Program icons on the Music&Video Channel screen The following icons which indicate a state of program download or the category are displayed at the Music&Video Channel screen or a Program list screen. Icon
Description
" is added for a program with playback
" is added for a played program.
" is added for a program than can be played only Downloaded program/Partially downloaded program
at the set playback start time.
count/playback limit/playback period or operation restriction at playback. Downloaded chapter/Chapter which failed to download Program which failed to update Program to be downloaded (Not downloaded) Downloading a program Moving to Save Program Folder Downloaded programs can be moved from "Distributed program" folder to another folder so that they will not be overwritten. Moved programs can be played from
"Music&Video Ch" of "Data Box". To move a program, create a destination folder in the "Music&Video Ch" folder beforehand.P260 Some programs cannot be moved.
Music&Video Channel screen (P254) Move to the cursor to a program M[Menu]
"Move program"
Select a folder I[Move]
Select a folder other than the "Distributed program" folder. Note Downloaded programs cannot be copied. Partially downloaded programs cannot be moved. Programs can be moved only within the FOMA terminal. They cannot be moved to a microSD card. Operating the Music&Video Channel from Data Box You can play or move the distributed programs from
"Music&Video Ch" of "Data Box", or edit the program titles. Playing a Program from Data Box
M "Data Box" "Music&Video Ch"
I[New]: Create a new folder.
Move the cursor to a folder C[Open]
Folder list screen Program list screen
Move the cursor to a program C[Play]
Music Continue on the next page 259 Folder List Screen Sub Menu
Folder list screen (P259) Move the cursor to a folder M[Menu] Perform the following operations
[Rename]
Change the title of the selected program.
[Delete]
This item
: Delete a selected le. Selected item : Select and delete les.
[New folder]
Create a new folder. You cannot create a sub folder in a user-dened folder.
[Rename]
Change the selected folder name.
[Delete]
Delete the selected folder.
[Memory info.]
Handset memory : Display the status of storage space, etc. in External memory : Display the status of storage space, etc. of the
"Data Box". microSD card. Note The "Distributed program" folder cannot be renamed or deleted. Program List Screen Sub Menu
Program list screen (P259) Move the cursor to a program M[Menu] Perform the following operations g[Delete]: Delete the selected program.
[Play]
Play the selected program.
[Move program]
Move the selected program from the "Distributed program" folder. 260 Music All items Mark les to delete I[Done] "Yes"
Press M[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.
: Delete all les in a folder.
"Yes" Enter the Terminal security code
[Program info.]
Display information about the selected program.
[Chapter list]
Open the chapter list.P258
[New folder]
This option is not available. Playing Music You can play music with the FOMA terminal in one of the following 2 ways:
Playing music with MUSIC player Play Chaku-Uta Full songs downloaded from a site, WMA les or SD-Audio data saved to a microSD card using a PC. Playing as i-motion Play audio-only i-motion downloaded using i-mode and saved in Data Box.P307 You can use mail or access an i-mode site while listening to music (Play in background).P272 MP4 8 to 128kbps Up to approx. 150MB Music Player b Available Chaku-Uta Full le format File Format Bit rate Savable capacity (FOMA terminal) The number of playlists that can be created b Available SD-Audio le format File Format Bit rate (stereo) The number of savable songs Up to 999 songs The number of playlists that can be created b Available WMA le format MPEG-2 AAC 16 to 72kbps Up to 10 songs Up to 99 songs File format WMA (Windows Media Audio 9 Standard, Windows Media Audio 10 Professional) 8 to 192kbps Bit rate The number of savable songs Up to 1,000 songs Saving Music Data Downloading a Chaku-Uta Full Song Up to approximately 150MB of Chaku-Uta Full songs of up to 5MB each can be saved. Downloaded Chaku-Uta Full song is saved in the "i-mode" folder in
"Music" of "Data Box" or a microSD card.
Access a site that provides Chaku-Uta Full songs Select a Chaku-Uta Full song to download After the download completes, a conrmation appears.
"Save" Select save location Play
: Play the downloaded Chaku-Uta Full song. File property : Display information about the downloaded Back
: Return to the web site without saving the Chaku-Uta Full song. Chaku-Uta Full song. In addition, select the destination when a microSD card is inserted on the terminal. Music Continue on the next page 261 Saving WMA Files in microSD Card The following items are required to play WMA les with the FOMA terminal:
L-03B terminal FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (optional) PC (Windows Vista, Windows XP Service Pack 2 and later
(Japanese versions)) Windows Media Player 10/11 microSD card
* For Windows Vista, use Windows Media Player 11.
M "Settings" "Others" "USB mode
Connect to a PC Insert microSD card into the FOMA terminal How to insert a microSD cardP316 setting" "MTP mode"
For details, refer to Step 2 and 3 in "Using the FOMA Terminal as a microSD Card Reader/Writer" (P326).
Start Windows Media Player 10/11 and save music data into a microSD card For operations of Windows Media Player 10/11, see Help for Windows Media Player 10/11. After music data is saved, remove FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 from the FOMA terminal and PC. 262 Music Napsterapplication You can use Napster application to save music data. Napster application is available for download from the following web site (in Japanese only). http://www.napster.jp/
If you have any question on Napster application, visit the following web site (in Japanese only). http://www.napster.jp/support/
Note L-03B may not display or play some WMA les saved by another FOMA terminal into a microSD card. If a microSD card that WMA les are transferred to using another FOMA terminal, a PC may not recognize it even in MTP mode. In that case, it is recommended to delete "WM" folder and "WM_SYSTEM" folder on a microSD card using PC, etc., or format the microSD card with L-03B. Note that if you format microSD card, all data including music data is deleted. Saving SD-Audio Data in microSD Card The following items are required to play SD-Audio data with the FOMA terminal:
L-03B terminal FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (optional) PC (Windows Vista, Windows XP, Windows 2000 (Japanese versions)) SD-Jukebox An audio CD that contains music you want to save microSD card b SD-Jukebox SD-Jukebox can be purchased from the following URL:
http://club.panasonic.co.jp/mall/sense/open/
(Japanese only) SD-Jukebox works under Windows Vista, Windows XP, and Windows 2000 (Japanese versions). For details about the operating environment, visit the following URL:
http://panasonic.jp/support/software/sdjb/ (Japanese only) Insert L-03B CD-ROM (bundled with your FOMA terminal) to a PC
Click " (Entertainment tools)"
Follow on-screen instructions to purchase "SD-Jukebox".
Install SD-Jukebox to a PC For installing SD-Jukebox, see the instruction manual for SD-Jukebox.
Insert microSD card into your FOMA terminal, then connect to the PC How to insert a microSD cardP318 Connecting to your PCP326
Start SD-Jukebox to save music data to microSD card On how to operate SD-Jukebox, see Help for SD-Jukebox. After music data is saved, remove the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 from the FOMA terminal and PC. MUSIC player Playing Music Data You can continuously play all songs saved in the FOMA terminal and the microSD card, or only play songs specied by artist name, genre, or album title. Example: To play music in "All songs"
M "MUSIC" "MUSIC player"
"All songs"
Playlists Artist Genre Album
: Display, create, or play a playlist.P267
: Sort and display music data
: Sort and display music data
: Sort and display music data by artist. by genre. by album. playlist. (if a song is currently played, "Now playing" is displayed and select to display the play screen.) Resume play : Play last played song/
Music data saved in the FOMA terminal Music screen Music data list screen (song list) Music Continue on the next page Continued on next page 263
: Music data saved in a microSD card
Move the cursor to a music data C[Play]
Play the selected music data in the displayed order in the music data list. MUSIC player screen a Song title, artist name b DOLBY setting c Album name d Elapsed time/playback progress bar/total time Display the playback elapsed time using a bar. e Repeat setting None Current song Play all f Jacket image/lyrics g Volume h Control key Display available navigation keys. i Shue Shue O Shue On 264 Music b Key operations on the MUSIC player screen Operation Description C[Pause/Play] Pause/play C(1+ seconds) Go to the beginning of the current song and H, F/E J pause Adjust the volume Play from the beginning of the current song or play the previous/next song Rewind/fast forward while being held down Switch the Shue setting Switch the Repeat setting Switch the DOLBY setting J(Hold down) T, *
g, #
0 7/9 Display the previous/next image 8 I[List]
Show/hide jacket image/lyrics Display the Music data list screen While the list screen is displayed, the right of the song title in playback. Quit MUSIC player P appears to Note Playback is paused in the following cases. The playback will resume automatically after the operation completes.
- When a voice or videophone call arrives
- When i-mode mail or SMS is received (If "Receiving display" is set to "Alarm mode")
- When an alarm sounds Sound eects such as the key tone do not sound during music data playback. Sorting conditions for artists, genre, and album is in accordance with the detailed information about the music data. "Unknown" is displayed, however, in the "Genre" eld because SD-Audio does not support "Genre" information. When you play the music data overseas, the actual playback limit expiration date may be earlier or later than the displayed date. Music Data List Screen Sub Menu
Music data list screen (P263) Move the cursor to a music data M[Menu] Perform the following operations C[Play]: Play the selected music data. I[Playlist]: Add the selected music data to a playlist.P270
[Play]
Play the selected music data.
[Add to playlist]
Add the selected music data to a playlist.P270
[Multiple choice]
Select and play multiple music data. Operations during playback are the same with for a playlist.P268 Mark music data to play I[Play]
Press M[Menu] to select "Play", "Add to playlist", "Sort", "Select all"
or "Clear all". You can add marked music data to a playlist by selecting "Add to playlist".
[Search]*1 Specify "Title", "Artist", "Album", "Genre", or "Year"*2 to search music data. Select an item Enter the item I[Search]
All music data that match all specied conditions are displayed.
[Sort]
Set conditions and sort music data.
[File property]
View or edit information about the selected music data. Move the cursor to an item I[Edit] Edit the item Some items are not editable. WMA le/SD-Audio data information is not editable.
*1 Music data in Artist/Genre/Album will not be displayed in the Music data list screen.
*2 Cannot search in SD-Audio data by "Year". MUSIC Player Screen Sub Menu
Music/SD-Audio player screen M[Menu]
Perform the following operations
[Go to MUSIC]
Display the Music screen while playing music data.P263
[BGM]
Play music data in background.P272
[List]
Display the Music data list screen.P263
[File property]
View or edit information about the music data in playback. Move the cursor to an item I[Edit] Edit the item Some items are not editable. The properties of WMA les/SD-Audio data are not editable.
[Shue On/Shue O]
Enable or disable shue play. Music Continue on the next page Continued on next page 265
[Set repeat]
None Current song : Play music data in playback repeatedly. Play all
: The program will not be repeated.
: Play all music data on the Music data list screen repeatedly.
[DOLBY PRESETS]
Set sound quality for program playback. (Dolby Mobile support) If "DOLBY CUSTOM" is selected, you can set ON/OFF for every 3 items. However, settings on "Sound Space for Headphones" only functions with stereo earphone output but not function with the FOMA terminal speaker.
[Jacket image]*
Display the jacket image or save it to Data Box.P267
[Lyric]*
Display the lyrics or save it to Data Box.P267
[Set as tone]*
Set the music data in playback as a ring tone.P266
[Connect to URL]*
Access a site if the music data in playback contains a URL.
* Not available for WMA les/SD-Audio data. 266 Music
"Set as tone"
Setting a Chaku-Uta Full Song as a Ring Tone
MUSIC player screen (P264) M[Menu]
Select a ring tone type
Select a range to set as the ring tone Depending on a Chaku-Uta Full song, some items cannot be selected.
[Full song ring tone]
Set the entire Chaku-Uta Full song in playback as a ring tone.
[Point ring tone]
If the Chaku-Uta Full song in playback has already a range specied, this option is available.
[Free point ring tone]
Specify and set start and end points as a range for the ring tone. Use J to nd a starting point M[Start] Use J to nd an ending point M[End]
Note If selecting "Alarm tone", further select an alarm to set. (Only alarms set to "ON" in advance can be selected.) Some Chaku-Uta Full songs cannot be set as a ring tone. Music data on a microSD card cannot be set as a ring tone. Viewing Images or Lyrics Contained in a Music Data You can view and save jacket images, lyrics, chapter image etc. contained in music data.
MUSIC player screen (P264) M[Menu]
"Jacket image"/"Lyric"/"Chapter image"
Perform the following operations
[Next image]
View the next image/lyrics.
[Prev. image]
View the previous image/lyrics.
[Full view]
View an image/lyrics in full screen.
[Display On/O]
Show/hide jacket image/chapter image or lyrics.
[Save in Databox]*
Save the displayed image/lyrics to "i-mode" folder in "My picture" of
"Data Box". Not available for WMA les/SD-Audio data.
* Do not appear for "Chapter image". Using Playlist You can specify the order of music data to play in a playlist. You can play any songs in the order of your choice from all songs saved in the FOMA terminal and on the microSD card. Creating a Playlist Up to 10 of All songs playlist and up to 99 of SD-Audio playlist can be saved. Up to 99 music data for each playlist can be saved.
M "MUSIC" "MUSIC player" "Playlists"
Select an item All songs playlist WMA playlist SD-Audio playlist
: Display playlists created on the FOMA terminal.
: Display WMA les playlists. Playlist transferred from PC. This playlist cannot be created or edited on the FOMA terminal.
: Display SD-Audio data playlists. Playlist list screen Up to 30 full-pitch or half-pitch characters can be entered.
I[New] Enter a playlist name
Select a playlist I[Add] Select a folder Music Continue on the next page Continued on next page 267
Mark music data to save to the playlist I[Done]
Press M[Menu] to select "Sort", "File property", "Select all", or
"Clear all". Playlist List Screen Sub Menu
Playlist list screen (P267) Move the cursor to a playlist M[Menu] Perform the following operations Playing a Playlist
Playlist list screen (P267) Select a playlist
Move the cursor to a music data C[Play]
Play the selected music data in the order of displayed in the music data list. Playlist music data list screen
[Play]
Play the selected playlist.
[New playlist]
Create a playlist.P267
[Rename]
Change the playlist name.
[Copy playlist]*
Copy the selected playlist and create a new playlist.
"Yes" Enter the name of a new playlist
[Delete playlist]
Delete the selected playlist.
[Multiple choice]
Select and delete playlists. Mark a playlist to delete I[Delete] "Yes"
Press M[Menu] to select "Delete", "Select all", or "Clear all".
* Not available for SD-Audio playlist. Note WMA playlist list screen contains no sub menu items.
<Rename/Delete playlist>
These options are unavailable for "Quick playlist". 268 Music Playlist Music Data List Screen Sub Menu
Playlist music data list screen (P268) Move the cursor to a music data M[Menu]
Perform the following operations I[Add]: Add the music data to the displayed playlist.
[Play]
Play the selected music data.
[Add songs]*1 Add music data to the displayed playlist. Select a folder Mark music data to add I[Done]
Press M[Menu] to select "Sort", "File property", "Select all", or "Clear all".
[Multiple choice]
Select and play multiple music data. Operations during playback are the same with for a playlist. Mark music data to play I[Play]
Press M[Menu] to select "Play", "Delete from list"*1, "Sort", "Select all" or "Clear all".
[Move]*1 Change the order of the selected music data.
[Delete from list]*1 Delete the selected music data from the playlist.
[Search]
Specify "Title", "Artist", "Album", "Genre", or "Year"*2 to search music data. Move the cursor to an item Enter the item I[Search]
Music data that match all specied conditions are displayed. On Search result screen, press M[Menu] to select "Play", "Add to playlist"*1, "Multiple choice", "Save"*3, "Sort" or "File property". Selecting "Save" deletes music data that were not found from the playlist.
[Sort]
Sort music data by the saved information.
[File property]
View or edit information about the selected music data. Move the cursor to an item I[Edit] Edit the item Some items are not editable. The properties of WMA les/SD-Audio data are not editable.
*1 Not available for WMA playlist.
*2 Cannot search in SD-Audio data by "Year".
*3 Do not appear for WMA playlist/SD-Audio playlist. Music Continue on the next page 269 Adding Music Data to a Playlist
M "MUSIC" "MUSIC player" "All songs"
Move the cursor to a music data to save I[Playlist] Select a playlist The music data is added to the selected playlist. I[New]: Create a new playlist with the selected music data. b To save multiple music data Press M[Menu] "Multiple choice" mark music data to save M[Menu] "Add to playlist" select a playlist. Saving Music Data to Quick Playlist For the music data you often listen to, you can save them to
"Quick playlist" by easy steps. To play the saved music data, select "Quick playlist" on the Playlist list screen.
Music data list screen (P263) Move the cursor to a music data to save A(for 1+
seconds) In Turn View Style mode, touch a music data to save for 1+
seconds. Managing Music Data Music data are saved in the "Music" of "Data Box". Delete or move a Chaku-Uta Full songs from Data Box. WMA les cannot be deleted or edited on the FOMA terminal. Use PC for the operations. SD-Audio data cannot be deleted using the FOMA terminal. Use SD-Jukebox to delete it.
M "Data Box" "Music"
Move the cursor to "i-mode"/"Movablecontents"/
a user-dened folder C[Open] Move the cursor to a Chaku-Uta Full song M[Menu]
Perform the following operations T[Switch]: Switch between List view and Grid view. g[Delete]: Delete the selected Chaku-Uta Full song. If "WMA" or "SD-Audio" folder is selected, the operation is the same as for music data playback.P263
[Files]
Play Rename Reset name File property : View or edit information about the selected
: Play the selected Chaku-Uta Full song.
: Change the selected Chaku-Uta Full song name.
: Reset the display name of the selected le to
"Title" - "Artist". Chaku-Uta Full song. Move the cursor to an item I[Edit] Edit the item Some items are not editable. Move the cursor to the edited item and press M[Init.] "Yes" to undo the edit. Jacket image : Save images contained in a Chaku-Uta Full song.
: Save lyrics contained in a Chaku-Uta Full song. P267 P267 270 Music Lyric
[Delete]
One Selected All
[Move]
One Selected All
: Delete a selected Chaku-Uta Full song.
: Select and delete Chaku-Uta Full songs. Mark Chaku-Uta Full songs to delete I[Done]
"Yes"
Press M[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.
: Delete all Chaku-Uta Full songs in a folder. I[Done] "Yes" Enter the Terminal security code Press M[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.
: Move a selected Chaku-Uta Full song. Select a destination folder
: Select and move Chaku-Uta Full songs. Select a destination folder Mark Chaku-Uta Full songs to move I[Done]
Press M[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.
: Move all Chaku-Uta Full songs in a folder. Select a destination folder I[Done] Enter the Terminal security code Press M[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.
[Copy]
This option is not available.
[Set as tone]
Set the selected Chaku-Uta Full song as a ring tone.P266
[Sort]
Set conditions and sort Chaku-Uta Full songs.
[Memory info.]
Handset memory : Display the status of storage space, etc. in External memory : Display the status of storage space, etc. of the
"Data Box". microSD card.
[New folder]
Create a new folder.
[List view/Grid view]
Switch between List view and Grid view. Note If the music data saved in a playlist is deleted or moved between the FOMA terminal and a microSD card, the music data is deleted from the playlist. Sub menu available when a folder is selected is the same as
"My Picture Screen Sub Menu" (P297).
<New folder>
You cannot create a sub folder in a user-dened folder. (Up to 2 levels of folder hierarchy can be created only in "Movable contents" folder.) Icons for Chaku-Uta Full songs in "Data Box"
Icon
Description Playback count is limited (Playable)/reached the playback count limit (Not playable) Not expired (Playable)/expired (Not playable) Files on the microSD card Music Continue on the next page 271 Play in background Using Other Functions while Listening to Music
During a music playback, M[Menu] "BGM"
Icon indicating BGM playback Display the Stand-by display during music playback. or appears at the top of the screen and music information such as song/artist names appears on the Stand-by display. Information such as song title, artist name Note During the background playback, press F/E to adjust the volume. To return to the MUSIC player screen during background playback, press N To stop the background playback, press P "Yes". During background playback, i-motion set for the Stand-by display will not be played. The default Stand-by display is displayed instead. While music data on the microSD card is played in background, the other functions may not be able to access the microSD card. In this case, stop the background playback.
(MUSIC player). 272 Music i-ppli i-ppli 274 Downloading i-ppli from Sites 274 Starting i-ppli 275 Starting i-ppli Automatically 284 Starting i-ppli from a Site or Mail Set i-ppli To 285 Setting i-ppli Stand-by Display i-ppli Stand-by display 285 Viewing Various Information i-ppli info 286 Deleting i-ppli 287 Using Various i-ppli Functions 287 273 i-ppli
"i-ppli" is software for i-mode compatible mobile phones. Downloading various software from i-mode sites allows updating stock price or weather information automatically, playing games without connecting to a network, or using the FOMA terminal more conveniently. Packet communication charges apply. When using overseas, packet communication charges dier from domestic charges.P408 For details about i-ppli, see "Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode]
FOMA version". Downloading i-ppli from Sites You can download software from a site and save it to the FOMA terminal. Up to 1MB of software can be downloaded. Up to100 downloaded software can be saved. However, the savable number may be reduced by the software data size. i-ppli does not support touch operation.
While viewing a site Select a software "Yes"
I[Cancel]: Cancel downloading. b When "Display SW info" is set to "Display"
Software information is displayed. Press C[OK]
"Yes" to download the software.
Download complete "Yes"
The downloaded software starts. Depending on the software, after the software is downloaded, a screen to set operating condition may be displayed. The settings can be changed later from "Software set".P277 Note During download, a conrmation may appear notifying you that the software will use the terminal data (stored data and serial number of the terminal/UIM). Select "Yes" to start downloading. Press I[Detail] to check the details of the terminal data to be used. In this case, the terminal data is sent to the IP (Information provider) via the Internet, and it could be intercepted by a third party. However, this action does not reveal your phone number, postal address, age, or gender to the IP or others. If you attempt to re-download software that has already been downloaded with a dierent UIM, a conrmation asking whether to overwrite the downloaded software appears. Select "Yes" to overwrite. If the maximum number of software which can be saved is reached or if there is not enough memory space, a conrmation for deletion of other i-ppli appears. If there is not enough memory space, you can select i-ppli to delete, checking the required memory space to store a new application. To delete i-ppli, select "Yes" mark software to delete I[Delete] "Yes" to delete the marked software and to start downloading. For Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-ppli, some i-ppli may not be downloaded depending on the IC card data capacity even if software storage space is available. Follow the conrmation screen and delete the software displayed on the screen to start download again. (Some software may not be the deletion target depending on the type of software to download.) Some software deletes the software itself after you start the software and delete data in the IC card. 274 i-ppli If the software download fails due to weak signal reception, the software may be saved partly. If you download again or select the partly saved i-ppli on the Software list, the rest of the le will be downloaded together. Even if the software download fails due to weak signal reception after old software was deleted to increase the available space on the FOMA terminal, the old software cannot be restored. Some software that starts immediately after being downloaded cannot be saved. Display SW info Viewing i-ppli Information at Download Time Set whether to display software information when downloading the software.
M "i-ppli" "i-ppli settings" "Display SW info" "Display"/"Not display"
Downloading a Mail-Connected i-ppli Note the followings if you download a mail-connected i-ppli. If you download a mail-connected i-ppli, a folder for the mail-
connected i-ppli is automatically created in Inbox and Outbox. A 0created folder takes the downloaded mail-connected i-ppli name and it cannot be changed. Up to 17 (100 including all other i-ppli) mail-connected i-ppli can be saved. If you attempt to download a mail-connected i-ppli, which will use an existing folder for a mail-connected i-ppli saved in the FOMA terminal, the attempt will be denied. If only a folder for a mail-connected i-ppli is left in the FOMA terminal, and you attempt to download a mail-connected i-ppli again which uses the same folder, the folder can be used. If the folder is not used, you can delete it and create a new folder. A mail-connected i-ppli cannot be downloaded if you do not create a folder for it. The folder for the compatible mail-connected i-ppli cannot be deleted with the mail-connected i-ppli left in the FOMA terminal. The folder can be deleted when a mail-connected i-ppli is not in the folder. In this case, folders created in both Inbox and Outbox are deleted at a time. When you delete an mail-connected i-ppli, you can select whether to delete the automatically created folder at once. However, if protected mails are in the folder, the folder cannot be deleted. Starting i-ppli
Stand-by display I(for 1+ seconds) I[Switch]: Switch the view of the Software list screen. g[]/T[]: Scroll to the screen to previous/next page. b Icons on the Software list screen Icon Description Software list screen Standard i-ppli i- ppliDX Auto start set i-ppli i-ppli downloaded via SSL communication i-ppli set to Stand-by display Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-ppli i-ppli Continue on the next page Continued on next page 275 Icon Description The iC transfer service is used yet i-ppli is not downloadedP290 Partly saved i-ppli
Select a software If "Network set" of "Software set" is set to "Conrm every session", a conrmation whether to allow the communication appears. Select "Yes"/"No". b To exit an i-ppli Press P "Yes". Starting software from other software Some software can start a specied i-ppli without returning to the Software list screen. If the software to be started is not saved in the FOMA terminal, you need to download it. If the software to be started is not specied, follow on-screen instructions to select a software. If a security error occurs If you attempt to perform operations that are not permitted for the software, a security error is indicated and the error content is logged in "Security error history".P286 If a problem occurs with software If a problem occurs with the software, you can check the contents using the Trace info.P286 To i-ppli creators If software does not work as expected at creation process, you may use the Trace info for your reference. 276 i-ppli Note Some software performs communication while running. You can change the settings in "Network set" of "Software set" not to automatically perform communication.P277 If an incoming voice or videophone call arrives when the software is running, you can answer the call pausing the software. After the call is terminated, the previous screen returns. Even when the software is running, you can receive mail or MessageR/F. The software keeps running, and
, or etc. appears at the top of the screen. To view the received mail or MessageR/F, terminate the software. Images used by an i-ppli* or data you entered may be automatically sent to the server via the Internet.
* Images used by the i-ppli include: images captured with Camera that is started from a Camera-linked (connected) application, images obtained using infrared communication function of the i-ppli, images downloaded from a site or web site, and images the i-ppli obtained from Data Box.
, You cannot start software downloaded using a dierent UIM. Depending on i-ppli, the tone may not sound. Depending on the software, the IP (Information provider) can access programs saved on your FOMA terminal and directly disable their use. In this case, the software cannot be run or updated, however, it can still be deleted, and the software information can still be viewed. To use the software again, the software needs to perform communication for the software suspend cancelation. Contact your IP. Depending on the software, the IP may send data to a software saved on your FOMA terminal. In the event that the IP disables/re-enables the software or sends data, your terminal performs communication and blinks. No packet communication charges apply in this case. Software List Screen Sub Menu
Software list screen (P275) Move the cursor to a software M[Menu] Perform the following operations
[Set i-ppli To]
Set conditions to start the selected software.P285
[Auto start time]
Set whether to start the selected software automatically, and set the date and time to start if the auto start is specied.P284
[Software set]
Set the selected software settings.P277
[Software info]
Display the selected software information such as a name and version of the i-ppli. The displayed items dier depending on the software.
[Upgrade]
Upgrade the selected software.
[Delete]
Delete a software.P287 Note
<Upgrade>
During an update, a conrmation may appear notifying you that the upgrading will use terminal data (stored data or serial number of the terminal/UIM). Select "Yes" to start downloading. Press I[Detail] to check the details of the terminal data to be used. In this case, the terminal data is sent to the IP (Information provider) via the Internet, and it could be intercepted by a third party. However, this action does not reveal your phone number, postal address, age, or gender to the IP or others. Setting i-ppli Operating Conditions Set operating conditions for each software program. You can set a software to automatically perform communication while it is running or set separately whether to allow to browse icon information, Phonebook, etc. Some items may not be changed depending on the software.
Software list screen (P275) Move cursor to the software M[Menu] "Software set" Perform the following operations
[Stand-by display]
Set the selected software as the Stand-by display.P285
[Network set]
Set whether to allow communications while software is running.
[Stand-by network set]
Set whether to allow communications while i-ppli is set as the Stand-by display. i-ppli Continue on the next page Continued on next page 277
[Icon info]
Set whether to allow software to use the icons of mail, MessageR/F, in/out of service area, battery level, or Manner mode.
[View P. book/call records]
Set whether to allow software to browse the Phonebook, redial, and call history when the software is started.
[Change ring tone/image]
Set whether to allow software to automatically change an image or melody set for a ring tone or the Stand-by display when the software is started.
[Program guide key setting]
Set whether to set as i-ppli Program guide that activates from 1Seg. Only 1 i-ppli can be set. Note Depending on the settings, the software may not connect to the network, or Icon info (unread mail or battery level, etc.) becomes unavailable.
<Network set>
When set to "No", the software may not start, or real-time information may not be provided. When set to "Yes", the software automatically connects to the network. While connected, packet communication charges apply.
<Icon info>
When set to "Yes", information about the status of the terminal as indicated by the presence of icons for unread mail, messages, battery level, Manner mode, within the service area, and out of service area may be sent to IP (Information provider) via the Internet in the same manner as the "Phone/Terminal and UIM ID" is sent. The icon information could be intercepted by a third party. Software that needs icon data may not function if set to "No". Pre-installed i-ppli To use the deleted pre-installed i-ppli, visit site, "WOW LG"
in iMenu for download.P133 i-ppli does not support touch operation. Mingle Mangle This is a game you set out 3 mingles (characters) of the same type in crosswise or lengthwise direction swapping adjacent mingles.
Software list screen (P275) "Mingle Mangle"
Press any key (Dial keys, *, #, K, C, M, or Q) Perform the following operations
[ (Original)]
Play game by selecting a square of "77" or "88".
[ (Exploration)]
Save out mingles by clearing instructions set to each exploration course. If you clear, the information is automatically saved.
[ (Ranking)]
Display the ranking.
[ (Setup)]
Set sound on/o or vibrator on/o.
[ (Help)]
Display the description of the game and how to play.
[ (Exit)]
Terminate the i-ppli. 278 i-ppli Sudoku Cafe Enter a number from 1 to 9 in an empty cell. However, the same number cannot be entered more than once for each vertical or horizontal row, or for a block of 33 cells framed with a thick line.
(McDonald's TOKUSURU KEITAI Application) The title screen of the game appears.
Software list screen (P275) "Sudoku Cafe"
Press any key (Dial keys, *, #, K, C, M, Q) The menu screen appears.
Perform the following operations
[ (Tutorial)]
Learn how to play the game through practice.
[ (Record mode)]
Compete how fast you can solve a puzzle.
[ (Custom mode)]
Create a new puzzle and play it.
[ (Environment settings)]
Choose which function to use, (Scanning function) or
(Line function), (Sound) (ON)/ (OFF),
(Vibration) (ON)/ (OFF), or set (Background).
[ (Ranking)]
Display the ranking.
[ (Help)]
Display the description of the game and how to play.
[ (Exit)]
Terminate the i-ppli.
* Screenshot is an example and may dier from actual screen. 2009 McDonald's You can download the discount coupon "" to be used at McDonald's. To use "", subscribe to "
", then select and set a coupon of your choice from the application and hold the terminal up to a scanning device placed at McDonald's. For information about "McDonald's TOKUSURU KEITAI application", visit the McDonald's ocial site, " ". i-mode site: "iMenu" "" "/" "
"" may not be used at some McDonald's restaurants. Use "" in an area where " " cannot be used. Functions or service contents for "McDonald's TOKUSURU KEITAI application" may be changed. Packet communication charges apply.
i-ppli Continue on the next page Continued on next page 279 b To use ""
Activate this application Select a coupon and number to use Press "" to complete setting for the coupon information Order by holding the terminal on a scanning function in a restaurants. 2 (Rakuoku Exhibition Application 2)
* Screenshot is an example and may dier from actual screen.
"2 (Rakuoku Exhibition Application 2)" is a convenient application to enable you to easily exhibit your goods on Rakuoku at anytime and from anywhere. With the instruction guide, even a rst-time exhibitor can use it easily. Using convenient functions such as capturing/
editing pictures, saving records, you can exhibit your goods in shorter time than you do on a site. When using for the rst time, you need to agree to " (terms of service)". Packet communication charges apply to use this service. For details about Rakuoku, see "Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode]
FOMA version". To exhibit your goods on Rakuoku, you need to subscribe to Rakuten membership and exhibitor membership. For information about Rakuoku, visit the i-mode site. i-mode site: "iMenu" ""
280 i-ppli QR code to access the site
(i-ppli Banking)
* Screenshot is an example and may dier from actual screen.
(i-ppli banking) is an i-ppli for conveniently using mobile banking (check the balance or activity statement of your account, deposit or transfer money, etc.) on the FOMA terminal. By entering password you set when activating the i-ppli, mobile banking of up to 2 nancial institutions can be used. Making a payment for invoice or payment notice by the Pay-easy service is also possible. To use mobile banking by i-ppli banking, you need to have an account of the nancial institution and subscribe to the Internet banking service of the nancial institution. Packet communication charges apply to use this service. For details about i-ppli banking, see "Mobile Phone User's Guide
[i-mode] FOMA version". For information about i-ppli banking, visit the i-mode site. i-mode site: "iMenu" "" ""
QR code to access the site Suica (Mobile Suica Setup i-ppli)
* Screenshot is an example and may dier from actual screen.
"Suica (Mobile Suica Setup i-ppli)"
is an i-ppli provided by NTT DOCOMO. This application enables you to make necessary initial settings before using Osaifu-Keitai compatible service "Mobile Suica" provided by East Japan Railway Company. After making initial settings by this application, follow on-screen instructions to download the Mobile Suica application from the East Japan Railway Company site and sign up as a member. When using for the rst time, you need to agree to "()". Packet communication charges apply to use this service. This application can be deleted after initial settings are complete, but the set area in the IC card remains occupied. Reset all data in the IC card (hereafter referred to as the full format) to use the area. To perform the full format, visit the docomo Shop. If the full format is performed, all data in the IC card are deleted. To use the Mobile Suica service after performing the full format, make initial settings again by this application. For information about Mobile Suica, visit the i-mode site. i-mode site: "iMenu" "" "" "
Suica"
"Mobile Suica" is a registered trademark of East Japan Railway Company. Google (Mobile Google Map) Display a map and easily search area information, shop information, or user-created contents. In addition, switch to the aerial photo mode or see Street View images. Also, search transportations to the destination by searching the route and navigate to the destination. b Map screen 2009 Google - Map data 2009 ZENRIN b Key operations on the Map screen Operation M I Description Display the menu Search (shop or service information in the area, search location and display on the map) i-ppli Continue on the next page Continued on next page 281 Description b Application functions Operation K C 1 2 3 0
Move a cursor Context menu (address of the present location, route to/from the location, Street View, save to favorites, search surrounding area) Zoom out Switch to map/aerial photo mode Zoom in Display the present location Save to favorites/display favorites When using for the rst time, agree to the terms of service. Packet communication charges apply to use this service. Subscription to Pake-hodai/Pake-hodai full/Pake-hodai double is recommended. For details, refer to " (Help)" of the menu. DCMX (DCMX Credit Appli) Membership registration/Screening*1 Card information settings Use No need to charge. Enjoy shopping without signature*2 only by holding the terminal with card information settings on the scanning device at stores with the following iD mark. Check Check DCMX service contents, available balance*3, and usage from application. Change Make the model change setting or update the valid period from application.
*1 The online screening is conducted at the time of subscription for DCMX mini. For subscriptions other than DCMX mini, the terminal is connected to the i-mode subscription page.
*2 Under certain conditions, a security code may be required.
*3 Available only for DCMX mini.
* Screenshot is an example and may dier from actual screen.
"DCMX" is a credit service supporting "iD", provided by NTT DOCOMO. DCMX includes DCMX mini that provides up to 10,000 yen/month credit and DCMX/DCMX GOLD services that provide more credit and DOCOMO points than DCMX mini. You can use mobile phone credit of DCMX mini right now by simply sign-up from this application. 282 i-ppli For details on service contents or subscription procedures, visit the i-mode site for DCMX. i-mode site: "iMenu" "DCMX iD"
QR code to access the site Note When activating this application for the rst time, agree to "
(precautions for use)" before use. Packet communication charges apply for settings/operations. iD (iD Appli) b iD appli
* Screenshot is an example and may dier from actual screen.
"iD" is convenient electronic money using credit settlement system. Simply by holding Osaifu-Keitai with the credit card information set or iD compatible card on the scanning device at stores, you can easily and conveniently do shopping. You can register up to 2 types of credit card information on Osaifu-Keitai, so use them according to privileges or stores. Depending on the card issuer, cashing is also supported. To use iD on Osaifu-Keitai, besides subscribing to the iD compatible card issuer, it is necessary to make the settings on iD appli or Card application provided by a card issuer. Depending on the card, it is necessary to nish the settings on iD appli and then make the settings on Card application. The cost for iD service (annual fee, etc.) varies depending on the card issuer. For information about iD, visit the i-mode site for iD. i-mode site: "iMenu" "" "iD"
QR code to access the site Cautions on Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-ppli DOCOMO assumes no responsibility for information set on the IC card. G (G-GUIDE Program List Remote Controller)
* Screenshot is an example and may dier from actual screen. An applicable channel to your location appears. This is a convenient application which combines a TV program list and a Audio/Video remote controller, and is free of monthly usage charges. You can easily obtain the program information on the digital or analogue terrestrial broadcasting, or BS digital broadcasting whenever, anywhere you want. You can check the titles, contents, as well as start/end time of the desired program. You can activate 1Seg from the program list, and vice versa. Programming your DVD hard disc recorder to record your favorite program via the Internet is available. (The recorder must support remote programming. And the initial setting has to be made to enable this application function.) You can search your desired programs by keyword such as genre or your favorite actor/actress names or pick-up-
keyword on top of the main screen. i-ppli Continue on the next page Continued on next page 283 You can use this application as remote controllers for televisions, video players, or DVD players. (Not all devices are supported.) For the rst time use, you need to congure the settings and agree to the license agreement. Packet communication charges apply. For overseas use, set "Set Date&Time" of the FOMA terminal to Japan time. For details about G-GUIDE Program List Remote Controller, see
"Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode] FOMA version". b Setting a timer for watching 1Seg program You can select a program to watch from the program list of this application and set a timer for watching the program. Setting a timer for watching a program:
Activate this application, select a program to set a timer for, and select " (Set)" from " (Set timer)" of the menu. After the timer setting screen appears, follow on-screen instructions to set a timer. b Setting recording schedule function remotely If your DVD recorder supports remote programming, you can use this application via the Internet to set the recorder timer remotely to record a TV program from the TV program time table of this application. The initial setting is required to enable the remote programming function. Making the initial setting:
a Setup your DVD recorder for the Internet connection (Refer to the instruction manual of your DVD recorder for the setting procedure). b Activate this application, select " (Remote record schedule)" from the menu. Follow the displayed guidance to complete the initial setting. Setting TV program recording schedule:
Select a program to be recorded from the TV program schedule, and select " (Remote record schedule)" from the menu. Your DVD recorder designated by the initial setting can be programmed via the Internet to schedule recording the selected program. Packet communication charges apply. 284 i-ppli Starting i-ppli Automatically Date and Time have to be set in advance to start an i-ppli automatically.P53 Auto start set Setting Software Auto-start You can set whether to start a software automatically.
M "i-ppli" "i-ppli settings"
"Auto start set" "ON"/"OFF"
Auto start time Setting Start Date/Time Set the date and time when the software starts automatically. This option can be set for up to 3 software.
Software list screen (P275) Move the cursor to a software M[Menu] "Auto start time"
Perform the following operations
[Time interval set]
Start a software automatically with set intervals.
[Start time set]
Mark this if you set the time when an i-ppli automatically start.
[Time]*
Set the time and date for auto start.
[Repeat]*
Select a repeating pattern for auto start. 1 Time : The software starts automatically only once at the set date and time. day. Daily
: The software starts automatically at the set time every Weekly : The software starts automatically at the set time on the specied days of the week every week. Mark days to start automatically every week I[Done]
* Available when "Start time set" is marked.
I[Done]
Note The software will not automatically start in the following:
- The FOMA terminal power is o
- A call or communication is in progress
- Other functions are running
- Lock all (even while Terminal security code entry screen is displayed) is set
- Omakase Lock is set
- "i-ppli" in "Data access lock" is "ON" (even while Terminal security code entry screen is displayed)
- The Auto start time is the same as the scheduled time for software update, an alarm, Schedule event, or To do alarm
- The i-ppli was downloaded using another UIM
- The i-ppli has "Network set" to "Conrm every session"
- The same i-ppli has a set time interval to start within 10 minutes Software will not start at the set time if other software is running at that time. Also, the software may not start while other functions are running. If auto start fails, the icon displays the Auto start info (P286). after the Auto start info is viewed. appears on the Stand-by display. Selecting disappears Set i-ppli To Starting i-ppli from a Site or Mail Set whether to start a software from a site, mail, infrared communication, bar code reader, or 1Seg data broadcasting sites. Also, you can make settings for when holding the FOMA terminal on the scanning device supporting the IC card functions.
Software list screen (P275) Move the cursor to a software M[Menu] "Set i-ppli To"
Mark items to allow to start a software I[Done]
i-ppli Stand-by display Setting i-ppli Stand-by Display Set a software of the selected i-ppli as the Stand-by display.
Software list screen (P275) Move the cursor to a software M[Menu] "Software set"
"Stand-by display" "ON"
i-ppli Continue on the next page Continued on next page 285
appears on top of the Note Only 1 i-ppli can be set as Stand-by display. Some i-ppli cannot be set as Stand-by display. While on i-ppli Stand-by display, display Turning the FOMA terminal's power on while i-ppli Stand-by display is set, a conrmation whether to start the i-ppli Stand-
by display appears. Selecting "No" releases the i-ppli Stand-by display. If an i-ppli that performs communication is set as Stand-by display, the i-ppli may not work correctly due to weak signal reception. While Lock all is activated or i-ppli is restricted its use in Data access lock, i-ppli Stand-by display is not displayed. When Stand-by i-ppli is set, the Receive results screen for SMS does not appear, and the ring tone and vibrator for SMS do not work. Operating i-ppli Set as Stand-by Display as a Regular i-ppli
Q on i-ppli Stand-by display i-ppli starts and becomes available to perform. i-ppli Stand-by display release Releasing i-ppli Stand-by Display i-ppli running P "Cancel" "Yes"
Selecting "End" returns to the i-ppli Stand-by display.
Note You can also release the i-ppli Stand-by display by following:
Press M in Stand-by "i-ppli" "i-ppli settings" "End stand-by display" "Cancel" "Yes"
286 i-ppli i-ppli info Viewing Various Information
M "i-ppli" "i-ppli info" Perform the following operations
[Security error history]
Display the error history of the software that were terminated due to security errors. I[Delete]: Delete the selected error history entry.
[Auto start info]
Check if software succeeded in auto start. You can view the information and the latest date and time when the software started for up to 3 software set for auto start. Start : The software automatically started successfully Start : The software failed to start automatically Start : The software has not started because the set time has not come
[Trace info]
Display trace information on a software. I[Delete]: Delete trace information on a software.
[Standby error info]
Display error information of an i-ppli Stand-by display that did not terminate properly. I[Delete]: Delete error information. Note Untraced history or information will not be displayed. Deleting i-ppli
Software list screen (P275) Move the cursor to a software M[Menu] Perform the following operations
[Delete]
This item Selected items : Select and delete software.
: Delete the selected software. Mark software to delete I[Delete] "Yes"
All items
: Delete all software. Enter the Terminal security code "Yes"
Note When the i-ppli to delete is set for auto start or Stand-by display, a conrmation whether to delete the software appears. Select "Yes" to delete. Some Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-ppli delete data on the IC card or require to delete data on IC card starting i-ppli before the deletion, etc. Some Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-ppli cannot be deleted. Using Various i-ppli Functions You can connect to a site or use the FOMA terminal functions while an i-ppli is running. You need to download the supported i-ppli in advance. Some i-ppli may operate the functions dierently, or may be unavailable to use some functions. Using Camera When the camera is activated by i-ppli, captured images will not be saved in "My picture" of "Data Box", however, they are saved and used as a component of the i-ppli.
Use i-ppli to capture an image with the camera Using Bar Code Reader The camera can be used via an i-ppli to read a QR code and Japan Article Number code. The read result can be used and saved by the software.
Use i-ppli to read a code Using Infrared Communication
Use i-ppli to perform infrared communication Note You may not be able to exchange data with some devices even if they have the infrared communication capability. You can also start an i-ppli by receiving i-ppli activation data via infrared communication. When performing infrared communication, any connection with sites or mail transfer will be canceled. i-ppli Continue on the next page 287 Osaifu-Keitai Osaifu-Keitai 290 Starting Osaifu-Keitai Compatible i-ppli 291 Locking IC Card Function IC card lock 292 289 Osaifu-Keitai Osaifu-Keitai is equipped with the IC card and enables you to pay by holding the FOMA terminal on the scanning device at shops, etc. In addition, with this function, you can deposit electronic money and check your balance or view usage history using transmission. In order to use safely, security*1 is fully secure. For details about Osaifu-Keitai, see "Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode] FOMA version". To use Osaifu-Keitai compatible services, you need to download Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-ppli from Osaifu-Keitai compatible sites*2 and make the setting.
*1 Omakase Lock (P122) and the IC card lock (P292) can be used.
(Osaifu-Keitai)"
*2 "iMenu" " (Menu List)" "
Data (including electronic money, points, etc.) saved in the IC card may be lost or altered due to the FOMA terminal malfunction (Note that you will be asked to delete data if you leave the FOMA terminal for repairs, etc.). For the service such as reissue, restoration, temporary storage, or transfer of data except for the transfer by iC transfer service, contact the provider of Osaifu-Keitai compatible service. Make sure to use a service that provides a backup service for important data. DOCOMO shall not be liable for any loss or alteration of data saved in the IC card, or damage related to Osaifu-Keitai service caused by any reason such as malfunction or model change. If the FOMA terminal is stolen or lost, immediately contact your provider of Osaifu-Keitai compatible service about handling the trouble. iC Transfer Service iC transfer service*1 enables you to transfer*2 data on the IC card of Osaifu-Keitai to new Osaifu-Keitai collectively*3 when replacing Osaifu-Keitai such as model change or repairing. After transferring data on the IC card, you can easily use Osaifu-Keitai compatible services again just by downloading*4 Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-ppli. Use the iC transfer service at your nearby docomo Shop, etc. For details about the iC transfer service, see "Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode] FOMA version".
*1 Both the transfer source and destination mobile phone must be the iC transfer service compatible FOMA terminals. Go to your nearby docomo Shop, etc. for using this service.
*2 This service does not "copy" but "transfer" data. Therefore, data on the IC card does not remain in the FOMA terminal of the replacing source. In some cases, the iC transfer service cannot be used. Use the backup service for Osaifu-Keitai compatible service.
*3 Some Osaifu-Keitai compatible services are not supported by the iC transfer service. Only the data on the IC card of the Osaifu-
Keitai compatible service that is supported by the iC transfer service can be transferred.
*4 Packet communication charges apply for downloading i-ppli or various settings. 290 Osaifu-Keitai Starting Osaifu-Keitai Compatible i-ppli When starting or downloading Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-ppli for the rst time, the UIM in use is registered as a owner of the IC card. After the second time, the IC card function cannot be used without inserting the UIM registered as the IC owner. If you use the IC card function with another UIM, insert the UIM that is compatible with the IC card and delete all Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-ppli to use the IC card function.
M "Osaifu-Keitai" "IC card content"
List of Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-ppli appears. Select i-ppli to start. Software list screenP273 Note You can connect to i-mode and search for Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-ppli by performing M "Osaifu-Keitai"
"Search by i-mode" "Yes". You can activate the DCMX credit appli by performing M
"Osaifu-Keitai" "DCMX". Using Osaifu-Keitai Hold the mark of the FOMA terminal on the scanning device to use as electronic money for payment or trac ticket. This function can be used without starting the software. The sticker is attached at the back side of the Back cover to keep the performance of FeliCa function. Do not remove the sticker. Hold the mark on the center of the scanning part. mark Scanning part of the scanning device Osaifu-Keitai Continue on the next page Continued on next page 291 mark on the scanning device. Note Do not subject the FOMA terminal to severe shocks when holding the If the mark held on the scanning device is not recognized, try moving the FOMA terminal around. the mark on You can use Osaifu-Keitai functions by holding the scanning device even during a call or i-mode connection, or when the FOMA terminal is turned o (Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-ppli cannot be activated). However, when the battery pack is not inserted or the battery pack is not used for a long time even if it is inserted, or the FOMA terminal is left without charging after sounding the battery alarm, this function may be disabled. Charge the battery pack. When the compatible i-ppli may be activated. You can set the FOMA terminal to light or blink the illumination when the scanning device recognizes the FOMA terminal. P110 mark is held on the scanning device, Osaifu-Keitai IC card lock Locking IC Card Function This function allows you to prevent the IC card functions from being used by others. IC card lock set Locking IC Card Functions when Turning Power On/O
M "Osaifu-Keitai" "IC card lock set"
Enter the Terminal security code Perform the following operations
[IC card lock(Power ON)]
Set whether to lock the IC card functions when the FOMA terminal is turned on.
[IC card lock(Power OFF)]
Set whether to lock the IC card functions when the FOMA terminal is turned o. Note When removing the battery pack, the IC card function is disabled regardless of the IC card lock setting. While the IC card lock is activated, downloading, upgrading, or deleting operation may be unavailable depending on Osaifu-
Keitai compatible i-ppli.
Stand-by display C(for 1+ seconds) When the IC card lock is set, appears on the Stand-by display. Canceling the lock Stand-by display C(for 1+ seconds) enter the Terminal security code. 292 Osaifu-Keitai Data Management Exchanging Data via Infrared Communication Using Infrared Communication Infrared communication 327 Sending and Receiving Data One by One Send/Receive via infrared communication 328 Sending and Receiving All Data Send/Receive all via infrared communication 329 Using Infrared Remote Control Function 330 Making Full Use of Document Viewer Viewing a Document 330 Data Box 294 Making Full Use of Images Displaying Images Picture viewer 296 Editing Still Images Edit image 302 Creating Slideshows Slide show 305 Making Full Use of Moving Pictures Playing Moving Pictures/i-motion Moving picture/i-motion player 307 Editing Moving Pictures/i-motion Edit moving pictures/i-motion 312 Using a Playlist 313 Making Full Use of Melody Playing a Melody Melody player 314 Making Full Use of Memory Card microSD Cards 317 Using a microSD Card 321 Exchanging Personal Information between the FOMA Terminal and a microSD Card 322 Managing a microSD Card 325 Using the FOMA Terminal as a microSD Card Reader/Writer 326 293 Data Box Data Box contains the items and folders shown in the following tables. Data obtained from sites or i-mode mail are saved to folders by category. Up to 18 folders each can be added to My picture, Music, i-motion, Melody, and Kisekae Tool. Up to 10 folders can be added to Music&Video Channel. Data saved in My picture, Music, i-motion, and Melody (except for data in the "Decomail picto" folder) can be moved to other folders within the category. Data saved in the Music&Video Channel can be moved from the "Distributed program" folder to another folder within the category, or can be moved among the folders other than
"Distributed program". Deco-mail pictograms obtained from sites or mail are directly saved to the "Decomail picto" folder. Only Deco-mail pictograms can be saved in the "Deco-mail picto"
folder. My picture i-mode Camera Decomail picture Decomail picto Still images, etc. obtained from sites or mails Still images captured by the Camera Pre-installed pictures for Deco-mail, etc Deco-mail pictograms pre-installed or downloaded from sites or mail Pre-installed still images Still images that can be used for frames or stamps Still images, etc. obtained via infrared communication User-dened slideshows, etc. Preinstalled Item Data transfer Slide show 294 Data Management My picture microSD Still images saved on the microSD card Camera images Other images Decomail picto Still images captured by the Camera Still images, etc. Deco-mail pictograms that are copied from the FOMA terminal Search by i-mode Connect to i-mode Music i-mode Playlists Chaku-Uta Full songs downloaded from sites Playlists created with the FOMA terminal or created with Windows Media Player and forwarded from a PC Playback of the last played music/playlist WMA les saved on the microSD card SD-Audio data saved on the microSD card Connect to i-mode Movablecontents Chaku-Uta Full saved on the microSD card Resume play WMA SD-Audio Searcy by i-mode Music&Video Ch Distributed program i-motion i-mode Music programs distributed from Music&Video Channel Moving pictures/i-motion downloaded from sites or mails Moving pictures captured by the Video Camera Pre-installed moving pictures Playlists created with the FOMA terminal Camera Preinstalled Playlists i-motion Data transfer microSD Searcy by i-mode Melody i-mode Preinstalled Data transfer microSD Searcy by i-mode Kisekae Tool i-mode Preinstalled Searcy by i-mode Motion Oekaki Moving pictures, etc. obtained via infrared communication Moving pictures or i-motion saved on the microSD card Movablecontents Copyright protected moving pictures or i-motion moved from the FOMA terminal Sound-only i-motion Moving pictures captured by the Video Camera Audio Video Connect to i-mode Melodies, etc. downloaded from sites or mails Pre-installed melodies Melodies, etc. obtained via infrared communication Melody Melodies saved on the microSD card Connect to i-mode Kisekae Tool acquired from sites Pre-installed Kisekae Tool Connect to i-mode Dierences on display name, le name, and title Still images, Flash movies, moving pictures/i-motion, and melodies saved in the FOMA terminal have multiple names. Display name Names that appear on list screens in Data Box File name Title*
or on the Display/playback screens Names that appear on a PC or other mobile phones Names for management of L-03B (cannot be edited)
* Still images and Flash movies do not have titles. Icons displayed on the le list screen Icon
Description Files that can be sent, or moved/cannot be moved to a microSD card File restricted Files with the UIM security function activated Files on the microSD card Files banned from being redistributed File types (JPEG/GIF/Flash/MP4 (extension:
mp4)/MP4 (extension: 3gp)/SMF/MFi/Others
(unsupported les))
* Icons that appear on the screen vary depending on the list screen type. Data Management Continue on the next page 295 Picture viewer Displaying Images You can display still images you captured, or obtained from sites or i-mode mails. b Available le formats File format*
Pixels JPEG, GIF JPEG, Progressive JPEG: Up to 25921944 dots GIF: Up to 800600 dots Up to 5MB jpg, gif File size File extension
* Some les in a compatible format may not be displayed.
M "Data Box" "My picture"
I[New]: Create a folder. My picture screen 296 Data Management
Move the cursor to a folder C[Open]
I[Mail]: Display the Compose message screen with the selected le attached. g[Delete]: Delete the selected le. T[Switch]: Switch between List view and Grid view. Icons displayed on the list screen P295 Still image le list screen a Display name of the selected le b Type of the selected le
Move the cursor to a le C[View]
Still image display screen a Sequential number/number of saved les Display the sequential number of the current le and the total number of saved les in the folder. b Display name of the le b Key operations on the Still image display screen Operation Description J C[Full]
I[Mail]
F/E T[Zoom]
K g[Delete]
Display the previous/next le Hide the soft keys and display a full image/
restore to the original display size Send the displayed image via mailP138 Enlarge the image/restore to the previous ratio Use M[] to enlarge the image and I[] to restore to the previous ratio Move the display position when the image is enlarged The entire image and the displayed area appear at the edge of the screen. Delete the selected le Note Some images that are not captured with L-03B may not be displayed on the Still image le list screen. My Picture Screen Sub Menu
My picture screen (P296) Move the cursor to a folder M[Menu] Perform the following operations
[Rename]
Change the name of the selected folder. Up to 30 full-pitch or half-
pitch characters can be entered.
[New folder]
Create a new folder. You cannot create a sub folder in the created folder.
[Delete]
One
: Delete the selected folder.
"Yes" Enter the Terminal security code Selected : Select and delete folders. Mark folders to delete I[Done] "Yes" Enter the Terminal security code Press M[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all. All
: Delete all user-dened folders I[Done] "Yes" Enter the Terminal security code Press M[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.
[Grid view]
This option is not available.
[Sort]
Set conditions and sort les in a folder.
[Memory info.]
Handset memory : Display the status of storage space, etc. in External memory : Display the status of storage space, etc. of the
"Data Box". microSD card.
[Folder property]
Display the size of the selected folder and the number of les in the folder. Data Management Continue on the next page 297 Still Image File List Screen Sub Menu
Still image le list screen (P296) Move the cursor to a le M[Menu] Perform the following operations
[Files]
View Edit Rename File property : Display the le name, size, and type, etc. of the
: Display the selected le.
: Edit the selected le.P302
: Change the display name of the selected le. selected le.P301
[Delete]
One
: Delete the selected le. Selected : Select and delete les. Mark les to delete I[Done] "Yes"
Press M[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.
: Delete all les in the folder. I[Done] "Yes" Enter the Terminal security code Press M[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.
: Move the selected le. Select a destination folder Selected : Select and move les. All
: Move all les in the folder. Select a destination folder Mark les to move I[Done]
Press M[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all. Select a destination folder I[Done] Enter the Terminal security code Press M[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all. All
[Move]
One
[Copy]
One
: Copy the selected le. Select a destination folder Selected : Select and copy les. All
: Copy all les in the folder Select a destination folder Mark les to copy I[Done]
Press M[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all. Select a destination folder I[Done] Enter the Terminal security code Press M[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.
[Send via]*
: Create i-mode mail with the selected le attached. Go to Step 2 in "Composing and Sending i-mode Mail" (P138). IrDA : Send a le via infrared communication. Picasa : Upload the selected le to Picasa.
[Set as]
Set the selected le as the Stand-by display or incoming call screen.
[Sort]
Set conditions and sort les.
[Memory info.]
Handset memory : Display the status of storage space, etc. in External memory : Display the status of storage space, etc. of the
"Data Box". microSD card.
[New folder]
This option is not available.
[List view/Grid view]
Switch the le display format. 298 Data Management
[Store in center]
Save les at the Data Center.P132
* Not available for Flash movies. Still Image Display Screen Sub Menu
Still image display screen (P296) M[Menu]
Perform the following operations
[Edit image]*
Edit the displayed le.P302
[Delete]
Delete the displayed le.
[Edit title]
Edit the display name of the displayed le.
[File property]
Display the le name, size, and type, etc. of the selected le.P301
[Send via]*
: Create i-mode mail with the selected le attached. Go to Step 2 in "Composing and Sending i-mode Mail" (P138). IrDA : Send a le via infrared communication. Picasa : Upload the selected le to Picasa.
[Full screen]
View the image in Full screen. In Full screen view, the following operations are available. C/Q: Return the full screen view to the original view. J: Display the previous/next image.
[Zoom]*
Display an enlarged image. While zooming in, the following operations are available. M[]: Enlarge the image I[]: Return to the previous zoom ratio K: Move the display position C/Q: Return the enlarged display to the original display The entire image and the displayed area appear at the edge of the screen.
[Set as]
Set the displayed le as the Stand-by display or incoming call screen.
[Store in center]
Save the displayed le at the Data Center. Enter the Terminal security code "Yes"
[Motion Oekaki]
Edit the displayed le with Motion OekakiTM.P341
[View settings]
Set the image display format, zoom ratio, or interval between slideshow frames.P301
* Not available for Flash movies. Note
<Picasa>
The FOMA terminal connects to the Picasa site. Log in the site and upload les by mail attachment. The captured image is retained up to the compose message screen for uploading so make sure the receiver's address. A le of more than 2MB cannot be uploaded. For details, visit Picasa site (http://picasa.google.co.jp/) via PC, etc. Data Management Continue on the next page 299 Viewing Flash Movies You can view Flash movies downloaded from sites, etc. b Available le formats File format*
Flash File size Up to 100KB File extension swf
* Some les in a compatible le format may not be played.
M "Data Box" "My picture"
Move the cursor to a folder C[Open]
Move the cursor to a le C[View]
b Key operations on the Flash movie playback screen Operation J/H C[Full]
I[Mail]
T[Retry]
F/E K g[Delete]
Description Display the previous/next le Hide the soft keys and display a full image/
restore to the original display size Send the displayed image by mailP138 Play the Flash movie from the beginning Enlarge the image/restore to the previous ratio Move the display position when the image is enlarged The entire image and the displayed area appear at the edge of the screen. Delete the selected le Flash Movie Playback Screen Sub Menu
Flash movie playback screen (P300) M[Menu]
The Flash movie playback screen sub menu is the same as
"Still Image Display Screen Sub Menu" (P299). However, "Edit image", "Send via", and "Zoom" are not available. Flash movie playback screen a Sequential number/number of saved les Display the sequential number of the current le and the total number of saved les in the folder. b Display name of the le 300 Data Management Viewing Image Properties
Still image display screen (P296)/Flash movie playback screen (P300) M[Menu] "File property"
I[Edit]: Edit properties. b Properties displayed on the File property screen Item Description Setting View of a Still Image Set the image display format, zoom ratio, or interval between slideshow frames.
Still image display screen (P296)/Flash movie playback screen (P300)/Slideshow list screen
(P305) M[Menu] "View settings"
Perform the following operations File name File size File type*1 Date & Time (Saved) Display size*1 File restriction Source Move to the microSD*2 Display whether the le can be moved to a Display the le name Display the le size Display the le format Display the saved date and time Display the resolution Display whether the le is restricted Display the source microSD card
: Display the image in its original size.
[View type]
Normal Fit to screen : Display the image enlarged to t the screen.
[Zoom type]
Normal Same magnication : Zoom in the image displayed in its original
: Zoom in the image enlarged to t the screen. size.
[SlideShow interval]
Set the interval between slideshow frames.
*1 Not displayed for Flash movies.
*2 Data in a microSD card will be moved to the phone; display whether data can be moved to the phone.
[Auto rotating]
Set whether to display the image in a direction when you captured it with this FOMA terminal.
I[Done]
Data Management Continue on the next page 301 Setting File Restriction You can set the le restriction. The restricted le attached to mail cannot be sent or forwarded from the recipient's FOMA terminal.
Display a le to restrict M[Menu]
"File property"
The File property screen appears.
Move the cursor to the "File restriction" eld I[Edit] "File restricted"
Note This option cannot be changed for a le downloaded from a site. Edit image Editing Still Images You can edit still images. The edited still image is saved to the same folder as the source le. Only JPEG les can be edited. However, some les may not be edited. Editing a still image repeatedly may reduce the image quality or increase the le size.
Still image display screen (P294) M[Menu]
"Edit image"
M[Menu] Perform the following operations Still image edit screen
: Rotate the image 90 degrees counterclockwise.
: Rotate the image 90 degrees clockwise.
: Rotate the image 180 degrees.
[Save]
Save the edited still image. Go to Step 5.
[Rotate]
Left Right 180
[Mirror]
Left/Right : Flip the image horizontally. Up/Down : Flip the image vertically.
[Resize]
Change the image size.P301
[Crop]
Cut out a part of the image.P302 302 Data Management
[Sketch]
Draw lines or characters. Press M[Menu] to change "Pen/Eraser height" or "Pen color". Select "Eraser height" from "Pen/Eraser height" to erase a drawing where traced with a nger, etc.
[Insert]
Add a frame, stamp, or text. Frame : Add a frame to an image. Move the cursor to a folder C[Open] Select a frame After selecting a frame, press M[Menu] to select
"Change frame" or "Rotate".
: Add text to an image.P305 Stamp : Add a stamp to an image.P304 Text
[Retouch]
Change the brightness, contrast, or color tone of an image. Use J to switch to the item to retouch C[Select]
Adjust the item with J. If selecting "Auto level" or "Auto enhance", the image is adjusted automatically. If selecting "Color adjust" or "Level adjust", adjust each color with K. Pressing M[List] also enables you to select the item to retouch.
[Eect]
Set special eects to an image. Use J to switch to the item to retouch C[Select]
Depending on items, adjust with J. If selecting "Rotation" or "Spotlight", adjust each item with K. Pressing M[List] also enables you to select the item to set.
[Send via mail]
Create i-mode mail with the edited image attached.
[Undo]
Cancel the performed edit operation and restore the previous state. Press I[Cancel] to cancel editing.
C[OK]
C[Save]
"New le"/"Original le"
Press I[Undo] to return to the state before editing. New le Original le : Save the edited image over the source image.
: Save the edited image as a new image. Note
<Frame>
Available frame size: CIF (352288), Wallpaper (800480), Wallpaper (400240), QVGA (320240), QCIF (176144), and Sub-QCIF (12896). Only the frame size that is same as the source image size can be set.
"Resize"
Changing Image Size
Still image edit screen (P302) M[Menu]
Select an image size
C[OK]
Go to Step 4 in "Editing Still Images" (P303). Data Management Continue on the next page Continued on next page 303
"Insert" "Stamp"
Adding a Stamp
Still image edit screen (P302) M[Menu]
Move the cursor to a folder C[Open]
Select a stamp Use K to move the stamp to the position C[OK]
b To add another stamp Press M[Menu] "Change stamp" move the cursor to a folder C[Open] select a stamp use K to move the stamp to the position C[OK]. b To rotate the stamp Press M[Menu] "Rotate" select from "Left"/
"Right"/"180".
I[Done]
Go to Step 4 in "Editing Still Images" (P303). Note A stamp cannot be added to a source image with vertical or horizontal side smaller than 24 dots or larger than 640480 dots. Note The size of a source image with vertical or horizontal side smaller than 8 dots cannot be changed. If a size with dierent proportions than the source is selected, the original proportions will be retained for the resized image.
"Crop"
Cropping an Image
Still image edit screen (P302) M[Menu]
Select a cropping size Use K to move the frame to the area to be cropped C[Select]
b When "User dene" is selected Use K to move the cursor to start point C[Select] use K to move the cursor to end point C[Select] to set the area to crop.
C[OK]
Go to Step 4 in "Editing Still Images" (P303). Note The size of a source image with vertical or horizontal side smaller than 8 dots cannot be changed. 304 Data Management Adding Text Add text to an image. You can also change the font size or color, rotate the text, or add speech bubbles.
"Insert" "Text"
Still image edit screen (P302) M[Menu]
Enter the text to add
M[Menu] Perform the following operations
[Edit text]
Edit the pasted text.
[Font size]
Set the font size.
[Font color]
Change the added text color.
[Rotate]
Rotate the added text.
[Comic]
Add a speech bubble. Some speech bubbles cannot be set depending on the image size.
Use K to move the cursor to the position C[OK]
I[Done]
Go to Step 4 in "Editing Still Images" (P303). Note Text cannot be added to a source image with vertical or horizontal side smaller than 24 dots or larger than 640480 dots. Slide show Creating Slideshows You can create slideshows with up to 20 frames using saved still images. Up to 30 slideshows can be created. Up to 480800 dots of still images can be used for creating the slideshows.
M "Data Box" "My picture" Move the cursor to "Slide show" C[Open]
I[New] Enter the display name of the le Slideshow list screen Data Management Continue on the next page Continued on next page 305 Displaying Slideshow
Slideshow list screen (P305) Move the cursor to a slideshow C[View]
Slideshow display screen b Key operations while viewing a slideshow Description Operation J C[Full]
Play the previous/next slideshow Hide the soft keys and display a full slideshow/
restore to the original display size
C[Add] Move the cursor to a folder C[Open] Move the cursor to an image M[Menu] Perform the following operations I[View]: The selected image is displayed. T[Switch]: Switch between List view and Grid view.
[Select]
Add the selected le to the slideshow.
[View]
Display the selected le.
[File property]
Display the le name, size, and type, etc. of the selected le. P301
[List view/Grid view]
Switch the le display format.
[Sort]
Set conditions and sort les.
[Memory info.]
Handset memory : Display the status of storage space, etc. in External memory : Display the status of storage space, etc. of
"Data Box". the microSD card.
[New folder]
This option is not available.
Repeat Step 3 to save images I[Done]
b To delete the saved image Move the cursor to an image to delete and press M[Delete] "Yes". 306 Data Management Slideshow List Screen Sub Menu
Slideshow list screen (P305) Move the cursor to a slideshow M[Menu] Perform the following operations
[Add images]
Add images to the selected slideshow.
[Delete]
Delete the selected slideshow.
[Edit title]
Change the display name of the selected slideshow. Up to 30 full-
pitch or half-pitch characters can be entered.
[Set as stand-by]
Set the selected slideshow as the Stand-by display.
[View settings]
Set the image display format, zoom ratio, or interval between slideshow frames.P299 Slideshow Display Screen Sub Menu
Slideshow display screen (P306) M[Menu]
Perform the following operations
[Delete]
Delete the displayed slideshow.
[Edit title]
Change the display name of the displayed slideshow. Up to 30 full-
pitch or half-pitch characters can be entered.
[Full screen]
View the slideshow in Full screen. (In Full screen view, the following operations are available.) C/Q: Return the full screen view to the original view. J: Display the previous/next slideshow.
[Set as stand-by]
Set the displayed slideshow as the Stand-by display.
[View settings]
Set the image display format, zoom ratio, or interval between slideshow frames.P299 Moving picture/i-motion player Playing Moving Pictures/i-motion You can play moving pictures you captured, or i-motion obtained from sites or i-mode mails. b Available le formats File format*
Encoding method MP4 le MP4 (Mobile MP4) Video: MPEG-4, H.263, and H.264 Audio: AMR, AAC, HE-AAC, and Enhanced aacPlus File extension
* Some les in a compatible le format may not be played. mp4, 3gp Data Management Continue on the next page Continued on next page 307
M "Data Box" "i-motion"
I[New]: Create a folder.
Move the cursor to a le C[Play]
T[Mail]: Display the Compose message screen with the le in playback attached. i-motion screen i-motion playback screen
Move the cursor to a folder C[Open]
I[Mail]: Display the Compose message screen with the selected le attached. g[Delete]: Delete the selected le. T[Switch]: Switch between List view and Grid view. Icons displayed on the list screen.P295 i-motion le list screen a Display name of the le b Volume c Playback progress bar Display the playback elapsed time. d Elapsed time/total time e Control keys Display available navigation keys. b Key operations on the i-motion playback screen Operation Description C[Pause/Play] Pause/Play I[Stop]
J L(Hold down) While being pressed, rewind the video/sound R(Hold down) While being pressed, fast forward the video/
Stop Play the previous/next le sound Adjust the volume F/E, H 308 Data Management When Link is set in ticker After i-motion playback ends, a conrmation appears asking whether to use Phone To/AV Phone To/Web To/Mail To. To use the function, select an item and operate. Note Some les may not be fast forwarded and rewound during playback. When you fast forward or rewind i-motion during playback, i-motion is paused. i-motion Screen Sub Menu
i-motion screen (P308) Move the cursor to a folder M[Menu]
The i-motion screen sub menu is the same as "My Picture Screen Sub Menu" (P297). All All
[Move]
One
[Delete]
One
: Delete the selected le. Selected : Select and delete les. Mark les to delete I[Done] "Yes"
Press M[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.
: Delete all les in the folder. I[Done] "Yes" Enter the Terminal security code Press M[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.
: Move the selected le. Select a destination folder Selected : Select and move les. Select a destination folder Mark les to move I[Done]
Press M[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.
: Move all les in the folder. Select a destination folder I[Done] Enter the Terminal security code Press M[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all. i-motion File List Screen Sub Menu
i-motion le list screen (P308) Move the cursor to a le M[Menu] Perform the following operations
[Files]
Play Rename Reset name : Reset the display name of the selected le to its
: Play the selected le.
: Change the display name of the selected le. default title. If no title is set, "No title" is displayed. File property : Display the le name, size, and type, etc. of the selected le.P311
[Copy]
One
: Copy the selected le. Select a destination folder Selected : Select and copy les. All
: Copy all les in the folder Select a destination folder Mark les to copy I[Done]
Press M[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all. Select a destination folder I[Done] Enter the Terminal security code Press M[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all. Data Management Continue on the next page Continued on next page 309
[Send via]
: Create i-mode mail with the selected le attached. Go to Step 2 in "Composing and Sending i-mode Mail" (P138).
: Send a le via infrared communication. IrDA YouTube : Upload the selected le to YouTube
[Set as tone]
Set the selected le as a ring tone, etc.
[Set as display]
Set the selected le as the Stand-by display or incoming call screen.
[Sort]
Set conditions and sort les.
[Memory info.]
Handset memory : Display the status of storage space, etc. in External memory : Display the status of storage space, etc. of the
"Data Box". microSD card.
[New folder]
This option is not available.
[List view/Grid view]
Switch the le display format. Note
<YouTube>
The FOMA terminal connects to the YouTube site. Upload les by mail attachment. The captured moving picture is retained up to the compose message screen for uploading so make sure the receiver's address. A le of more than 2MB cannot be uploaded. For details, visit YouTube site (http://www.youtube.com/) via PC, etc. 310 Data Management i-motion Playback Screen Sub Menu
i-motion playback screen (P308) M[Menu]
Perform the following operations
[Send via mail]
Create i-mode mail with the selected le attached. Go to Step 2 in
"Composing and Sending i-mode Mail" (P138).
[Set as tone]
Set the le in playback as a ring tone, etc.
[Set as display]
Set the selected le as the Stand-by display or incoming call screen.
[Expand]*
Enlarge moving pictures/i-motion in the horizontal view. Press Q to restore to the original display size.
[Screen setting]*
Normal Play Full screen play (hor.)
: Set to play a le in the vertical view.
: Set to enlarge and play a le in the horizontal view.
[Chapter list]
Display the chapter list.
[Edit]
Edit the moving picture/i-motion in playback.P312
[File property]
Display the le name, size, and type, etc. of the le in playback. P311
* Cannot select after playback ends. Note During the sub menu operation, the moving picture/i-motion is paused.
<Set as tone/Set as display>
The following moving pictures/i-motion cannot be set as a Chaku-motion or incoming call screen:
- Files that were transferred to a PC or another FOMA terminal via infrared communication or DOCOMO keitai datalink and transferred back to the FOMA terminal
- Files that were copied or moved from the microSD card to the FOMA terminal, including those copied or moved from the terminal to the microSD card and copied or moved back to the FOMA terminal (Except i-motion that supports contents migration) Viewing Moving Pictures/i-motion Properties i-motion playback screen (P308) M[Menu]
"File property"
I[Edit]: Edit properties.
b Properties displayed on the File detail screen Description Item Display the le name Display the le size Display the le format File name File size File type Date & Time (Saved)*1 Display the saved date and time Play time Display size Video Audio Display the le playback time Display the resolution Display the video format Display the sound format HE-AAC and Enhanced aacPlus are displayed as AAC. Display whether the le is restrictedP302 Display whether the le can be set as a ring tone Display whether the le can be set as the Stand-by display or incoming call screen Display the default title of the le Display creator information Display copyright information Display the le description Display the source Title Creator Copyright Description Source Move to the microSD*2 Display whether the le can be moved to a microSD card File restriction Ringtone Receive display
*1 Appear only for data in the FOMA terminal memory.
*2 Data in a microSD card will be moved to the phone; display whether data can be moved to the phone. Data Management Continue on the next page 311 Edit moving pictures/i-motion Editing Moving Pictures/i-motion You can edit moving pictures/i-motion. The pre-installed les cannot be edited. Some les may not be edited. The ticker displayed on i-motion cannot be edited. Clipping a Frame of a Moving Picture as a Still Image You can clip a still image from a moving picture/i-motion. The clipped image is saved to the "Camera" folder in "My picture" of "Data Box".
i-motion playback screen (P308) Display the image to be clipped as a still image Operations during i-motion playbackP306
M[Menu] "Edit" "Capture"
Clipping a Frame of a Moving Picture You can clip a part of a moving picture/i-motion. The clipped moving picture/i-motion is saved to the same folder as the source le.
i-motion playback screen (P308) M[Menu]
"Edit" "Clipping" Perform the following operations
[For mail short]
Clip the video from the selected start point to 500KB or smaller and save it. This option can be selected when the video size exceeds 500KB.
[For mail long]
Clip the video from the selected start point to 2MB or smaller and save it. This option can be selected when the video size exceeds 2MB.
[Bound]
Clip the video from the selected start point to the selected end point and save it. Press C[Play] to play a moving picture/i-motion At start point to clip, I[Start] At end point to clip, I[End]
312 Data Management Using a Playlist The playback order of moving pictures/i-motion can be specied in a playlist. Select your favorite moving pictures/
i-motion saved on the FOMA terminal and microSD card and play them in your favorite order.
C[Add] Mark moving pictures/i-motion to save to a playlist I[Done]
Creating a Playlist Up to 10 playlists can be saved. Up to 99 moving pictures/
i-motion can be saved per playlist.
M "Data Box" "i-motion" Move the cursor to "Playlists" C[Open]
I[Done]
Saved moving picture/i-motion list screen
I[New] Enter a playlist name Up to 255 full-pitch/half-pitch characters can be entered. Playlist list screen Playing a Playlist
Playlist list screen (P313) Move the cursor to a playlist to play C[Play]
Playlist List Screen Sub Menu
Playlist list screen (P313) Move the cursor to a playlist M[Menu] Perform the following operations
[Add i-motion to playlist]
Add moving pictures/i-motion to the selected playlist. Mark moving pictures/i-motion to add to the playlist I[Done]
I[Done]
Data Management Continue on the next page Continued on next page 313
[Delete]
One
: Delete the selected playlist. Select : Select and delete playlists.
: Delete all playlists. All
[Edit title]
Edit the selected playlist name. Mark playlists to delete I[Delete] "Yes"
Press M[Menu] to select "Mark all" or "Unmark all". Saved Moving Picture/i-motion List Screen Sub Menu
Playlist list screen (P313) Move the cursor to a playlist M[Menu] "Add i-motion to playlist" M[Menu] Perform the following operations
[Play]
Play from the selected moving picture/i-motion.
[Change order]
Change the order of the selected moving picture/i-motion. Select a moving picture/i-motion to move Select a destination
"Yes"
314 Data Management
[Delete]
One
: Delete the selected moving picture/i-motion. Select : Select and delete moving pictures/i-motion. Mark moving pictures/i-motion to delete I[Delete]
"Yes"
Press M[Menu] to select "Mark all" or "Unmark all". All
: Delete all moving pictures/i-motion. Melody player Playing a Melody You can play pre-installed melodies or melodies downloaded from sites. b Available le formats File Format*
File extension
* Some les in a compatible le format may not be played. SMF, MFi mid, mld
M "Data Box" "Melody"
I[New]: Create a folder. Melody screen
Move the cursor to a folder C[Open]
I[Mail]: Display the Compose message screen with the selected le attached. g[Delete]: Delete the selected le. Icons displayed on the list screenP295 b Key operations on the Melody playback screen Operation C[Pause/Play]
I[Stop]
J F/E, H Description Pause/Play Stop Play the previous/next le Adjust the volume
Move the cursor to a le C[Play]
T[Mail]: Display the Compose message screen with the le in playback attached. Melody le list screen Melody Screen Sub Menu
Melody screen (P314) Move the cursor to a folder M[Menu]
The Melody screen sub menu is the same as the "My Picture Screen Sub Menu" (P297). However, "Grid view" is not available. Melody playback screen a Display name of the le b Volume c Playback progress bar Display the playback elapsed time. d Elapsed time/total time e Control keys Display available navigation keys. Melody File List Screen Sub Menu
Melody le list screen (P315) Move the cursor to a le M[Menu] Perform the following operations
[Files]
Play Rename Reset name : Reset the display name of the selected le to its
: Play the selected le.
: Change the display name of the selected le. File property : Display the name, size, and type, etc. of the selected default name. melody.P317 Data Management Continue on the next page Continued on next page 315 All
[Move]
One All
[Copy]
One
[Delete]
One
: Delete the selected le. Selected : Select and delete les. Mark les to delete I[Done] "Yes"
Press M[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.
: Delete all les in the folder. I[Done] "Yes" Enter the Terminal security code Press M[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.
: Move the selected le. Select a destination folder Selected : Select and move les. Select a destination folder Mark les to move I[Done]
Press M[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.
: Move all les in the folder. Select a destination folder I[Done] Enter the Terminal security code Press M[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.
: Copy the selected le. Select a destination folder Selected : Select and copy les. All
: Copy all les in the folder. Select a destination folder Mark les to copy I[Done]
Press M[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all. Select a destination folder I[Done] Enter the Terminal security code Press M[SelAll/ClrAll] to select/clear all.
[Send via]
: Create i-mode mail with the selected melody attached. Go to Step 2 in "Composing and Sending i-mode Mail" (P138). IrDA : Send a le via infrared communication.
[Set as]
Set the selected melody as a ring tone, etc.
[Sort]
Set conditions and sort les.
[Memory info.]
Handset memory : Display the status of storage space, etc. in External memory : Display the status of storage space, etc. of the
"Data Box". microSD card.
[New folder]
This option is not available. Melody Playback Screen Sub Menu
Melody playback screen (P315) M[Menu]
Perform the following operations
[Send via mail]
Create i-mode mail with the melody in playback attached. Go to Step 2 in "Composing and Sending i-mode Mail" (P138).
[Set as tone]
Set the melody in playback as a ring tone, etc.
[File property]
Display the le name, size, and type, etc. of the melody in playback. P317 316 Data Management Note During the sub menu operation, the melody playback is paused. Viewing Melody Properties
Melody playback screen (P315) M[Menu]
"File property"
I[Edit]: Edit properties. b Properties displayed on the File detail screen Description Item Display the le name Display the le size Display the le format File name File size File type Date & Time (Saved)*1 Display the saved date and time Display the le playback duration Play time File restriction Display whether the le is restrictedP302 Display whether the le can be set as a Ringtone ring tone Display the default title of the le Display the source Title Source Move to the microSD*2 Display whether the le can be moved to a microSD card
*1 Appear only for data in the FOMA terminal memory.
*2 Data in a microSD card will be moved to the phone; display whether data can be moved to the phone. microSD Cards You can save data on the FOMA terminal such as Phonebook entries, mail, or Bookmarks to a microSD card, or can load data on a microSD card to the FOMA terminal. Also, you can browse data on a microSD card from the FOMA terminal. L-03B supports a microSD card of up to 2GB and a microSDHC card of up to 8GB (commercially available) (as of June, 2009). For the latest information on operations of microSD cards, including manufacturers and capacity of cards, visit the following site
(in Japanese only). A microSD card not listed at the site may not function.
- From i-mode "iMenu" " (Menu list)" "
(Mobile Phone Manufacturers)" "WOW LG"
- From a PC http://jp.lgmobile.com/
Note that the information on the site shows results of compatibility checks and the results are not guaranteed. You can purchase microSD memory cards and microSD card adapters from electric appliance stores, etc. QR code to access the site Data Management Continue on the next page 317 Precautions on Using microSD Cards microSD cards formatted by another device such as a PC may not be usable on the FOMA terminal. Use microSD cards formatted by L-03B. Note that when formatting a microSD card, all data on the card is deleted.P323 microSD cards may lose data or deform due to an accident or failure. It is recommended that you make a copy of important data and keep it in a separate place. DOCOMO is not responsible for loss or alteration of any data. It may take a while to communicate depending on the amount of data to transfer. Also, data may not be copied. Do not turn the FOMA terminal power o while data is being read or written. Do not unplug the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02
(optional) while data is being read or written, or a microSD is being formatted. This may result in data loss. Never remove the microSD card while the card is being accessed such as when data on the card is being displayed or the storage capacity of the card is being checked. Do not attach labels or stickers on microSD cards. Even the thickness of labels may cause contact failure or data corruption. Do not touch the contacts with your hand or metal objects. Do not apply strong force, do not bend or drop, and do not let the card wet. Do not leave a removed microSD card within the reach of infants. Accidental swallowing or injury may result. When inserting/removing a microSD card, do not place your face close to the card because the card may eject when you suddenly release your ngers o. Also, do not let small children touch the card. Injury may result. Inserting/Removing a microSD Card Before inserting/removing a microSD card, make sure to turn the FOMA terminal power o. Inserting
Open the microSD card slot cover (a) and rotate in the direction of the allow b
Slowly insert a microSD card with the metal contacts side up until it clicks 318 Data Management
Close the microSD card slot cover Note Insert a microSD card properly. If the card is not inserted properly, the card cannot be used. Removing
Follow Step 1 in "Inserting" to open the cover and softly push the microSD card in the direction of the allow The microSD card pops out slightly.
Remove the microSD card Folder Structure on a microSD Card When you move or copy les from the FOMA terminal to the microSD card, or save still images or moving pictures captured with Camera directly to the microSD card, a folder compatible with the le type is automatically created on the microSD card. When you write data to the microSD card from a PC, a folder structure and le name like the following are required:
L-03B DCIM (Captured image, DCF-compliant JPEG, GIF other than animation) LGDCF L03Baaaa.JPG/.GIF LGeDB (Song (WMA le) management information) PRIVATE DOCOMO TABLE (Management information)*1 STILL (non-DCF-compliant JPEG, GIF animation) STILaaaa.JPG/.GIF SUDaaa STILaaaa.JPG/.GIF RINGER(Melody) RINGaaaa.MLD/.MID RUDaaa RINGaaaa.MLD/.MID MMFILE (Sound-only moving picture/i-motion) Faaaa.3GP MUDaaa Faaaa.3GP WM (WMA le)*2 Data Management Continue on the next page Continued on next page 319 WM_SYSTEM (WMA le management information and license information)*2 DECOIMG (Deco-mail pictogram) DIMGaaaa.JPG/.GIF DUDaaa DIMGaaaa.JPG/.GIF OTHER (Others) OTHERaaa.xxxx OUDaaa OTHERaaa.xxxx SD_VIDEO (Moving picture/i-motion) PRLaaa MOLaaa.3GP SD_BIND (Data supporting content migration)*2 SVC00001 (Moving picture/i-motion) SVC00002 (Chaku-Uta Full song) SD_PIM (Personal data) SD_AUDIO (SD-Audio-compliant music data)*2
: Extension (3- to 4-digit, half-pitch alphanumeric characters)
: 3-digit, half-pitch numeric characters between 100 and 999
(Use the same number for a folder name and le name saved in the folder.) xxxx
: 3-digit, half-pitch numeric characters between 001 and 999 aaa aaaa : 4-digit, half-pitch numeric characters between 0001 and 0999
*1 The "TABLE" folder has sub folders that store additional information for "DCIM", "STILL", "RINGER", "MMFILE", "DECOIMG",
"SD_VIDEO", and "OTHER".
*2 Data is encrypted and may not be viewed directly on a PC, etc. If you delete, edit, or add les under these folders, les may not work properly on L-03B. 320 Data Management b Number of savable les on a microSD card The number of savable les on the microSD card varies depending on the capacity of the microSD card. You can check available space on the microSD card by accessing "Memory info." or "Memory status".P325, P374 File Folder Number of savable items Still image (DCF-
compliant JPEG, GIF other than animation) Still image (non-DCF-
compliant JPEG, GIF animation) Melody Sound-only moving picture/i-motion WMA le Deco-mail pictogram DCIM STILL RINGER MMFILE Up to 900 folders/Up to 999 les per folder Up to 999 folders/Up to 999 les per folder Up to 999 folders/Up to 999 les per folder Up to 999 folders/Up to 999 les per folder Up to 1,000 les WM DECOIMG Up to 999 folders/Up to 999 les per folder Moving picture/i-motion SD_VIDEO Up to 999 folders/Up to Personal data Others SD_PIM OTHER 999 les per folder 1 folder/65,535 les Up to 999 folders/Up to 999 les per folder Note In some cases, a microSD card used with this FOMA terminal cannot be used with other microSD-compatible FOMA terminals because the folder structure is dierent. Mails that contain Korean texts in a microSD card are not displayed correctly on the Korean-incompatible terminal. Depending on the PC in use, folder/le names may appear in lower case. Also, le extensions or certain folders (hidden folders), etc. may not appear. Do not delete or move folders on the microSD card using a PC. If you do so, the folders may no longer be readable by L-03B. Note Some les may not be viewed/played. The folder/le list screen sub menu for a microSD card is the same as one for the FOMA terminal. However, the les cannot be set to the Stand-by display or ring tone, sent via infrared communication, and saved at the Data Center. Using a microSD Card You can move or copy les saved in Data Box on the FOMA terminal, such as still images, moving pictures or i-motion, to the microSD card, and you can view les saved from a PC to the microSD card on the FOMA terminal. Viewing/Playing Files on a microSD Card You can view/play les on the microSD card in the same way as ones on the FOMA terminal from "Data Box".
M "Data Box" "My picture"/"Music"/
"i-motion"/"Melody" Move the cursor to
"microSD" C[Open]
"Displaying Images"P296
"Managing Music Data"P270
"Playing Moving Pictures/i-motion"P307
"Playing a Melody"P314 Copying/Moving Files between the FOMA Terminal and a microSD Card You can copy or move les between the FOMA terminal and a microSD card by copying or moving les between the
"microSD" folder and other folders in Data Box. Example: To move a camera image saved on the FOMA terminal to a microSD card Select a folder other than "microSD".
M "Data Box" "My picture"
Move the cursor to a folder C[Open]
Move the cursor to a le M[Menu]
"External memory"
Move the cursor to the destination folder
"Move" "One"
I[Open] C[Select]
Data Management Continue on the next page Continued on next page 321 Note Files which can be copied/moved are JPEG/GIF image les excluding pre-installed data, and moving pictures whose size is QCIF or smaller, and melodies. Chaku-Uta Full songs, or i-motion downloaded from sites cannot be copied to a microSD card. Some les may not be copied/moved depending on le type or size. Flash movies saved on this FOMA terminal cannot be copied/
moved to a microSD card. You can move transferable copyright protected i-motion or music data saved in the FOMA terminal to a "Movablecontents"
folder in each "microSD" folder. Exchanging Personal Information between the FOMA Terminal and a microSD Card You can copy personal information between the FOMA terminal and a microSD card, and you can back up your data in the FOMA terminal to a microSD card. Personal information includes the following:
- Phonebook
- Schedule
- Text memo
- To do list
- Inbox
- Outbox
- Unsent message
- Bookmark 322 Data Management Copying Personal Information on the FOMA Terminal to a microSD Card You can copy personal information saved on the FOMA terminal to a microSD card. Copying Data One Piece at a Time Example: To copy a Phonebook entry
Stand-by display D Select a Phonebook entry to copy M[Menu] "Copy"
"to microSD"
Selecting Data Type to Make Copy at a Time (Backup)
M "LifeKit" "microSD" "PIM"
I[Backup] Select a data type to copy
Enter the Terminal security code "Yes"
b For Phonebook A conrmation asking whether to copy data in "Own Number" appears. Copying/Overwriting Personal Information on a microSD Card to the FOMA Terminal You can copy/overwrite personal information saved on a microSD card to the FOMA terminal. Copying Data One by One
M "LifeKit" "microSD" "PIM"
Select a data type Data saved on the microSD card is displayed. Personal data list screen
(Ex.: Phonebook) b Icons displayed on the Personal data list screen Icon
Description Individual data (one piece of data) Phonebook/Schedule/Memo/To do list/
Inbox/Outbox/Unsent message/Bookmark Backup data (multiple data) Phonebook/Schedule/Memo/To do list/
Inbox/Outbox/Unsent message/Bookmark C[Select]: Display details about data.
Move the cursor to data M[Menu]
"Copy to phone" "Yes"
b For backup data Select "Copy to phone" enter the Terminal security code "Yes". Note In Step 3, you can select backup data move the cursor to data press M[Menu] to select "Copy to phone" or "Overwrite to phone". If you select "Copy to phone", you can further select "Selected data" or "All data". The maximum number of data that can be saved on the FOMA terminal can be displayed for individual data in backup data. Data Management Continue on the next page 323 Overwriting with Backup Data You can overwrite the data on the FOMA terminal with data backed up in advance. Note that selecting "Overwrite to phone" deletes all saved data on the FOMA terminal and replaces it with the selected data from the microSD card. Make sure important data is not saved before selecting "Overwrite to phone".
Personal data list screen (P323) Move the cursor to backup data M[Menu]
"Overwrite to phone"
Enter the Terminal security code "Yes"
b For Phonebook A conrmation asking whether to copy data in "Own Number" appears. Personal Data List Screen Sub Menu
Personal data list screen (P323) Move the cursor to data M[Menu] Perform the following operations
[Rename]*
Change the display name of the selected le.
[Copy to microSD]
Copy (backup) all data of the displayed data type from the FOMA terminal to a microSD card at a time. Enter the Terminal security code "Yes"
For Phonebook entries, a conrmation asking whether to copy saved data in "Own Number" appears.
[Copy to phone]*
Copy the selected data to the FOMA terminal. For backup data, select "Copy to phone" enter the Terminal security code "Yes".
[Overwrite to phone]*
Overwrite the data on the FOMA terminal with the selected data. P324
[Multiple choice]*
Select and delete data. Mark data to delete I[Delete] "Yes"
Press M[Menu] to select "Delete", "Copy to phone", or "Select all"
or "Clear all" from "Select/Clear".
[Delete]*
Delete the selected data.
[Memory info.]
Display the status of storage space, etc. of the microSD card.
* Not displayed if there is no data on the microSD card. 324 Data Management Note Updating data may take a while if a large amount of data is saved on the microSD card. If you use another device to save data on the microSD card, the data saved on the card may not be displayed correctly on the FOMA terminal due to insucient available memory space for creating management information on the FOMA terminal. Checking Usage Status on a microSD Card
M "LifeKit" "microSD" "Memory info."
Note If the used space is not shown as "0KB" when no data is saved on the microSD card, format the card. The actual available space on a microSD card is smaller than the space printed on the card. Data may not be saved if there is not sucient memory space on the microSD card. Delete unnecessary data or insert a microSD card with sucient memory space to save data. Managing a microSD Card Formatting a microSD Card Format (initialize) a microSD card so that it can be used on the FOMA terminal.
M "LifeKit" "microSD" "Reset microSD"
A message indicating all data will be deleted appears. Select whether you want to continue to format.
"Yes" Enter the Terminal security code Note Use this FOMA terminal to format the card. Note that when formatting a microSD card, all data on the card is deleted. Updating Data on a microSD Card Update data on the microSD card if data cannot be displayed correctly on the FOMA terminal after changing, adding, or deleting data on the microSD card using another device.
M "LifeKit" "microSD" "Data update"
Mark data types to update I[Done]
Data Management Continue on the next page 325 Using the FOMA Terminal as a microSD Card Reader/Writer Connect this FOMA terminal with a microSD card inserted to a PC and read/write data on a microSD card. To use a microSD card, you need a microSD card separately. Only a PC with Windows Vista, XP, or Windows 2000 (Japanese versions) can be used to read/write data on a microSD card. Operation with other OS is not guaranteed. To use the FOMA terminal as a microSD card reader/writer, set up the USB mode. Before setting the USB mode, disconnect the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (optional). setting" "microSD mode"
M "Settings" "Others" "USB mode
Open the External Connector Terminal cover of the FOMA terminal (a) and insert the external connector of the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 with the front side (indicated by a mark, label, etc.) up until it clicks (b)
Connect the USB connector of the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 to a USB port on a PC (c) USB connector Release button External connector
(label side up) Release button Note When removing a microSD card or the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 from a PC, be sure to perform the procedure on safe removal for hardware from the task tray of the PC. Removing the memory card or FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 without performing the proper steps may result in data loss. When switching USB mode setting, disconnect the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 rst. When the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 is connected, the USB mode cannot be switched. If the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 is disconnected, the USB mode setting automatically returns to
"Communication mode". b Important Make sure that the FOMA terminal is correctly connected to a PC. If it is not connected correctly, data may not only fail to be exchanged but also be lost. 326 Data Management Infrared communication Using Infrared Communication You can exchange Phonebook entries, schedule events or bookmarks with a device supporting infrared communication. b Available data for transfer Data type Receiving capability All items One One Sending capability All items Number of savable items Refer to P84 Phonebook (Personal information) Schedule To Do*1 Received mail Sent mail Unsent mail Image le*2 Moving picture le*3 Melody*4 Bookmark*5 Memo
*1 If To Do tasks with alarm set are received prior to the set time, Up to 200 Up to 50 Up to 1,000 Up to 2,000 Up to 1,000 Up to 1,000 Up to 200*6 Up to 50 Up to 500 they may not be correctly saved.
*2 Up to 5MB of data per le can be sent/received.
*3 Up to 10MB of data per le can be sent/received.
*4 Up to 100KB of data per le can be sent/received.
*5 Sent/received bookmarks may not be ltered depending on the other party's terminal model.
*6 Up to 100 for i-mode and 100 for Full browser can be saved. b Save location of data received via infrared communication Data type Phonebook Schedule To Do Received mail Sent mail Unsent mail Still image Moving picture Melody Bookmark Memo Save location Phonebook Schedule To do list Inbox Outbox Unsent message
"Data transfer" folder in "My picture" of "Data Box"
"Data transfer" folder in "i-motion" of "Data Box"
"Data transfer" folder in "Melody" of "Data Box"
"Bookmark" folder in "i-mode"
"Bookmark" folder in "Full browser"
Text memo Data Management Continue on the next page 327 Performing Infrared Communication Use infrared devices within a distance of approximately 20cm. Do not move the FOMA terminal until the data exchange completes. If you hold the FOMA terminal in your hand at infrared communication, be sure to hold it securely so that it is not shaken. Infrared port 15 degrees 15 degrees Within approx. 20cm Attachments to i-mode mail are also forwarded. However, some types of attachments may not be forwarded. If a message text contains pictographs or symbols, they may not be displayed correctly on a recipient mobile phone or PC which is incompatible with pictographs. Depending on the recipient terminal, mail subject may be received partially. Infrared communication is not available when Lock all, Data access lock is set, or when Self mode is activated. Mails in large size may not be sent correctly. When mail is forwarded, only downloaded attachments are forwarded. Send/Receive via infrared communication Sending and Receiving Data One by One Cautions on Data Transfer Calls, i-mode, and data communication are not available during infrared communication because the FOMA terminal turns in the same status as out of service area. Data may not be transferred depending on the other party's FOMA terminal conditions. Depending on the other party's mobile phone model, the lter setting of received mail or bookmarks, or group setting of Phonebook entries may not be reected, or the content of Deco-mail may not be saved correctly. Infrared communication with infrared devices other than L-03B may result in data not being received or displayed correctly. Communication may take a while depending on the amount of data to be transferred. Also, data may not be received. Infrared communication may not be performed successfully under direct sunlight or uorescent light, or near another infrared device, due to the possible interference. Sending a Piece of Data Set the receiving device to the infrared receiving mode before sending data. Example: To send a Phonebook entry
Stand-by display D Move the cursor to a Phonebook entry M[Menu] "Send Ir data"
"Focused data" "Yes"
Note A message appears if the destination device cannot be found. Check the distance and angle with the other party again. 328 Data Management Receiving a Piece of Data
M "LifeKit" "Receive Ir data" "Receive"
Perform infrared transmission operations on
"Yes"
the sending device Infrared communication starts.
"Yes"
Send/Receive all via infrared communication Sending and Receiving All Data You can exchange all data with a PC or another FOMA terminal at a time. To exchange all data, an authentication password is used to identify the FOMA terminals of both sender and receiver correctly. An authentication password is any 4-digit number that you selected before infrared communication and should be entered both on the sending and receiving devices. Sending All Data Set the receiving device to the infrared receiving mode before sending data. Example: To send all Phonebook entries on the FOMA terminal
Stand-by display D M[Menu] "Send Ir data" "all in phone"
If an image is set to a Phonebook entry, a warning indicating that it may take a while to send appears. Select "Yes" to send.
Enter the Terminal security code Enter the authentication password "Yes"
Infrared communication starts. Note A message appears if the destination device cannot be found. Check the distance and angle with the other party again. Files in "My picture" cannot be sent at a time (one le can be sent at a time). Receiving All Data Receiving all data overwrites over the data on the FOMA terminal and deletes all saved data including protected mails. Make sure that important data is not saved before sending or receiving all data.
"Receive all" "Yes"
M "LifeKit" "Receive Ir data"
Enter the Terminal security code Enter the
Perform infrared transmission operations on authentication password the sending device Infrared communication starts.
"Yes"
Data Management Continue on the next page 329 Using Infrared Remote Control Function You can use the FOMA terminal as a remote controller of an infrared remote controlled device. An i-ppli can send remote control signals using infrared rays. To use the remote controller function, download software that supports the device. Key operations for remote control vary depending on the software. Some devices may not be controlled. Depending on the controlled device or ambient brightness, communication may not be possible. While Self mode is activated, the infrared remote controller cannot be used. Infrared Remote Control Operations Point the Infrared port of the FOMA terminal at the remote control sensor on a TV, etc. and operate the FOMA terminal within approximately 4m away from the device. Depending on the controlled device and ambient brightness, remote control may not be possible. Within the range of 15 degrees Viewing a Document Display a document le saved on microSD card. Save document les in "OTHER" folder or "OUDxxx (xxx are half-pitch numbers from 0 to 9)" folder of a microSD card. P319 b Available le formats File type*
Microsoft Word, Microsoft Excel, Microsoft PowerPoint, PDF doc, xls, ppt, pdf Extension
* Files for Word 2007, Excel 2007, and PowerPoint 2007 cannot be displayed. Also, some les in a compatible le format may not be displayed.
M "Media" "Document viewer" Select a document During zoom display, the entire document and the display area are shown. Within approx. 4m a Page number/total number of pages b Display magnication Infrared port 330 Data Management b Operation while viewing a document Description Operation
Zoom/restore the previous zoom ratio Display previous/next page M/I/F/E/
J*1, K*2, Slide an image Move the display position
*1 Available only in normal view.
*2 Available only in enlarged view. Note Tilting the FOMA terminal to the left automatically switches display to the horizontal view. Data Management Continue on the next page 331
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2009-11-27 | 1850.2 ~ 1909.8 | PCE - PCS Licensed Transmitter held to ear | Original Equipment |
2 | JBP - Part 15 Class B Computing Device Peripheral |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 | Effective |
2009-11-27
|
||||
1 2 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
LG Electronics USA
|
||||
1 2 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0020917688
|
||||
1 2 | Physical Address |
1000 Sylvan Avenue
|
||||
1 2 |
Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey 07632
|
|||||
1 2 |
United States
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 2 | TCB Application Email Address |
p******@pctestlab.com
|
||||
1 2 | TCB Scope |
B1: Commercial mobile radio services equipment in the following 47 CFR Parts 20, 22 (cellular), 24,25 (below 3 GHz) & 27
|
||||
1 2 |
A1: Low Power Transmitters below 1 GHz (except Spread Spectrum), Unintentional Radiators, EAS (Part 11) & Consumer ISM devices
|
|||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 | Grantee Code |
BEJ
|
||||
1 2 | Equipment Product Code |
L03B
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 | Name |
K******** H******
|
||||
1 2 | Title |
Director, Standards & Compliance
|
||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
201-4********
|
||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
201-8********
|
||||
1 2 |
k******@lge.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
1 2 | Firm Name |
PCTEST Engineering Laboratory, Inc.
|
||||
1 2 | Name |
R****** O****
|
||||
1 2 | Physical Address |
6660-B Dobbin Road
|
||||
1 2 |
Columbia, Maryland 21045
|
|||||
1 2 |
United States
|
|||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
410-2********
|
||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
410-2********
|
||||
1 2 |
p******@pctestlab.com
|
|||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 | If so, specify the short-term confidentiality release date (MM/DD/YYYY format) | 03/11/2010 | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Equipment Class | PCE - PCS Licensed Transmitter held to ear | ||||
1 2 | JBP - Part 15 Class B Computing Device Peripheral | |||||
1 2 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | PCS GSM Phone | ||||
1 2 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 2 | Purpose / Application is for | Original Equipment | ||||
1 2 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | Yes | ||||
1 2 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Grant Comments | Power output listed is EIRP. SAR compliance for body-worn operation is based on a separation distance of 2.0 cm between the unit and the body of the user. End-users must be informed of the body-worn operating requirements for satisfying RF exposure compliance. Belt clips or holsters not listed in this filing may not contain metallic components. The highest reported SAR values are: Part 24 - Head: 0.63 W/kg; Body-worn: 0.61 W/kg. This device also contains filings that are not operational in U.S. Territories. This filing is only applicable for US operations. | ||||
1 2 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 | Firm Name |
HCT Co., LTD
|
||||
1 2 | Name |
S****** L****
|
||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
82-31********
|
||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
82-31********
|
||||
1 2 |
s******@HCT.co.kr
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 24E | 1850.20000000 | 1909.80000000 | 1.1610000 | 2.5000000000 ppm | 247KGXW | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 15B | 16 |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC